Professional Documents
Culture Documents
THK Rodamientos Lineales
THK Rodamientos Lineales
LM Guide
General Catalog
A1-1
506E
LM Guide
General Catalog
A Product Descriptions
Classification Table of the LM Guides ... A1-8
Point of Selection ................................ A1-10
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide .... A1-10
Setting Conditions ................................. A1-12
Conditions of the LM Guide ................... A1-12
Selecting a Type .................................... A1-28
Types of LM Guides ............................. A1-28
Calculating the Applied Load ................. A1-40
Calculating an Applied Load .................. A1-40
Calculating the Equivalent Load ............ A1-57
Rated Load of an LM Guide in Each Direction .. A1-57
Calculating the Static Safety Factor ...... A1-61
Calculating the Average Load................ A1-62
Calculating the Nominal Life .................. A1-64
Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Balls .. A1-64
Nominal Life Equation for the Oil-Free LM Guide .. A1-64
Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Rollers .. A1-65
Predicting the Rigidity ............................ A1-68
Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload) ... A1-68
Service Life with a Preload Considered ... A1-69
Rigidity ............................................... A1-69
Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model .. A1-70
Determining the Accuracy...................... A1-74
Accuracy Standards ............................. A1-74
Guidelines for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type .. A1-75
Accuracy Standard for Each Model......... A1-76
Features and Dimensions of Each Model .. A1-87
Structure and Features of the Caged Ball LM Guide .. A1-88
Advantages of the Ball Cage Technology .. A1-89
Caged Ball LM Guide Global Standard Size Model SHS ... A1-94
Structure and Features ......................... A1-95
Types and Features ............................. A1-96
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Models SHS-C and SHS-LC.................. A1-98
Models SHS-V and SHS-LV .................. A1-100
Models SHS-R and SHS-LR.................. A1-102
Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail .. A1-104
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SHS .. A1-105
Caged Ball LM Guide Radial Type Model SSR ... A1-106
Structure and Features ......................... A1-107
Types and Features ............................. A1-108
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Models SSR-XW and SSR-XWM .......... A1-110
A1-2
506E
A1-3
506E
A1-4
506E
A1-5
506E
QZ Lubricator......................................... A1-502
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with QZ Attached .. A1-505
List of Parts Symbols ............................. A1-510
Dedicated Bellows ................................. A1-512
Bellows .............................................. A1-513
Dedicated LM Cover .............................. A1-525
LM Cover............................................ A1-526
Cap C .................................................... A1-527
Cap GC.................................................. A1-528
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP ............. A1-531
Lubrication Adapter................................ A1-534
Removing/mounting Jig ......................... A1-535
End Piece EP ........................................ A1-536
Model No. ............................................. A1-537
Model Number Coding .......................... A1-537
Notes on Ordering................................ A1-541
Precautions on Use ............................. A1-543
Precautions on Using the LM Guide ...... A1-543
Precautions on Handling the LM Guide for Special Environment .. A1-545
LM Guide for Medium-to-Low Vacuum .... A1-545
Oil-Free LM Guide ............................... A1-545
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. A1-546
QZ Lubricator for the LM Guide .............. A1-546
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper for LM Guides .. A1-546
Light Contact Seal LiCS for LM Guides ... A1-547
Cap GC .............................................. A1-547
A1-6
506E
A1-7
506E
LM Guide
Ball Guide
Full-ball Type
Standard Type
Standard Type
Model SHS
Model SSR
Model HSR
Radial
Model SR
Radial
Model NSR-TBC
Self-aligning
Wide Type
Miniature Type
Model SHW
Low Center of Gravity
Model RSR
Ultra Compact
Model RSR-Z
Ultra Compact
High Corrosion Resistance
Miniature Type
Model SRS
Wide Type
Model EPF
Finite stroke
Model HRW
Wide Rail
4-way Equal Load
Cross Type
Model SCR
4-way Equal Load
A1-8
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ball cage
Ball cage
Radial
Caged roller
Caged roller
Radial
4-way
4-way
Wide Rail
506E
LM Guide
Roller Guide
Model SRG
Model SRN
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ultra-high Rigidity
Low Center of Gravity
Model MX
Miniature Cross
Wide Type
Model SRW
High Temperature
High Temperature
Ultra-high Rigidity
Radial
High Temperature
Separate Type
Model HR
Model HSR-M1VV Model SR-MS
Medium-to-Low Vacuum
Heavy Load
Oil-Free
R Guide Type
Model GSR
Model GSR-R
Interchangeable, Self-aligning
Interchangeable, Self-aligning
With Rack
Model HCR
Model JR Type
Straight-Curved Type
Model HMG
Model JR
Structural Member Rail
4-way Equal Load
A1-9
506E
Point of Selection
LM Guide
Selection Starts
1 Setting Conditions
Change span, number
of LM blocks and
number of LM rails
Mounting orientation
2 Selecting a Type
Change type and size
SHS, SSR, SVR, SVS, SHW, SRS, SCR, EPF, HSR, SR, NR, NRS, HRW, RSR,
RSR-Z, HR, GSR, GSR-R, CSR, MX, JR, HCR, HMG, NSR-TBC, HSR-M1,
SR-M1, RSR-M1, HSR-M2, HSR-M1VV, SR-MS, SRG, SRN, SRW
A1-28
to
A1-39
A1-40
A1-57
A1-59
A1-61
Judgment on the
static safety factor
NO
YES
A1-62
A1-64
NO
YES
A1-14
2 Corrosion Prevention
A1-14
3 Contamination Protection
Selection Completed
A1-10
A1-15
506E
Point of Selection
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide
LM Guide
A1-69
1 Accuracy Standards
A1-74
A1-75
A1-76
A1-450
A1-11
506E
Setting Conditions
Conditions of the LM Guide
[Mounting Orientation]
The LM Guide can be mounted in the following five orientations.
If the mounting orientation of the LM Guide is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach
the raceway completely.
Be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block where the
grease nipple or the piping joint should be attached.
For the lubrication, see A24-2.
[Mounting Orientation]
Horizontal (symbol: H)
Inverted (symbol: R)
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Vertical (symbol: V)
Up
Down
A1-12
Up
Down
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS25C2SSCO+1000LP -
Model number (details are given on the
corresponding page of the model)
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 2 axes.
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 2 axes.
Other
Required number of axes: 2
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 3 axes.
A1-13
LM Guide
506E
[Service environment]
Lubrication
When using an LM system, it is necessary to provide effective lubrication. Without lubrication, the
rolling elements or the raceway may be worn faster and the service life may be shortened.
A lubricant has effects such as the following.
(1) Minimizes friction in moving elements to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
(2) Forms an oil film on the raceway to decrease stress acting on the surface and extend rolling fatigue life.
(3) Covers the metal surface to prevent rust formation.
To fully bring out the LM Guides functions, it is necessary to provide lubrication according to the
conditions.
If the mounting orientation is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach the raceway
completely.
Be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block where the
grease nipple or the piping joint should be attached. For the mounting orientations of LM Guides,
see A1-12. For the lubrication, see A24-2.
Even with an LM Guide with seals, the internal lubricant gradually seeps out during operation.
Therefore, the system needs to be lubricated at an appropriate interval according to the service conditions.
Corrosion Prevention
Determining a Material
Any LM system requires a material that meets the environments. For use in environments where
corrosion resistance is required, some LM system models can use martensite stainless steel.
(Martensite stainless steel can be used for LM Guide models SSR, SHW, SRS, HSR, SR, HRW,
RSR, RSR-Z and HR.)
The HSR series includes HSR-M2, a highly corrosion resistant LM Guide using austenite stainless
steel, which has high anti-corrosive effect. For details, see A1-390.
Surface Treatment
The surfaces of the rails and shafts of LM systems can be treated for anti-corrosive or aesthetic purposes.
THK offers THK-AP treatment, which is the optimum surface treatment for LM systems.
There are roughly three types of THK-AP treatment: AP-HC, AP-C and AP-CF. (See B0-20.)
A1-14
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
Contamination Protection
A1-15
LM Guide
When foreign material enters an LM system, it will cause abnormal wear or shorten the service life,
and it is necessary to prevent foreign material from entering the system. When entrance of foreign
material is predicted, it is important to select an effective sealing device or dust-control device that
meets the environment conditions.
THK offers contamination protection accessories for LM Guides by model number, such as end
seals made of special synthetic rubber with high wear resistance, and side seals and inner seals for
further increasing dust-prevention effect.
In addition, for locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS and dedicated
bellows are available by model number. Also, THK offers dedicated caps for LM rail mounting holes,
designed to prevent cutting chips from entering the LM rail mounting holes.
When it is required to provide contamination protection for a Ball Screw in an environment exposed
to cutting chips and moisture, we recommend using a telescopic cover that protects the whole system or a large bellows.
For the options, see A1-478.
506E
[Special environments]
Clean Room
In a clean environment generation of dust
from the LM system has to be reduced
and anti-rust oil cannot be used.
Therefore, it is necessary to increase the
corrosion resistance of the LM system. In
addition, depending on the level of
cleanliness, a dust collector is required.
Corrosion Prevention
Material-based Measure
Stainless Steel LM Guide
This LM Guide uses martensite stainless
steel, which has corrosion resistant effect.
Surface Treatment
Grease
A1-16
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS
SVR/SVS
SSR
SRS
A1-118
A1-106
SCR
EPF
A1-162
A1-148
SRG
A1-170
SRN
SRW
A1-416
SSR
A1-432
SHW
SRS
A1-138
A1-106
SR
HRW
A1-208
A1-138
A1-442
HSR
A1-148
HR
A1-240
A1-178
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
SR-MS
HSR-M2
A1-390
A1-404
B0-20
A24-12
A24-14
A1-17
LM Guide
A1-94
SHW
506E
Vacuum
In a vacuum environment, measures are required
to prevent gas from being emitted from a resin
and the scattering of grease. Anti-rust oil cannot
be used, therefore, it is necessary to select a
product with high corrosion resistance.
High Temperature
LM Guide
Supported
models
HSR-M1 SR-M1
RSR-M1
Highly Corrosion
Resistant LM Guide
Corrosion Prevention
Stainless Steel LM Guide
In a vacuum environment, use a stainless
steel LM Guide, which is highly corrosion
resistant.
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Vacuum Grease
Oil-Free
In environments susceptible to liquid lubricants, a
lubrication method other than grease or oil is required.
Dry Lubricant
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film is a fully dry lubricant developed
for use under atmospheric to high-vacuum environments.
It has superior characteristics in load carrying capacity, wear
resistance and sealability to other lubrication systems.
A1-18
Oil-Free LM Guide
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1
SR-M1
HSR-M1VV
A1-370
A1-380
SR-MS
A1-396
A1-404
HSR-M2
A1-390
HSR
SR
A1-178
HR
HRW
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
SR-MS
A1-404
A1-19
LM Guide
A1-354
RSR-M1
506E
Corrosion
Prevention
As with clean room applications, it is
necessary to increase corrosion
resistance through material selection and
surface treatment.
Material-based Measure
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Highly Corrosion
Resistant LM Guide
Surface Treatment
A1-20
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHW
SSR
A1-138
SR
HSR
HRW
A1-178
HR
A1-148
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
HSR-M2
A1-390
THK AP-HC
Treatment
B0-20
THK AP-C
Treatment
B0-20
THK AP-CF
Treatment
B0-20
A1-21
LM Guide
A1-106
SRS
506E
High Speed
In a high speed environment, it is
necessary to apply an optimum
lubrication method that reduces
heat generation during high speed
operation and increases grease
retention.
QZ Lubricator
Grease
A1-22
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS
SRS
A1-106
SCR
A1-148
SRG
A1-118
A1-138
EPF
A1-162
A1-170
SRN
SRW
A1-416
A1-432
A1-442
QZ Lubricator
for the LM Guide
A1-502
A24-7
A24-20
A1-23
LM Guide
A1-94
SHW
SVR/SVS
SSR
506E
High Temperature
In a high temperature environment, dimensional
alterations caused by heat is problematic. Use a High
Temperature LM Guide, which is heat resistant and has
minimal dimensional alterations after being heated.
Also, use a high temperature grease.
Heat Resistance
High Temperature
LM Guide
Supported
models
Grease
High Temperature Grease
Use a high temperature grease with which the
rolling resistance of the LM system is
consistent even at high temperature.
Low Temperature
In a low temperature environment, use an LM system
with a minimal amount of resin components and a
grease that minimize fluctuations in rolling resistance,
even at low temperature.
High Temperature
Grease
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Corrosion Prevention
Surface Treatment
Grease
Use THK AFC Grease, with which the rolling
resistance of the system little is consistent
even at low temperature.
Micro Motion
Low Temperature
Grease
Grease
THK AFC Grease
AFC Grease is a urea-based grease that excels
in oil film strength and wear resistance.
A1-24
Grease
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1
SR-M1
RSR-M1
SSR
A1-370
A1-380
SHW
SRS
A1-106
HSR
A1-138
SR
A1-148
HRW
A1-178
HR
A1-396
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
B0-20
A24-10
A24-10
A1-25
LM Guide
A1-354
HSR-M1VV
506E
Foreign Matter
If foreign matter enters the LM system, it will
cause abnormal wear and shorten the service
life. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent such
entrance of foreign matter.
Especially in an environment containing
small foreign matter or a water-soluble
coolant that a telescopic cover or a bellows
cannot remove, it is necessary to attach a
contamination protection accessory capable
of efficiently removing foreign matter.
LM Guide
+Metal scraper
+Contact scraper LaCS
+Cap GC, etc.
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
Metal Scraper
Metal Scraper
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator is a lubrication system that
feeds the right amount of lubricant by
closely contacting its highly oil-impregnated
fiber net to the ball raceway.
A1-473
Supported
models
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
Metal
Scraper
Protector
The protector minimizes the entrance of
foreign material even in harsh environments where foreign material such as fine
particles and liquids are present.
A1-26
A1-473
Supported
models
SRG
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHW
SSR
LM Guide
A1-94
SRS
A1-106
A1-138
SVR/SVS
A1-118
NR/NRS
A1-178
A1-220
A1-416
A1-27
506E
Selecting a Type
Types of LM Guides
THK offers a wide array of types and dimensions with LM Guides as standard so that you can select
the optimal product for any application. With the unit structure of each model, you can easily obtain
high running accuracy with no clearance simply by mounting the product on a plane surface with
bolts. We have a proven track record and know-how in extensive applications with LM Guides.
Classification
Caged Ball
LM Guide
Radial type
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
Oil-Free LM Guides
for Special Environments
Caged Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
A1-28
Type
Specification
Table
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
SSR-XW
A1-110
SSR-XV
A1-112
9.1 to 21.7
SSR-XTB
A1-114
SR-W
A1-214
9.51 to 411
SR-M1W
A1-374
SR-V
A1-214
SR-M1V
A1-374
SR-TB
A1-216
SR-M1TB
A1-376
SR-SB
A1-216
SR- M1SB
A1-376
SR-MSV
A1-408
SR-MSW
A1-408
SVR-C
A1-128
48 to 260
68 to 328
SVR-LC
A1-128
57 to 340
86 to 481
SVR-R
A1-124
48 to 260
68 to 328
SVR-LR
A1-124
57 to 340
86 to 481
SVR-CH
A1-134
90 to 177
115 to 238
SVR-LCH
A1-134
108 to 214
159 to 312
SVR-RH
A1-132
90 to 177
115 to 238
SVR-LRH
A1-132
108 to 214
159 to 312
9.7 to 22.5
19.3 to 537
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
LM Guide
Width
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 33
34 to 48
24 to 33
52 to 73
24 to 135
34 to 250
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 68
52 to 140
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 28
34 to 42
24 to 28
34 to 42
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
50 to 126
31 to 75
50 to 126
48 to 70
100 to 140
48 to 70
55 to 80
55 to 80
Features
Long service life, long-term
maintenance-free operation
Low dust generation, low noise,
acceptable running sound
Superbly high speed
Smooth motion in all
mounting orientations
Major application
Photolithography machine
Organic EL display
manufacturing machine
Ion implantation equipment
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
A1-29
506E
4-way type
Radial Type
Classification
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Caged Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
A1-30
Type
Specification
Table
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
NR-A
A1-230
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LA
A1-230
44 to 599
113 to 1300
NR-B
A1-234
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LB
A1-234
44 to 599
113 to 1300
NR-R
A1-226
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LR
A1-226
44 to 599
113 to 1300
SVS-C
A1-130
37 to 199
52 to 251
SVS-LC
A1-130
44 to 261
66 to 368
SVS-R
A1-126
37 to 199
52 to 251
SVS-LR
A1-126
44 to 261
66 to 368
SVS-CH
A1-134
69 to 136
88 to 182
SVS-LCH
A1-134
83 to 164
122 to 239
SVS-RH
A1-132
69 to 136
88 to 182
SVS-LRH
A1-132
83 to 164
122 to 239
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
50 to 126
31 to 75
50 to 126
48 to 70
100 to 140
48 to 70
55 to 80
55 to 80
Features
4-way type
High vibration resistance
and impact resistance
due to improved damping
characteristics
Has dimensions almost the
same as that of the full-ball
type LM Guide model HSR,
which is practically a global
standard size
Major application
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
A1-31
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Caged Roller
LM Guide super ultra-heavyload, high rigidity
types
Full-Complement
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Caged Ball
LM Guide heavy-load, high
rigidity types
A1-32
Type
Specification
Table
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
SRG-A, C
A1-422
11.3 to 131
25.8 to 266
SRG-LA, LC
A1-422
26.7 to 278
63.8 to 599
SRG-R, V
A1-426
11.3 to 131
25.8 to 266
SRG-LR, LV
A1-426
SRN-C
A1-436
59.1 to 131
119 to 266
SRN-LC
A1-436
76 to 278
165 to 599
SRN-R
A1-438
59.1 to 131
119 to 266
SRN-LR
A1-438
76 to 278
165 to 599
SRW-LR
A1-446
115 to 601
256 to 1170
NRS-A
A1-232
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LA
A1-232
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
NRS-B
A1-236
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LB
A1-236
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
NRS-R
A1-228
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LR
A1-228
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
SHS-C
A1-98
14.2 to 205
24.2 to 320
SHS-LC
A1-98
17.2 to 253
31.9 to 408
SHS-V
A1-100
14.2 to 205
24.2 to 320
SHS-LV
A1-100
17.2 to 253
31.9 to 408
SHS-R
A1-102
14.2 to 128
24.2 to 197
SHS-LR
A1-102
36.8 to 161
64.7 to 259
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
Major application
Width
24 to 70
47 to 140
30 to 120
63 to 250
24 to 80
34 to 100
30 to 90
44 to 126
44 to 63
100 to 140
44 to 75
44 to 63
70 to 100
44 to 75
70 to 126
70 to 150
135 to 300
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 105
50 to 200
24 to 90
47 to 170
24 to 90
47 to 170
24 to 90
34 to 126
24 to 90
34 to 126
28 to 80
34 to 100
28 to 80
34 to 100
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Machining center
NC lathe
XYZ axes of heavy
cutting machine tools
Grinding head feeding
axis of grinding
machines
Components requiring a
heavy moment and high
accuracy
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Gantry five axis milling
machine
Z axis of electric
discharge machines
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Car elevator
Food-related machine
Testing machine
Vehicle doors
Printed circuit board
drilling machine
ATC
Construction equipment
Shield machine
Semiconductor/liquid
crystal manufacturing
equipment
A1-33
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide heavy-load, high
rigidity types
LM Guide for
Medium-to-Low
Vacuum
Full-Complement
LM Guides special LM rail
types
A1-34
Type
Specification
Table
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
13.5 to 310
HSR-A
A1-184
8.33 to 210
HSR-M1A
A1-360
HSR-LA
A1-184
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LA
A1-360
HSR-CA
A1-198
13.8 to 210
23.8 to 310
HSR-HA
A1-198
21.3 to 518
31.8 to 728
HSR-B
A1-186
8.33 to 210
13.5 to 310
HSR-M1B
A1-362
HSR-LB
A1-186
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LB
A1-362
HSR-CB
A1-200
13.8 to 210
23.8 to 310
HSR-HB
A1-200
21.3 to 518
31.8 to 728
HSR-R
A1-192
1.08 to 210
2.16 to 310
HSR-M1R
A1-364
HSR-LR
A1-192
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LR
A1-364
HSR-HR
A1-202
351 to 518
506 to 728
HSR-M1VV
A1-400
8.33
13.5
HSR-YR
A1-196
8.33 to 141
13.5 to 215
HSR-M1YR
A1-366
JR-A
A1-328
JR-B
A1-328
JR-R
A1-328
31.8 to 412
31.8 to 412
31.8 to 412
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
24 to 110
47 to 215
24 to 48
47 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 48
63 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 145
63 to 350
24 to 110
47 to 215
24 to 48
47 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 48
63 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 145
63 to 350
11 to 110
16 to 156
28 to 55
34 to 70
30 to 110
44 to 156
30 to 55
44 to 70
120 to 145
250 to 266
28
28 to 90
28 to 55
Features
34
61 to 114
70 to 140
61 to 114
70 to 140
65 to 124
48 to 100
Major application
Machining center
NC lathe
XYZ axes of heavy cutting machine tools
Grinding head feeding axis
of grinding machines
Components requiring a
heavy moment and high accuracy
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling machine
Gantry five axis milling machine
Z axis of electric discharge
machines
Wire-cut electric discharge
machine
Car elevator
Food-related machine
Testing machine
Vehicle doors
Printed circuit board drilling
machine
ATC
Construction equipment
Shield machine
Semiconductor/liquid crystal
manufacturing equipment
Medical equipment
Semiconductor/liquid crystal
manufacturing equipment
A1-35
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Specification
Table
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
64.7 to 408
SCR
A1-166
36.8 to 253
Full-Complement
LM Guide
orthogonal type
CSR
A1-314
Caged Ball
LM Guide wide, low center of
gravity types
SHW-CA
A1-142
SHW-CR, HR
A1-144
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guide wide, low center of
gravity types
HRW-CA
A1-244
HRW-CR, LRM
A1-246
HMG
A1-344
Straight section
4.23 to 66.7
2.56 to 66.2
Curved section
0.44 to 36.2
Caged Ball LM
Guides
Finite stroke
EPF
A1-174
HR, HR-T
A1-282
1.57 to 141
GSR-T
A1-294
GSR-V
A1-294
GSR-R
A1-302
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide separate types
Interchangeable
designs
Type
Full-Complement Ball
LM Guides LM rail-rack intergrated
type
A1-36
3.04 to 206
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
47 to 118
12 to 50
12 to 50
17 to 60
60 to 200
12 to 50
30 to 130
24 to 90
47 to 170
8 to 16
17 to 32
8.5 to 60
18 to 125
20 to 38
32 to 68
20 to 30
32 to 50
30 to 38
Features
Major application
Z axis of IC printed
circuit board drilling
machine
Z axis of small electric
discharge machine
Loader
Machining center
4-way equal load, thin and highly NC lathe
rigid
Robot
Wide, low center of gravity, space Wire-cut electric
saving structure
discharge machine
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
Freedom of design
Cost reduction through simplified
structure
Caged ball effect using a cage
Smooth movement with minimal
rolling variation
4-groove construction in a
compact body
Low-Profile high rigidity, space
saving structure
Interchangeable with Cross-Roller Guide
Preload can be adjusted
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
LM block and LM rail are both
interchangeable
Preload can be adjusted
Capable of absorbing vertical level
error and horizontal tolerance for
parallelism
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Hollow table
Printed circuit board
assembler
Machine tool table
Electric discharge
machine
XY axes of horizontal
machining center
APC
Semiconductor/liquid
crystal manufacturing
equipment
Measuring instrument
Wafer transfer
equipment
Construction equipment
Railroad vehicle
CT scanner
Medical equipment
Stage setting
Car elevator
Amusement machine
Turntable
Tool changer
Machining center
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Tool changer
Woodworking machine
Guide using an
aluminum mold base
Welding machine
Coating machine
Car washing machine
Industrial robot
Various conveyance systems
Automated warehouse
Palette changer
ATC
Door closing device
Industrial robot
Various conveyance
systems
Automated warehouse
Palette changer
ATC
A1-37
LM Guide
70 to 180
Width
506E
Classification
Type
Specification
Table
SRS-M
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
Caged Ball
LM Guides
SRS-N
SRS-WM
A1-158
SRS-WN
RSR-M/K/V/T
A1-256
RSR-M1V
A1-384
RSR-N
A1-256
0.3 to 14.2
0.44 to 20.6
RSR-M1N
A1-384
2.6 to 14.2
3.96 to 20.6
RSR-ZM
A1-270
RSR-WM/WV/WT
A1-260
0.25 to 6.66
0.47 to 9.8
RSR-M1WV
A1-386
2.45 to 6.66
3.92 to 9.8
RSR-WN
A1-260
RSR-M1WN
A1-386
RSR-WZM
A1-272
1.37 to 6.66
2.16 to 9.8
Full Complement
Ball LM Guide orthogonal type
MX
A1-320
0.59 to 2.04
1.1 to 3.21
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guides
HCR
A1-336
4.7 to 141
8.53 to 215
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guides
NSR-TBC
A1-350
Miniature types
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide wide types
Self-aligning
Circular arc types
types
A1-38
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
8 to 25
17 to 48
10 to 16
20 to 32
9 to 16
25 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
4 to 25
8 to 46
10 to 25
20 to 46
4 to 25
8 to 46
10 to 25
20 to 46
8 to 16
17 to 32
4.5 to 16
12 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
4.5 to 16
12 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
9 to 16
25 to 60
10 to 14.5
18 to 90
40 to 105
Features
Long service life, long-term
maintenance-free operation
Low dust generation, low noise,
acceptable running sound
Superbly high speed
Smooth motion in all mounting orientations
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
Lightweight and compact
Major application
IC/LSI manufacturing
machine
Hard disc drive
Slide unit of OA
equipment
Wafer transfer
equipment
Printed circuit board
assembly table
Medical equipment
Electronic components
of electron microscope
Optical stage
Stepper
Plotting machine
Feed mechanism of IC
bonding machine
Inspection equipment
Feed mechanism of IC
bonding machine
Printed circuit board
assembly table
Medical equipment
Electronic components
of electron microscope
Optical stage
X-Ray machine
Large swivel base
CT scanner
Pendulum vehicle for
Medical equipment
railroad
Stage setting
Pantagraph
Car elevator
Control unit
Amusement machine
Optical measuring
Turntable
machine
Tool changer
Tool grinder
XY axes of ordinary industrial machinery
Various conveyance systems
Automated warehouse
Palette changer
Automatic coating machine
Various welding machines
IC/LSI manufacturing
machine
A compact XY structure is allowed Inspection equipment
due to an XY orthogonal,
Slide unit of OA
single-piece LM block
15.2 to 30.2
equipment
Stainless steel type also available Wafer transfer
as standard
equipment
39 to 170
70 to 175
A1-39
LM Guide
Height
506E
Radial load
Lateral
load
Lateral
load
MA
Moment
in the pitching
direction
MB
Moment
in the yawing
direction
MC
Moment
in the rolling
direction
Moment Equivalence
When the installation space for the LM Guide is limited, you may have to use only one LM block, or
double LM blocks closely contacting with each other. In such a setting, the load distribution is not
uniform and, as a result, an excessive load is applied in localized areas (i.e., both ends) as shown in
Fig.2. Continued use under such conditions may result in flaking in those areas, consequently shortening the service life. In such a case, calculate the actual load by multiplying the moment value by
any one of the equivalent-moment factors specified in Table1 to Table7.
Moment load
Moment load
Rows of balls under a load
Rows of balls under a load
LM rail
Ball
displacement line
P = KM
P
K
M
A1-40
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Equivalent Factor
PR=KARMA
Equivalent in the radial direction
PL=KALMA
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.3 Equivalent Factors for the MA Moment
KAR=
C0
MA
KAL=
C0L
MA
C0
C0L
=
=1
KARMA KALMA
PT=KBMB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
PT=KBMB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
Fig.4 Equivalent Factors for the MB Moment
A1-41
LM Guide
Since the rated load is equivalent to the permissible moment, the equivalent factor to be multiplied
when equalizing the MA, MB and MC moments to the applied load per block is obtained by dividing
the rated loads in the corresponding directions.
With those models other than 4-way equal load types, however, the load ratings in the 4 directions
differ from each other. Therefore, the equivalent factor values for the MA and MC moments also differ
depending on whether the direction is radial or reverse radial.
506E
PR=KCRMC
Equivalent in the radial direction
PL=KCLMC
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.5 Equivalent Factors for the MC Moment
KCR=
C0
MC
KCL=
C0L
MC
C0
C0L
=
=1
KCRMC KCLMC
C0
C0L
C0T
PR
PL
PT
:
:
:
:
:
:
A1-42
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Table1 Equivalent Factors (Models SHS, SSR, SVR, SVS, SHW and SRS)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAR1
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
KCR
KCL
2.6910-2
1.3810-1 2.6910-2
1.5010-1
15L
1.0710-1
2.2210-2
1.0710-1 2.2210-2
1.5010-1
20
1.1510-1
2.1810-2
1.1510-1 2.1810-2
1.0610-1
20L
8.8510-2
1.7910-2
8.8510-2 1.7910-2
1.0610-1
9.2510
-2
1.9010
-2
25L
7.6210
-2
1.6210
-2
30
8.4710-2
30L
9.2510
-2
1.9010
-2
7.6210
-2
9.2910-2
1.6210
-2
9.2910-2
1.6310-2
8.4710-2 1.6310-2
7.6910-2
6.5210-2
1.3410-2
6.5210-2 1.3410-2
7.6910-2
6.9510
-2
1.4310
-2
35L
5.4310
-2
1.1610
-2
45
6.1310-2
45L
1.4310
-2
6.2910-2
1.1610
-2
6.2910-2
1.2410-2
6.1310-2 1.2410-2
4.6910-2
4.7910-2
1.0210-2
4.7910-2 1.0210-2
4.6910-2
4.9710
-2
1.0210
-2
55L
3.8810
-2
8.3010
-3
65
3.8710-2
65L
3.0610-2
35
55
6.9510
-2
5.4310
-2
4.9710
-2
1.0210
-2
3.8810
-2
4.0210-2
8.3010
-3
4.0210-2
7.9110-3
3.8710-2 7.9110-3
3.4010-2
6.5110-3
3.0610-2 6.5110-3
3.4010-2
15XW (TB) 2.0810-1 1.0410-1 3.7510-2 1.8710-2 1.4610-1 2.5910-2 1.7110-1 8.5710-2
15XV
20XW (TB) 1.6910-1 8.4610-2 3.2310-2 1.6210-2 1.1910-1 2.2510-2 1.2910-1 6.4410-2
SSR
SVR
20XV
25XW (TB) 1.4110-1 7.0510-2 2.5610-2 1.2810-2 9.8610-2 1.7710-2 1.1010-1 5.5110-2
25XV
30XW
35XW
25
25L
30
30L
35
35L
45
45L
55
55L
65
65L
A1-43
LM Guide
1.3810-1
25
SHS
KAL1
15
506E
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAL1
KAR1
SVS
SHW
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
KCR
KCL
25
25L
30
30L
7.2910-2
35
35L
45
45L
55
55L
65
65L
6.1110-2
12
2.4810-1
4.6910-2
2.4810-1 4.6910-2
1.4010-1
12HR
1.7010-1
3.5210-2
1.7010-1 3.5210-2
1.4010-1
14
1.9210-1
3.8010-2
1.9210-1 3.8010-2
9.9310-2
17
1.7210-1
3.4110-2
1.7210-1 3.4110-2
6.2110-2
21
1.5910
-1
2.9510
-2
27
1.2110
-1
2.3910
-2
35
8.1510-2
50
1.5910
-1
2.9510
-2
1.2110
-1
5.5710-2
2.3910
-2
4.9910-2
1.6410-2
8.1510-2 1.6410-2
3.0210-2
6.2210-2
1.2410-2
6.2210-2 1.2410-2
2.3010-2
6.3310
-1
9.2010
-2
5WM
4.4810
-1
7.3010
-2
4.1910-1
7W
9.3010
-2
3.8510-1
7.4010
-2
1.9610-1
6.7610-2
4.1810-1 6.9410-2
2.5810-1
3.0110-1
5.3210-2
3.0010-1 5.4610-2
1.3610-1
4.8610
-1
6.8910
-2
9XM
2.9510
-1
5.2710
-2
9XN
2.1310-1
9W
9WN
5M
6.4510
-1
4.5610
-1
-2
2.1710-1
-2
2.1710-1
4.1210-2
2.1910-1 4.2310-2
2.1710-1
2.3710-1
4.2510-2
2.4410-1 4.3710-2
1.0610-1
1.7410-1
3.3510-2
1.7810-1 3.4410-2
1.0610-1
2.9410
-1
4.5010
-2
12N
1.8610
-1
3.5110
-2
12W
2.0010-1
12WN
9XS
5.0410
-1
3.0610
-1
4.5010
1.5310-1
3.5110
-2
1.5310-1
3.6910-2
2.0010-1 3.6910-2
7.9710-2
1.4410-1
2.8310-2
1.4410-1 2.8310-2
7.9710-2
2.1710
-1
3.6910
-2
15N
1.4310
-1
2.7310
-2
15W
1.6710-1
15WN
15
20
25
1.8610
-1
3.6910
-2
1.4110-1
2.7310
-2
1.4110-1
2.9410-2
1.6710-1 2.9410-2
4.8310-2
1.1310-1
2.2710-2
1.1310-1 2.2710-2
4.8310-2
1.8010
-1
3.3010
-2
1.1410
-1
2.1710
-2
A1-44
2.9410
5.4310
-2
SRS 12
-1
7.1110
2.1710
-1
1.4310
-1
1.8610
-1
1.1410
-1
3.4110
-2
9.3410-2
2.1710
-2
8.1310-2
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Table2 Equivalent Factors (Models SCR, EPF and HSR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAL1
KAR1
KB2
KCR
KCL
1.3810-1
1.5010-1
20S
1.1510-1
2.1810-2
1.1510-1
1.0610-1
20
8.8510-2
1.7910-2
8.8510-2
1.0610-1
25
9.2510-2
1.9010-2
9.2510-2 1.9010-2
30
8.4710
-2
1.6310
-2
35
6.9510
-2
1.4310
-2
45
6.1310-2
65
3.8710-2
8.4710
-2
6.9510
-2
1.6310
7.6910-2
1.4310
-2
6.2910-2
1.2410-2
6.1310-2 1.2410-2
4.6910-2
7.9110-3
3.8710-2 7.9110-3
3.4010-2
3.5510
9M
3.1010
-1
3.1010
12M
2.6810-1
2.6810-1
15M
2.0010-1
2.0010-1
-1
4.3910
-1
9.2910-2
-2
-1
6.7510
-2
5.3310
-2
3.5510
-1
2.8610-1
-1
2.2210-1
1.6710-1
4.3910
-1
3.0910
-1
1.3410-1
6.7510
-2
2.9710-1
5.3310
-2
2.3510-1
10
3.0910
12
2.0810-1
3.7410-2
2.0810-1 3.7410-2
1.9110-1
15
1.6810-1
2.9510-2
1.6810-1 2.9510-2
1.6010-1
20
1.2510-1
2.2810-2
1.2510-1 2.2810-2
1.1810-1
9.8310
-2
1.9110
-2
25
1.1210
-1
2.0110
-2
25L
8.6610-2
30
1.9110
-2
1.1810-1
2.0110
-2
1.0010-1
1.6810-2
8.6610-2 1.6810-2
1.0010-1
8.9310-2
1.7310-2
8.9310-2 1.7310-2
8.3110-2
7.0210
-2
1.4310
-2
35
7.8110
-2
1.5510
-2
35L
6.1510-2
45
45L
20L
30L
HSR
KB1
2.6910-2
7M
EPF
KAL2
1.3810-1
9.8310
-2
1.1210
-1
7.0210
-2
1.4310
-2
7.8110
-2
8.3110-2
1.5510
-2
6.7410-2
1.2810-2
6.1510-2 1.2810-2
6.7410-2
6.7110-2
1.2110-2
6.7110-2 1.2110-2
5.2210-2
5.2010-2
1.0010-2
5.2010-2 1.0010-2
5.2210-2
-2
55
5.5910
1.0310
-2
55L
4.3310-2
8.5610
-3
65
4.4710-2
9.1310-3
4.4710-2 9.1310-3
3.6910-2
65L
3.2810-2
7.0610-3
3.2810-2 7.0610-3
3.6910-2
3.7310
-2
6.8010
-3
85L
2.8910
-2
5.6810
-3
100
2.6010-2
120
150
85
5.5910
-2
4.3310
-2
8.5610
4.2710-2
6.8010
2.7910-2
5.6810
-3
2.7910-2
5.1510-3
2.6010-2 5.1510-3
2.2510-2
2.3610-2
4.7210-3
2.3610-2 4.7210-3
1.9710-2
-2
4.3510
-3
-2
-1
2.8910
-2
4.2710-2
-3
-3
2.1710
3.7310
-2
1.0310
-2
2.1710
-2
1.6510
-1
4.3510
-3
1.6110-2
2.8910
-2
1.8610-1
15M2A
1.6510
2.8910
20M2A
1.2310-1
2.2310-2
1.2310-1 2.2310-2
1.3410-1
25M2A
1.1010-1
1.9810-2
1.1010-1 1.9810-2
1.1410-1
A1-45
LM Guide
SCR
KAR2
15S
506E
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAL1
KAR1
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
KCR
KCL
15W (TB) 2.0910-1 1.0410-1 3.7410-2 1.8710-2 1.4610-1 2.5810-2 1.7010-1 8.4810-2
15V (SB) 3.4010-1 1.7010-1 4.9410-2 2.4710-2 2.3510-1 3.3210-2 1.7010-1 8.4810-2
20W (TB) 1.7210-1 8.6110-2 3.2410-2 1.6210-2 1.2110-1 2.2510-2 1.3010-1 6.4910-2
20V (SB) 2.7210-1 1.3610-1 4.3310-2 2.1610-2 1.8810-1 2.9410-2 1.3010-1 6.4910-2
25W (TB) 1.3810-1 6.8910-2 2.5910-2 1.3010-2 9.6710-2 1.8010-2
25V (SB) 2.1710
-1
1.0910
-1
3.4610
-2
1.7310
-2
1.1110-2
1.5110
-1
2.3510
-2
1.1110-1
5.5510-2
-1
5.5510-2
1.1110
30V (SB) 1.9910-1 9.9310-2 2.9910-2 1.4910-2 1.3710-1 2.0210-2 9.2210-2 4.6110-2
35W (TB) 1.0410-1 5.2110-2 1.9210-2 9.6110-3 7.3110-2 1.3310-2 7.6410-2 3.8210-2
35V (SB) 1.7010-1 8.5110-2 2.6110-2 1.3110-2 1.1710-1 1.7710-2 7.6410-2 3.8210-2
45W (TB) 9.1210-2 4.5610-2 1.6910-2 8.4710-3 6.3910-2 1.1710-2 5.7110-2 2.8510-2
55W (TB) 6.8910-2 3.4410-2 1.3910-2 6.9310-3 4.8410-2 9.6610-3 5.4610-2 2.7310-2
15MSV 4.0310-1 2.5010-1 6.2310-1 3.8610-1 3.3010-2 4.9810-2 2.7610-1 1.7110-1
15MSW 2.4310-1 1.5010-1 3.8810-1 2.4010-1 2.4610-2 3.8410-2 2.7410-1 1.7010-1
20MSV 3.1910-1 1.9710-1 4.9410-1 3.0610-1 2.8510-2 4.3610-2 2.1010-1 1.3010-1
20MSW 1.9910-1 1.2410-1 3.1810-1 1.9710-1
2.1110-2
8.1110-2
6.5510
-2
7.0510
-2
25X
8.9110
-2
30
9.6610
-2
30L
35
35L
45
25XL
NR
6.3310
-2
6.8610
-2
1.7910
-2
1.8410
-2
1.2710
-2
1.3110
-2
45L
5.1110-2
55
5.7510-2 4.0810-2
55L
65
65L
75
75L
85
85L
100
100L
1.1110-2
A1-46
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Table4 Equivalent Factors (Models NRS and HRW)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KB2
1.0510-1
KAL1
2.1110-2
1.0510-1
2.1110-2
9.4110-2
25XL
8.6010-2
1.7310-2
8.6010-2 1.7310-2
9.4110-2
30
9.3010-2
1.7710-2
9.3010-2 1.7710-2
8.4410-2
30L
7.1710-2
1.4710-2
7.1710-2 1.4710-2
8.4410-2
8.4710
-2
1.5710
-2
35L
6.4410
-2
1.3110
-2
45
6.5810-2
45L
KAR1
8.4710
-2
6.4410
-2
KCR
KCL
1.5710
7.0810-2
1.3110
-2
7.0810-2
1.2510-2
6.5810-2 1.2510-2
5.2610-2
4.9210-2
1.0410-2
4.9210-2 1.0410-2
5.2610-2
5.5410
-2
1.0710
-2
55L
4.3810
-2
8.8510
-3
65
4.7910-2
65L
1.0710
-2
4.5210-2
8.8510
-3
4.5210-2
9.3810-3
4.7910-2 9.3810-3
3.8110-2
3.4310-2
7.2510-3
3.4310-2 7.2510-3
3.8110-2
4.0510
-2
8.0110
-3
75L
3.0310
-2
6.5010
-3
85
3.5610-2
85L
100
55
75
100L
HRW
KAL2
-2
35
NRS
KAR2
5.5410
-2
4.3810
-2
8.0110
-3
3.2010-2
6.5010
-3
3.2010-2
7.0510-3
3.5610-2 7.0510-3
2.8310-2
2.7010-2
5.8710-3
2.7010-2 5.8710-3
2.8310-2
2.9310-2
5.9710-3
2.9310-2 5.9710-3
2.4110-2
-2
-3
2.6510
-1
1.9310
5.2710
-1
5.1610
-2
3.6510
-2
4.0510
-2
3.0310
-2
2.6510
-2
5.4710
-1
5.2710
-3
2.4110-2
1.0410
-1
1.4010-1 9.9210-2
12
2.7210
14
17
1.9510-1
3.3310-2
21
1.6410
-1
2.8910
-2
27
1.3010
-1
2.3310
-2
35
8.6610-2
50
60
1.9510-1 3.3310-2
1.3010
-1
6.3210-2
2.8910
-2
5.9210-2
2.3310
-2
5.1210-2
1.5910-2
8.6610-2 1.5910-2
3.0610-2
6.5010-2
1.2110-2
6.5010-2 1.2110-2
2.3510-2
5.7710-2
8.2410-3
5.7710-2 8.2410-3
1.7710-2
1.6410
-1
A1-47
LM Guide
KB1
25X
506E
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAR1
KAL1
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
KCR
KCL
3M
9.2010-1
1.2710-1
9.2010-1 1.2710-1
6.0610-1
3N
6.0610-1
1.0110-1
6.0610-1 1.0110-1
6.0610-1
3W
7.0310-1
1.0610-1
7.0310-1 1.0610-1
3.1710-1
3WN
4.7610-1
8.2710-2
4.7610-1 8.2710-2
3.1710-1
6.6710
-1
9.0610
-2
5N/TN
5.2110
-1
8.0010
-2
5W/WT
4.8510-1
5WN/WTN
9.0610
-2
3.8510-1
8.0010
-2
3.8510-1
7.2810-2
4.8510-1 7.2810-2
1.9610-1
3.4410-1
5.9310-2
3.4410-1 5.9310-2
1.9610-1
4.6610
-1
6.5710
-2
7Z
4.6610
-1
6.6010
-2
7N
2.8810-1
7W/WT
5M
7M
7WZ
6.6710
-1
5.2110
-1
4.6610
-1
6.5710
-2
4.6610
-1
2.7410-1
6.6010
-2
2.7410-1
5.0110-2
2.8810-1 5.0110-2
2.7410-1
3.0710-1
5.3010-2
3.0710-1 5.3010-2
1.4010-1
3.3010
-1
5.1210
-2
-1
4.1310
-2
3.3010
-1
2.1810
-1
5.1210
-2
1.4010-1
4.1310
-2
1.4010-1
7WN/WTN
2.1810
9K
3.0610-1
5.1910-2
3.0610-1 5.1910-2
2.1510-1
9Z
3.0610-1
5.2310-2
3.0610-1 5.2310-2
2.1510-1
9N
2.1510-1
4.0810-2
2.1510-1 4.0810-2
2.1510-1
2.4410
-1
4.2210
-2
9WZ
2.4410
-1
4.2210
-2
9WN
1.7310-1
RSR 9WV
3.3210-2
2.4410
-1
4.2210
-2
2.4410
-1
1.0910-1
4.2210
-2
1.0910-1
1.7310-1 4.2210-2
1.0910-1
12V
12Z
12N
12WV
12WZ
12WN
14WV
15V
15Z
15N
15WV
15WZ
15WN
20V
20N
A1-48
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Table6 Equivalent Factors (Models HR, GSR, CSR and MX)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KCL
2.6510-1
3.5810-2
2.6510-1 3.5810-2
1123
2.0810-1
3.1710-2
2.0810-1 3.1710-2
1530
1.5610-1
2.3910-2
1.5610-1 2.3910-2
2042
1.1110-1
1.8010-2
1.1110-1
1.8010-2
2042T
8.6410-2
1.5310-2
8.6410-2 1.5310-2
2555
7.7910-2
1.3810-2
7.7910-2 1.3810-2
2555T
6.1310-2
1.1710-2
6.1310-2 1.1710-2
3065
6.9210-2
1.1510-2
6.9210-2 1.1510-2
3065T
5.4510-2
9.9210-3
5.4510-2 9.9210-3
3575
6.2310-2
1.0810-2
6.2310-2 1.0810-2
3575T
4.9010-2
9.4210-3
4.9010-2 9.4210-3
4085
5.1910-2
9.5310-3
5.1910-2 9.5310-3
4085T
4.0910-2
7.9710-3
4.0910-2 7.9710-3
50105
4.1510-2
7.4010-3
4.1510-2 7.4010-3
50105T
3.2710-2
6.2610-3
3.2710-2 6.2610-3
60125
2.8810-2
5.1810-3
2.8810-2 5.1810-3
15T
15V
20T
20V
25T
25V
30T
35T
KAR1
HR
GSR
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
15
1.6810-1
2.9510-2
1.6810-1 2.9510-2
1.6010-1
20S
1.2510-1
2.2810-2
1.2510-1 2.2810-2
1.1810-1
9.8310
-2
1.9110
-2
1.1210
-1
2.0110
-2
20
25S
9.8310
-2
1.1210
-1
1.9110
-2
1.1810-1
2.0110
-2
1.0010-1
8.6610-2
1.6810-2
8.6610-2 1.6810-2
1.0010-1
8.9310-2
1.7310-2
8.9310-2 1.7310-2
8.3110-2
7.0210
-2
1.4310
-2
35
6.1510
-2
1.2810
-2
45
5.2010-2
CSR 25
30S
30
MX
KAL1
7W
1.4310
-2
8.3110-2
1.2810
-2
6.7410-2
1.0010-2
5.2010-2 1.0010-2
5.2210-2
4.2710-1
7.0110-2
4.2710-1 7.0110-2
3.8510-1
-1
-2
2.1810
4.1310
7.0210
-2
6.1510
-2
2.1810
-1
4.1310
-2
1.4010-1
A1-49
LM Guide
KCR
918
506E
Table7 Equivalent Factors (Model JR, NSR, SRG, SRN and SRW)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAL1
KAR1
JR
NSR
SRG
KAR2
KAL2
KB1
KB2
KCR
KCL
25
1.1210-1
2.0110-2
1.1210-1 2.0110-2
1.0010-1
35
7.8110-2
1.5510-2
7.8110-2 1.5510-2
6.7410-2
45
6.7110-2
1.2110-2
6.7110-2 1.2110-2
5.2210-2
55
5.5910-2
1.0310-2
5.5910-2 1.0310-2
4.2710-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
20TBC
2.2910
2.6810
25TBC
2.0110-1
2.2710-2
2.0110-1 2.2710-2
30TBC
1.8510-1
1.9310-2
1.8510-1 1.9310-2
40TBC
1.3910-1
1.6010-2
1.3910-1 1.6010-2
50TBC
1.2410-1
1.4210-2
1.2410-1 1.4210-2
70TBC
9.9910-2
1.1510-2
9.9910-2 1.1510-2
15
1.2310-1
2.0710-2
1.2310-1 2.0710-2
1.0410-1
20
9.6010-2
1.7110-2
9.6010-2 1.7110-2
8.0010-2
20L
7.2110-2
1.4210-2
7.2110-2 1.4210-2
8.0010-2
-2
-2
2.2910
-2
2.6810
-2
7.2310-2
7.2310-2
25
8.9610
25L
6.9910-2
1.3110-2
6.9910-2 1.3110-2
30
8.0610-2
1.3310-2
8.0610-2 1.3310-2
5.6110-2
30L
6.1210-2
1.1110-2
6.1210-2
1.1110-2
5.6110-2
35
7.1410-2
1.1810-2
7.1410-2 1.1810-2
4.9810-2
-2
-3
1.5510
8.9610
-2
1.5510
-3
4.9810-2
35L
5.2610
45
5.4910-2
9.5810-3
5.4910-2 9.5810-3
3.8510-2
45L
4.1810-2
7.9310-3
4.1810-2 7.9310-3
3.8510-2
4.5610
-2
8.0410
-3
55L
3.3710
-2
6.4210
-3
65L
2.6310-2
85LC
100LC
55
35
9.6710
5.2610
8.0410
-3
3.2510-2
6.4210
-3
3.2510-2
4.9710-3
2.6310-2 4.9710-3
2.7010-2
2.1910-2
4.1510-3
2.1910-2 4.1510-3
1.9110-2
1.9510-2
3.6710-3
1.9510-2 3.6710-3
1.6210-2
-2
1.1810
-2
9.6710
-3
7.1410
-2
4.5610
-2
3.3710
-2
9.6710
7.1410
-2
5.2610
-2
1.1810
-2
4.9810-2
9.6710
-3
4.9810-2
35L
5.2610
45
5.4910-2
9.5810-3
5.4910-2 9.5810-3
3.8510-2
4.1810-2
7.9310-3
4.1810-2 7.9310-3
3.8510-2
4.5610
-2
8.0410
-3
55L
3.3710
-2
6.4210
-3
65L
2.6310-2
70
85
SRN 45L
55
SRW 100
4.5610
-2
8.0410
-3
3.3710
-2
3.2510-2
6.4210
-3
3.2510-2
4.9710-3
2.6310-2 4.9710-3
2.7010-2
4.1810-2
7.9310-3
4.1810-2 7.9310-3
2.5210-2
3.3710
-2
6.4210
-3
2.6310
-2
4.9710
-3
3.3710
-2
2.6310
-2
6.4210
-3
2.0910-2
4.9710
-3
1.7710-2
130
2.1910-2
4.1510-3
2.1910-2 4.1510-3
1.3310-2
150
1.9510-2
3.6710-3
1.9510-2 3.6710-3
1.1510-2
A1-50
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
[Double-axis Use]
Setting Conditions
V
(n = tn
mg
h2
h 1 0
Duty cycle
Speed (mm/s)
tn
t1
tn
S
Velocity diagram
s
mm
Fig.6 Condition
A1-51
LM Guide
Set the conditions needed to calculate the LM systems applied load and service life in hours.
The conditions consist of the following items.
(1) Mass: m (kg)
(2) Direction of the working load
(3) Position of the working point (e.g., center of gravity): 2, 3, h1(mm)
(4) Thrust position: 4, h2(mm)
(5) LM system arrangement: 0, 1(mm)
(No. of units and axes)
(6) Velocity diagram
Speed: V (mm/s)
Time constant: tn (s)
Acceleration: n(mm/s2)
506E
V
(n = tn
[Example]
Condition
Horizontal mount
(with the block traveling)
Uniform motion or dwell
mg
P2
P4
mg
mg2
mg3
+
4
20
21
P2 =
mg
mg2
mg3
20
21
4
P3 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
P4 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
+
20
21
4
P1 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
+
20
21
4
P2 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
P3 =
mg
mg2
mg3
20
21
4
P4 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
P3
P1 =
P1
1
P2
P4
2
P1
0
3
mg
A1-52
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Condition
Vertical mount
Uniform motion or dwell
2
P1T
P2 = P3 =
P1
mg2
20
P1 = P4 =
mg
mg2
20
mg3
20
P1T = P4T =
3
P2
LM Guide
P4
P2T = P3T =
P2T
mg3
20
1
E.g.: Vertical axis of industrial
robot, automatic coating
machine, lifter
Wall mount
Uniform motion or dwell
0
P2T
2
P1T
P2
P1 = P2 =
P3 = P4 =
P1
mg3
21
4
P1T = P4T =
mg
mg2
+
4
20
P2T = P3T =
mg
mg2
20
4
P3
P3T
mg
mg3
21
P4
P4T
A1-53
506E
Condition
1
1
P2
mg
P3
P1
P4
P1 to P4 (max) =
mg
mg1
+
4
20
P1 to P4 (min) =
mg
mg1
20
E.g.: XY table
sliding fork
P1T=
mg
P1
P3
P2T=
P1T
P2
3
1
P2T
+
P3T=
A1-54
P4T=
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
+
21
21
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
20
4
P4 = +
E.g.: NC lathe
Carriage
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgsin
mgsin 2
20
4
P3 = +
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
+
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
+
20
4
P2 = +
h1
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
+
20
4
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Condition
P1 = +
P3
h1
P2 = +
P2
mg
P2T
P4
P1
7
P1T
3
1
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
+
21
20
mgsin 3
20
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
21
20
mgsin 3
20
P2T =
P3 = +
+
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
21
20
mgsin 3
20
P3T =
P4 = +
E.g.: NC lathe
Tool rest
+
P4T = +
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
+
21
20
mgsin 3
20
During acceleration
mg
P1 = P4 =
mg
m 12
20
P2 = P3 =
mg
+
4
m 12
20
P1T = P4T =
3
P1
P2T = P3T =
P3
P4
P3T
0
P4T
Speed V (m/s)
t2
t3 Time (s)
Velocity diagram
P1 to P4 =
mg
4
During deceleration
V
n =
tn
t1
m 13
20
8
F
m 13
20
P1 = P4 =
mg
+
4
m 32
20
P2 = P3 =
mg
m 32
20
P1T = P4T =
P2T = P3T =
m 33
20
m 33
20
A1-55
LM Guide
P1T = +
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
506E
Condition
Vertical mount
with inertia
P4
mg
P1T
P1
F
3
P2
n =
P2T
V
tn
Speed V (m/s)
t1
t2
t3 Time (s)
Velocity diagram
E.g.: Conveyance lift
During deceleration
m (g 3) 2
20
m (g 3) 2
P2 = P3 =
20
m (g 3) 3
P1T = P4T =
20
m (g 3) 3
P2T = P3T =
20
P1 = P4 =
Under force F1
F15
20
F15
P2 = P3 =
20
F14
P1T = P4T =
20
F14
P2T = P3T =
20
P1 = P4 =
2
4
P3
F2
F1
10
F
F3
P3T
P4
P4T
Under force F2
F2
P1 = P4 =
+
4
F2
P2 = P3 =
4
Under force F3
F33
P1 = P2 =
21
F33
P3 = P4 =
21
F3
P1T = P4T =
4
P2T = P3T =
A1-56
F22
20
F22
20
F3
+
4
F32
20
F32
20
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Equivalent Load
1/2
1/2
Radial Type
1/2
1/2
A1-57
LM Guide
The LM Guide is categorized into roughly two types: the 4-way equal load type, which has the same
rated load in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions, and the radial type, which has a large
rated load in the radial direction. With the radial type LM Guide, the rated load in the radial direction
is different from that in the reverse radial and lateral directions. The basic load rating in the radial
direction is indicated in the specification table. The values in the reverse-radial and lateral directions
are obtained from Table8 on A1-58.
506E
Lateral directions
Model No.
Classification
Type
SHS
SHW
SRS
SCR
EPF
HSR
NRS
HRW
RSR
RSR-Z
4-way Equal CSR
Load
MX
JR
HCR
HMG
HSR-M1
RSR-M1
HSR-M2
HSR-M1VV
SRG
SRN
SRW
SSR
SVR
SR
SR
Radial
NR
HRW
NSR
SR-M1
SR-MS
SVS
SRS
RSR
RSR-Z
HR
Other
GSR
Dynamic
load rating
CL
C
C
12,15,25
C
C
C
C
C
17,21,27,35,50,60
C
3,5,7,9
C
7,9
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
9
C
C
C
C
C
C
0.50C
0.64C
15,20,25,30,35,45,55,70
0.62C
85,100,120,150
0.78C
0.78C
12,14
0.78C
0.62C
0.62C
0.62C
0.84C
5,7,9,20
C
12,14,15,20
0.78C
12,15
0.78C
C
Size
GSR-R
RSR-M1
12,15
A1-58
Static load
rating
C0L
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
0.50C0
0.64C0
0.50C0
0.71C0
0.71C0
0.71C0
0.50C0
0.50C0
0.50C0
0.84C0
C0
0.70C0
0.70C0
C0
0.93C
0.90C0
0.93C
0.90C0
0.78C
0.70C0
Tensile
lateral direction
Dynamic
load rating
CT
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
0.53C
0.47C
0.56C
0.48C
0.48C
0.48C
0.56C
0.56C
0.56C
0.92C
1.19C
0.78C
0.78C
C
(T) 0.84C
(C) 0.93C
(T) 0.84C
(C) 0.93C
0.78C
Static load
rating
C0T
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
C0
0.43C0
0.38C0
0.43C0
0.35C0
0.45C0
0.35C0
0.43C0
0.43C0
0.43C0
0.85C0
1.19C0
0.71C0
0.71C0
C0
(T) 0.78C0
(C) 0.90C0
(T) 0.78C0
(C) 0.90C0
0.71C0
Compressive
lateral direction
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Equivalent Load
PEXPR(L)YPT
PE
: Equivalent load
(N)
Radial direction
Reverse radial direction
: Reverse radial load
(N)
PL
: Lateral load
(N)
PT
X,Y : Equivalent factor
(see Table9)
PL
PR
PT
PT
A1-59
LM Guide
506E
Classification
Type
SHS
SHW
SRS
SCR
EPF
HSR
NRS
HRW
RSR
RSR-Z
4-way Equal CSR
Load
MX
JR
HCR
HMG
HSR-M1
RSR-M1
HSR-M2
HSR-M1VV
SRG
SRN
SRW
SSR
SVR
SR
SR
Radial
NR
HRW
NSR
SR-M1
SR-MS
SVS
SRS
RSR
RSR-Z
Other
HR
GSR
GSR-R
RSR-M1
Model No.
Equivalent in
radial direction
Size
12,15,25
17,21,27,35,50,60
3,5,7,9
7,9
15,20,25,30,35,45,55,70
85,100,120,150
12,14
5,7,9,20
12,14,15,20
12,15
12,15
X
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
Y
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.935
0.839
0.830
0.830
0.500
1.280
1.280
0.830
Equivalent in reverse
radial direction
X
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
Y
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.155
1.678
1.155
2.000
2.000
2.000
1.155
1.155
1.155
1.020
0.839
0.990
0.990
0.500
1.000
1.280
0.990
Note) If the radial type LM Guide receives radial and lateral loads simultaneously, study the safety static factor and the rated
load in the radial-load and lateral-load directions.
For types with no size indication in the table, the same factor is applied to all sizes.
Models HR, GSR and GSR-R cannot be used in single-axis applications.
A1-60
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Static Safety Factor
Load conditions
Lower limit of fS
1.0 to 3.5
2.0 to 5.0
1.0 to 4.0
2.5 to 7.0
Machine tool
fHfTfCC0
fHfTfCC0L
fHfTfCC0T
fS
C0
C0L
C0T
PR
PL
PT
fH
fT
fC
PR
fS
PL
PT
fS
fS
A1-61
LM Guide
To calculate a load applied to the LM Guide, the average load required for calculating the service
life and the maximum load needed for calculating the static safety factor must be obtained first. In
a system subject to frequent starts and stops, placed under cutting forces or under a large moment
caused by an overhang load, an excessively large load may apply to the LM Guide. When selecting
a model number, make sure that the desired model is capable of receiving the required maximum
load (whether stationary or in motion). Table10 shows reference values for the static safety factor.
506E
Pm =
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
1
i
(Pn Ln)
L n=1
: Average Load
(N)
: Varying load
(N)
: Total travel distance
(mm)
: Distance traveled under load Pn
(mm)
: Constant determined by rolling element
Note) The above equation or the equation (1) below applies when the rolling elements are balls.
Pm =
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
1
3
3
3
(P1 L1 + P2 L2 +Pn Ln)
L
: Average load
: Varying load
: Total travel distance
: Distance traveled under Pn
(N)
(N)
(mm)
(mm)
10
LM Guide Using Rollers (i=3 )
10
3
Pm =
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
10
10
10
1
3
3
3
(P1 L1 + P2 L2 +Pn Ln)
L
: Average Load
: Varying load
: Total travel distance
: Distance traveled under Pn
(N)
(N)
(mm)
(mm)
P1
Load (P)
Pm
P2
Pn
L1
L2
A1-62
Ln
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Average Load
1
3
Pmin
Pmax
: Minimum load
: Maximum load
(Pmin + 2Pmax)
(N)
(N)
LM Guide
Pm
Pmax
Load (P)
Pm
Pmin
Pm 0.65Pmax 4
(b)
Pm 0.75Pmax 5
Pmax
Pmax
Pm
Load (P)
Load (P)
Pm
A1-63
506E
L =
( f ff f
H
L
C
PC
fH
fT
fC
fW
C
PC
50
: Nominal life
(km)
: Basic dynamic load rating
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Hardness factor (see Fig.8 on A1-66)
: Temperature factor
(see Fig.9 on A1-66)
: Contact factor (see Table11 on A1-66)
: Load factor
(see Table12 on A1-67)
L
F0
PC
fW
: Nominal life
(km)
: Permissible load
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Load factor
(see Table12 on A1-67)
F0
fW PC
1.57
L =
50
Note) The life here means the service of life of the S film based on wear.
Since the service life of the S film may vary according to the environment or the operating conditions, be sure to evaluate and validate the life under the service conditions and operating conditions at the customer.
A1-64
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
L =
C
f H fT fC
PC
fW
10
3
100
: Nominal life
(km)
: Basic dynamic load rating
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Hardness factor (see Fig.8 on A1-66)
: Temperature factor
(see Fig.9 on A1-66)
: Contact factor (see Table11 on A1-66)
fC
: Load factor
(see Table12 on A1-67)
fW
Once the nominal life (L) has been obtained, the service life time can be obtained using the following equation if the stroke length and the number reciprocations are constant.
Lh =
Lh
s
n1
L
S
106
n1 60
A1-65
LM Guide
L
C
PC
fH
fT
506E
Hardness factor fH
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
60
50
40
30
20
Raceway hardness (HRC)
10
[fT:Temperature Factor]
If the temperature of the environment surrounding the operating LM Guide exceeds 100,
take into account the adverse effect of the high
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.9.
In addition, the selected LM Guide must also be
of a high temperature type.
Note) LM guides not designed to withstand high temperatures should be used at 80C or less.Please contact
THK if application requirements exceed 80C.
Temperature factor fT
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
100
150
Raceway temperature ()
200
A1-66
Contact factor fC
0.81
0.72
0.66
0.61
6 or more
0.6
Normal use
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
Vibrations/
impact
Speed (V)
fW
Faint
Very low
V0.25m/s
1 to 1.2
Weak
low
0.25<V1m/s
1.2 to 1.5
Medium
Medium
1<V2m/s
1.5 to 2
Strong
High
V>2m/s
2 to 3.5
A1-67
LM Guide
506E
Examples of applications
Condition
Normal Clearance
The loading direction is fixed, An overhang load or moment High rigidity is required and
impact and vibrations are miniload is applied.
vibrations and impact are apmal and 2 rails are installed in LM Guide is used in a singleplied.
parallel.
rail configuration.
Heavy-cutting machine tool
Ve r y h i g h p r e c i s i o n i s n o t Light load and high accuracy
required, and the sliding resisare required.
tance must be as low as possible.
Beam-welding machine
Book-binding machin
Automatic packaging machine
XY axes of general industrial
machinery
Automatic sash-manufacturing
machine
Welding machine
Flame cutting machine
Tool changer
Various kinds of material feeder
A1-68
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding stone feed axis of
grinding machine
Milling machine
Vertical/horizontal boring machine
Tool rest guide
Vertical axis of machine tool
506E
Point of Selection
Predicting the Rigidity
When the LM Guide receives a load, its rolling element, LM blocks and LM rails are elastically deformed within a permissible load range. The ratio between the displacement and the load is called
rigidity value. (Rigidity values are obtained using the equation shown below.) The LM Guides rigidity
increases according to the magnitude of the preload. Fig.10 shows rigidity difference between normal, C1 and C0 clearances.
The effect of a preload for a 4-way equal load type is translated into the calculated load approx. 2.8
times greater than the magnitude of the preload.
Normal clearance
Deflection
2 0
Clearance C1
Clearance C0
P0
Load
2.8P0
P0 : Magnitude of clearance C0
Fig.10 Rigidity Data
K=
K
: Rigidity value
: Deflection
: Calculated load
(N/m)
(m)
(N)
A1-69
LM Guide
Rigidity
506E
Radial clearance
Unit: m
Unit: m
Light
preload
Medium
preload
Normal
Model No.
15
No Symbol
C1
C0
5 to 0
12 to 5
20
6 to 0
12 to 6
18 to 12
25
8 to 0
14 to 8
20 to 14
30
9 to 0
17 to 9
27 to 17
35
11 to 0
19 to 11
29 to 19
45
12 to 0
22 to 12
32 to 22
55
15 to 0
28 to 16
38 to 28
65
18 to 0
34 to 22
45 to 34
Indication
symbol
Normal
Light preload
Model No.
No Symbol
15
Indication
symbol
4 to +2
C1
Indication
symbol
Light
preload
Medium
preload
Normal
10 to 4
Model No.
No Symbol
C1
C0
3 to +2
6 to 3
9 to 6
12 to 8
20
5 to +2
12 to 5
25
25
6 to +3
15 to 6
30
4 to +2
8 to 4
30
7 to +4
18 to 7
35
4 to +2
8 to 4
12 to 8
35
8 to +4
20 to 8
45
5 to +3
10 to 5
15 to 10
55
6 to +3
11 to 6
16 to 11
65
8 to +3
14 to 8
20 to 14
75
10 to +4
17 to 10
24 to 17
85
13 to +4
20 to 13
27 to 20
100
14 to +4
24 to 14
34 to 24
Normal
Model No.
12
Unit: m
Unit: m
Light
preload
Medium
preload
Indication
symbol
Normal
No Symbol
C1
C0
Model No.
No Symbol
C1
1.5 to 0
4 to 1
0 to +1.5
1 to 0
14
2 to 0
5 to 1
2 to +2
3 to 0
17
3 to 0
7 to 3
2 to +2
4 to 0
21
4 to +2
8 to 4
12
3 to +3
6 to 0
27
5 to +2
11 to 5
15
5 to +5
10 to 0
Light preload
35
8 to +4
18 to 8
28 to 18
20
5 to +5
10 to 0
50
10 to +5
24 to 10
38 to 24
25
7 to +7
14 to 0
A1-70
506E
Point of Selection
Predicting the Rigidity
Indication
symbol
Model No.
8
Medium
preload
C0
Indication
symbol
Model No.
45
10
2 to +2
5 to 1
12
3 to +3
6 to 2
15
4 to +2
12 to 4
20
5 to +2
25
Unit: m
No Symbol
10 to +5
Light
preload
C1
25 to 10
Medium
preload
C0
40 to 25
55
12 to +5
29 to 12
46 to 29
65
14 to +7
32 to 14
50 to 32
85
16 to +8
36 to 16
56 to 36
14 to 5
23 to 14
100
19 to +9
42 to 19
65 to 42
6 to +3
16 to 6
26 to 16
120
21 to +10
47 to 21
73 to 47
30
7 to +4
19 to 7
31 to 19
150
23 to +11
51 to 23
79 to 51
35
8 to +4
22 to 8
35 to 22
Normal
Unit: m
Indication symbol
Model No.
15
Normal
No Symbol
8 to +2
20
25
30
35
Unit: m
No Symbol
4 to +2
Light
preload
C1
10 to 4
Medium
preload
C0
14 to +2
16 to +2
20
5 to +2
12 to 5
17 to 12
18 to +4
25
6 to +3
15 to 6
21 to 15
20 to +4
30
7 to +4
18 to 7
26 to 18
35
8 to +4
20 to 8
31 to 20
45
10 to +5
24 to 10
36 to 24
55
12 to +5
28 to 12
45 to 28
70
14 to +7
32 to 14
50 to 32
85
20 to +9
46 to 20
70 to 46
100
22 to +10
52 to 22
78 to 52
120
25 to +12
57 to 25
87 to 57
150
29 to +14
69 to 29
104 to 69
Unit: m
No Symbol
1.5 to +1.5
Light
preload
C1
4 to 1
Medium
preload
C0
14
2 to +2
5 to 1
17
3 to +2
21
4 to +2
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Light preload
Indication
symbol
Model No.
3
No Symbol
0 to +1
C1
0.5 to 0
7 to 3
0 to +1.5
1 to 0
8 to 4
2 to +2
3 to 0
2 to +2
4 to 0
27
5 to +2
11 to 5
35
8 to +4
18 to 8
28 to 18
12
3 to +3
6 to 0
50
10 to +5
24 to 10
38 to 24
14
5 to +5
10 to 0
60
12 to +5
27 to 12
42 to 27
15
5 to +5
10 to 0
20
7 to +7
14 to 0
A1-71
LM Guide
No Symbol
1 to +1
Light
preload
C1
4 to 1
506E
Unit: m
Indication
symbol
Model No.
5
Normal
Light preload
No Symbol
0 to +1.5
C1
1 to 0
2 to +2
3 to 0
Unit: m
Indication
symbol
Model No.
12
Normal
Light preload
No Symbol
3 to +3
15
25
35
0 to +30
45
0 to +50
55
0 to +50
C1
6 to 2
Indication
symbol
Model No.
20
4 to +2
12 to 4
6 to +3
16 to 6
35
8 to +4
45
65
No Symbol
5 to +5
Medium
preload
C0
25 to 15
25
5 to +5
15 to 5
25 to 15
30
5 to +5
15 to 5
25 to 15
22 to 8
40
8 to +8
22 to 8
36 to 22
10 to +5
25 to 10
50
8 to +8
22 to 8
36 to 22
14 to +7
32 to 14
70
10 to +10
26 to 10
42 to 26
Unit: m
Indication
symbol
Model No.
15
Normal
Light preload
No Symbol
4 to +2
20
25
Normal
Unit: m
C1
12 to 4
Indication
symbol
Model No.
15
No Symbol
0.5 to 0
Light
preload
C1
1 to 0.5
5 to +2
14 to 5
20
0.8 to 0
2 to 0.8
3 to 2
6 to +3
16 to 6
25
2 to 1
3 to 2
4 to 3
30
2 to 1
3 to 2
4 to 3
35
2 to 1
3 to 2
5 to 3
45
2 to 1
3 to 2
5 to 3
55
2 to 1
4 to 2
6 to 4
65
3 to 1
5 to 3
8 to 5
85
3 to 1
7 to 3
12 to 7
100
3 to 1
8 to 3
13 to 8
Unit: m
Normal
No Symbol
2 to 1
Medium
preload
C0
5 to 3
Indication symbol
Model No.
7M
85
2 to 1
4 to 2
6 to 4
12M
100
3 to 1
5 to 3
8 to 5
15M
130
3 to 1
7 to 3
12 to 7
150
3 to 1
8 to 3
13 to 8
Normal
Medium
preload
C0
2 to 1
Light
preload
C1
3 to 2
A1-72
Unit: m
Light
preload
C1
15 to 5
Indication
symbol
Model No.
70
Unit: m
Indication symbol
Model No.
25
9M
Normal
No Symbol
0 or less
Unit: m
506E
Point of Selection
Predicting the Rigidity
Indication symbol
Model No.
15
2 to +1
2 to +1
LM Guide
20
Clearance CS
A1-73
506E
[Difference in Height M]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of height (M) of each of the LM
blocks used on the same plane in combination.
[Difference in Width W2]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of the width (W2) between each
of the LM blocks, mounted on one LM rail in combination, and the LM rail.
Note1) When 2 or more rails are used on the same plane in parallel, only the width (W2) tolerance and the difference on the
master rail apply. The master LM rail is imprinted with KB (except for normal grade products) following the serial
number.
Serial number
Master side symbol
Fig.12 Master LM Rail
Note2) Accuracy measurements each represent the average value of the central point or the central area of the LM block.
Note3) The LM rail is smoothly curved so that the required accuracy is easily achieved by pressing the rail to the reference
surface of the machine.
If it is mounted on a less rigid base such as an aluminum base, the curve of the rail will affect the accuracy of the machine. Therefore, it is necessary to define straightness of the rail in advance.
A1-74
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Machine tool
Accuracy grades
Ct7
Ct5
Normal
SP
Machining center
Lathe
Milling machine
Boring machine
Jig borer
Grinding machine
NC drilling machine
Tapping center
Punching press
Laser beam machine
Woodworking machine
ATC
Cartesian coordinate
Cylindrical coordinate
Other equipment
Office equipment
Conveyance system
Coating machine
Welding machine
XY table
3D measuring instrument
Inspection equipment
: Grade Ct7
: Grade Ct5
: Normal grade
: High accuracy grade
Prober
Digitizer
Dressing machine
Medical equipment
Palette changer
Ct7
Ct5
Normal
H
UP
P : Precision grade
SP : Super precision grade
UP : Ultra precision grade
A1-75
LM Guide
Type of machine
506E
D
M
B
W2
Fig.13
Unit: m
Or less
Grade
Ct5
Normal
grade
Highaccuracy
grade
Precision
grade
Super
precision
grade
50
1.5
50
80
1.5
80
125
1.5
125
200
3.5
1.5
200
250
9.5
6.5
2.5
1.5
250
315
11
7.5
4.5
1.5
315
400
13
8.5
3.5
1.5
400
500
16
11
4.5
2.5
1.5
500
630
18
13
11
630
800
20
15
12
8.5
3.5
2
2.5
800
1000
23
16
13
6.5
1000
1250
26
18
15
11
7.5
4.5
1250
1600
28
20
16
12
1600
2000
31
23
18
13
8.5
5.5
4.5
2000
2500
34
25
20
14
9.5
2500
3090
36
27
21
16
11
6.5
5.5
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 class are only applicable for model HSR.
A1-76
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Table16 Accuracy Standards for Models SHS, SSR, SVR/SVS, SHW, HSR, SR, NR/NRS, HRW, NSR-TBC,
HSR-M1, HSR-M1VV, SR-M1, HSR-M2, SRG, and SRN.
Unit: mm
Model
No.
15
17
20
21
25
27
30
35
Item
Dimensional tolerance in height M
Difference in height M
Dimensional tolerance in width W2
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of surface C
against surface A
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
65
70
75
85
100
120
150
0.12
0.12
0.07
0.03
Difference in height M
0.025
0.025
0.02
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.06
0.03
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of surface C
against surface A
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
0.025
0.025
0.02
0.01
0.12
0.12
Difference in height M
0.025
0.12
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of surface C
against surface A
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
0.035
0
0.03
0.006
0
0.02
0.006
0
0.015
0.004
0
0.015
0.004
0
0.008
0.003
0
0.008
0.003
0.04
0.025
0.02
0.015
0.12
0.07
0.03
0.035
0.025
0.015
0
0.04
0.007
0
0.03
0.007
0
0.02
0.005
0
0.015
0.005
0
0.01
0.003
0
0.01
0.003
0.08
0.04
0.015
Difference in height M
0.025
0.07
0.04
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of surface C
against surface A
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
0.03
0.015
0
0.05
0.007
0
0.04
0.007
0
0.03
0.005
0
0.025
0.005
0
0.015
0.003
0
0.015
0.003
0.08
0.04
Difference in height M
0.03
0.02
0.08
0.04
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of surface C
against surface A
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
0.03
0.02
0
0.05
0.01
0
0.05
0.01
0
0.04
0.007
0
0.04
0.007
0
0.03
0.005
0
0.03
0.005
Note) XFor models SRG and SRN, only precision or higher grades apply. (Ct7 grade, Ct5 grade, normal grade and high accuracy grade are not available.)
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 class are only applicable for model HSR.
Note) The difference between Ct7 grade and Ct5 grade pairs with a height M and a width W2 is the value for one shaft.
A1-77
LM Guide
8
10
12
14
Accuracy standards
HighSuper
Ultra
Grade Grade
Normal
Precision
accuracy
precision precision
Ct7
Ct5
grade
grade
grade
grade
grade
Ct7
Ct5 No Symbol
H
P
SP
UP
0.07
0.03
0.015 0.007
0.015
0.007
0.005
0.003
0.04
0.02
0.01
0.007
0.02
0.01
0.006
0.004
506E
W2
B
Fig.14
Model
No.
15
25
35
45
65
Accuracy Standards
Item
Dimensional tolerance in
height M
Difference in height M
Dimensional tolerance in
width W2
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of
surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism of
surface D against
surface B
Dimensional tolerance in
height M
Difference in height M
Dimensional tolerance in
width W2
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of
surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism of
surface D against
surface B
Dimensional tolerance in
height M
Difference in height M
Dimensional tolerance in
width W2
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism of
surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism of
surface D against
surface B
A1-78
Normal grade
No symbol
0.1
0.02
0.1
0.02
C
(as shown in Table18)
D
(as shown in Table18)
0.1
0.02
0.1
0.03
C
(as shown in Table18)
D
(as shown in Table18)
0.1
0.03
0.1
0.03
C
(as shown in Table18)
D
(as shown in Table18)
125
125
200
200
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1000
1000
1250
1250
1600
1600
2000
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Accuracies of model HCR are categorized into normal and high accuracy grades by model number as indicated in Table19.
C
LM Guide
A
Fig.15
Table19 Accuracy Standard for Model HCR
Unit: mm
Model
No.
12
15
25
35
45
65
Accuracy standards
Normal High-accuracy
grade
grade
No Symbol
H
Item
Dimensional tolerance in
0.2
0.2
height M
Difference in height M
0.05
0.03
Running parallelism
C
of surface C against
(as shown in Table20)
surface A
Dimensional tolerance in
0.2
0.2
height M
Difference in height M
0.06
0.04
Running parallelism
C
of surface C against
(as shown in Table20)
surface A
Or less
125
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
125
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
Normal grade
A
Fig.16
Table21 Accuracy Standard for Model JR
Unit: mm
Model
No.
25
35
Accuracy standards
Normal grade
Item
No Symbol
Difference in height M
0.05
Running parallelism
of surface C against
surface A
Difference in height M
45
55
Running parallelism
of surface C against
surface A
C
(as shown in Table22)
0.06
C
(as shown in Table22)
Running Parallelism
Values
Above
Or less
Normal grade
50
80
125
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3150
50
80
125
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3150
4000
5
5
5
6
8
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
26
28
30
33
A1-79
506E
Accuracies of models SCR and CSR are categorized into precision, super precision and ultra precision grades by model number as indicated in Table23.
D C
E
M
A B
Fig.17
Table23 Accuracy Standard for Models SCR and CSR
Unit: mm
Model
No.
15
20
25
30
35
45
65
Accuracy standards
Item
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of surface
D against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface E against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface F against surface D
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of surface
D against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface E against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface F against surface D
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of surface
D against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface E against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface F against surface D
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of surface
D against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface E against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface F against surface D
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of surface
D against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface E against surface B
Running parallelism of
surface F against surface D
A1-80
Super
Ultra
Precision
precision precision
grade
grade
grade
P
SP
UP
0.01 0.007 0.005
Above
Or less
Precision
grade
0.003
50
C
(as shown inTable24)
D
(as shown in Table24)
0.01 0.007 0.005
50
80
80
125
125
200
0.005
0.004
Super
precision
grade
1.5
Ultra
precision
grade
1
1.5
1.5
200
1.5
250
2.5
1.5
0.004
250
315
1.5
C
(as shown in Table24)
D
(as shown in Table24)
0.01 0.007 0.005
315
400
3.5
1.5
400
500
4.5
2.5
1.5
500
630
630
800
3.5
800
1000
6.5
2.5
3
0.008
0.01
0.006
0.007
0.005
C
(as shown in Table24)
D
(as shown in Table24)
0.012 0.008 0.006
0.012
0.008
0.006
C
(as shown in Table24)
D
(as shown in Table24)
0.018 0.012 0.009
0.018
0.012
0.009
C
(as shown in Table24)
D
(as shown in Table24)
1000
1250
7.5
4.5
1250
1600
1600
2000
8.5
5.5
4.5
2000
2500
9.5
2500
3090
11
6.5
5.5
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Accuracies of model HR are categorized into normal, high accuracy, precision, super precision
and ultra precision grades as indicated in Table25.
LM Guide
W0
Fig.18
Table25 Accuracy Standard for Model HR
Accuracy standards
Normal
grade
Item
Highaccuracy
grade
Unit: mm
Precision
grade
Super
precision
grade
Ultra
precision
grade
No Symbol
SP
UP
0.1
0.05
0.025
0.015
0.01
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.003
0.1
0.03
0.05
0.015
0.01
0.005
0.003
Note1) Difference in height M applies to a set of LM Guides used on the same plane.
Note2) Difference in total width W0 applies to LM blocks used in combination on one LM rail.
Note3) Dimensional tolerance and difference in total width W0 for precision and higher grades apply only to the master-rail
side among a set of LM Guides. The master rail is imprinted with KB following a serial number.
Unit: m
Above
Or less
Normal grade
50
1.5
50
80
1.5
High-accuracy grade Precision grade Super precision grade Ultra precision grade
80
125
1.5
125
200
3.5
1.5
200
250
2.5
1.5
250
315
4.5
1.5
315
400
3.5
1.5
400
500
4.5
2.5
1.5
500
630
11
630
800
12
8.5
3.5
800
1000
13
6.5
2.5
1000
1250
15
11
7.5
4.5
1250
1600
16
12
4
4.5
1600
2000
18
13
8.5
5.5
2000
2500
20
14
9.5
2500
3000
21
16
11
6.5
5.5
A1-81
506E
Accuracies of model GSR are categorized into normal, high accuracy and precision grades by
model number as indicated in Table27.
Table28 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism
by Accuracy Standard
Unit: m
C
D
M
25
30
35
Above
Or less
Normal grade
High-accuracy Precision
grade
grade
50
80
80
125
125
200
3.5
200
250
2.5
HighNormal
Precision
accuracy
grade
grade
grade
250
315
4.5
315
400
3.5
4.5
B
Fig.19
15
20
50
Model
No.
Accuracy standards
Item
No Symbol
H
P
Dimensional tolerance
0.02
in height M
Running parallelism of
C
surface C against surface A (as shown in Table28)
Running parallelism of
D
surface D against surface B (as shown in Table28)
Dimensional tolerance
0.03
in height M
Running parallelism of
C
surface C against surface A (as shown in Table28)
Running parallelism of
D
surface D against surface B (as shown in Table28)
400
500
500
630
11
630
800
12
8.5
800
1000
13
6.5
1000
1250
15
11
7.5
1250
1600
16
12
1600
2000
18
13
8.5
2000
2500
20
14
9.5
2500
3000
21
16
11
Accuracies of model GSR-R are categorized into normal and high accuracy grades by model
number as indicated in Table29.
Table30 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism
by Accuracy Standard
Unit: m
C
D
M
B
Fig.20
Above
Or less
Normal grade
High-accuracy
grade
3
50
50
80
80
125
3
3.5
125
200
200
250
250
315
4.5
Unit: mm
315
400
Normal High-accuracy
grade
grade
No Symbol
H
400
500
500
630
11
630
800
12
8.5
A1-82
800
1000
13
1000
1250
15
11
1250
1600
16
12
1600
2000
18
13
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Accuracies of models SRS, RSR, RSR-M1, RSR-W, RSR-Z and RSR-WZ are categorized into normal, high accuracy and precision grades by model number as indicated in Table31.
Table33 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism for Models
SRS7 to 25 and RSR7 to 25 by Accuracy Standard
Unit: m
C
D
M
HighNormal
Precision
accuracy
grade
grade
grade
No
H
P
Symbol
Accuracy
standards
Model
No.
Item
Dimensional toler0.03
ance in height M
Difference in height M 0.015
Dimensional toler0.03
ance in width W2
3
5
7
9
12
14
15
20
25
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism
of surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism
of surface D against
surface B
Dimensional tolerance in height M
Difference in height M
Dimensional tolerance in width W2
Difference in width W2
Running parallelism
of surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism
of surface D against
surface B
0.015
0.015
0.005
0.015
0.005
0.02
0.01
0.03
0.015
0.007
0.04
0.025 0.015
0.03
0.02
0.01
Or less
25
50
100
150
25
50
100
150
200
Normal grade
Above
Or less
40
70
100
130
160
190
220
250
280
310
340
370
400
430
460
490
520
550
580
610
640
670
700
730
760
790
820
850
880
910
940
970
1000
1030
1060
1090
1120
1150
1180
1210
1240
1270
1300
1330
1360
1390
1420
1450
1480
1510
1540
1570
40
70
100
130
160
190
220
250
280
310
340
370
400
430
460
490
520
550
580
610
640
670
700
730
760
790
820
850
880
910
940
970
1000
1030
1060
1090
1120
1150
1180
1210
1240
1270
1300
1330
1360
1390
1420
1450
1480
1510
1540
1570
1800
HighPrecision
Normal
accuracy
grade
grade
grade
8
4
1
10
4
1
11
4
2
12
5
2
13
6
2
14
7
2
15
7
3
16
8
3
17
8
3
17
9
3
18
9
3
18
10
3
19
10
3
20
11
4
20
12
4
21
12
4
21
12
4
22
12
4
22
13
4
22
13
4
22
13
4
23
13
4
23
13
5
23
14
5
23
14
5
23
14
5
23
14
5
24
14
5
24
15
5
24
15
5
24
15
5
24
15
5
25
16
5
25
16
5
25
16
6
25
16
6
25
16
6
25
16
6
26
17
6
26
17
6
26
17
6
26
17
6
26
17
6
26
17
6
27
18
6
27
18
6
27
18
6
27
18
7
27
18
7
27
18
7
28
19
7
28
19
7
28
19
7
A1-83
LM Guide
506E
Accuracies of model MX are categorized into normal and precision grades by model number as
indicated in Table34.
E
D
C
M
A
B
Fig.22
Table34 Accuracy Standard for Model MX
Unit: mm
Accuracy standards
Normal
grade
Precision
grade
Item
No
Symbol
Difference in height M
0.015
0.005
Model
No.
Perpendicularity of
surface D against
surface B
Running parallelism
of surface E against
surface B
Running parallelism
of surface F against
surface D
0.003
Or less
Normal
grade
Precision
grade
40
40
70
10
70
100
11
130
12
D
(as shown in Table35)
130
160
13
160
190
14
0.03
0.01
0.007
190
220
15
0.005
220
250
16
C
(as shown in Table36)
250
280
17
280
310
17
D
(as shown in Table36)
310
340
18
340
370
18
370
400
19
Above
Or less
Normal
grade
Precision
grade
25
2.5
1.5
25
50
3.5
50
100
5.5
100
150
150
200
8.4
A1-84
Above
100
C
(as shown in Table35)
Difference in height M
Perpendicularity of
surface D against
surface B
Running parallelism
of surface E against
surface B
Running parallelism
of surface F against
surface D
0.002
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
Accuracies of model SRW are categorized into precision, super precision and ultra precision
grades by model number as indicated in Table37.
C
D
LM Guide
B
W2
Fig.23
Model
No.
Accuracy
standards
Item
Ultra
Preci- Super
sion precision precision
grade
grade
grade
P
SP
UP
0
0.05
0
0.03
0
0.015
0.005
0.003
0
0.04
0
0
0.025 0.015
70
0.005
0.003
85 Difference in width W2 0.007
Running parallelism
C
of surface C against
(as shown in Table38)
surface A
Running parallelism
D
of surface D against
(as shown in Table38)
surface B
0
0
0
Dimensional toler0.05
0.04
0.03
ance in height M
Above
Or less
Precision
grade
Ultra
Super
precision precision
grade
grade
50
1.5
50
80
1.5
80
125
1.5
125
200
1.5
200
250
2.5
1.5
250
315
1.5
315
400
3.5
1.5
400
500
4.5
2.5
1.5
500
630
630
800
3.5
1000
6.5
2.5
3
Difference in height M
0.01
0.007
0.005
800
0
0.05
0
0.04
0
0.03
1000
1250
7.5
4.5
1250
1600
1600
2000
8.5
5.5
4.5
2000
2500
9.5
2500
3090
11
6.5
5.5
Difference in height M
0.01
0.007
0.005
0
0.05
0
0.04
0
0.03
0.01
0.007
0.005
130
150 Difference in width W2
Running parallelism
of surface C against
surface A
Running parallelism
of surface D against
surface B
C
(as shown in Table38)
D
(as shown in Table38)
A1-85
506E
Accuracies of model EPF are categorized into normal, high accuracy and precision grades by model number as indicated in Table39.
Table39 Accuracy Standard for Model EPF
Unit: mm
C
Accuracy
Standards
Model
No.
HighPrecision
Normal
accuracy
grade
grade
grade
No
H
P
Symbol
Item
W2
A
B
Fig.24
0.04
0.02
0.01
Difference in height M
7M
Dimensional toler9M
ance in width W2
12M
15M Running parallelism of surface C against surface ANote)
0.03
0.015
0.007
0.04
0.025 0.015
0.008
0.004
0.001
0.008
0.004
0.001
Accuracies of model SR-MS are categorized into precision, super precision and ultra precision
grades by model number as indicated in Table40.
Table41 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism
by Accuracy Standard
Unit: m
Above
Or less
Precision
grade
P
SP
UP
50
1.5
50
80
1.5
80
125
1.5
125
200
1.5
Unit: mm
200
250
2.5
1.5
Preci- Super
Ultra
sion precision precision
grade
grade
grade
Item
P
SP
UP
Dimensional toler0
0
0
ance in height M
0.03 0.015 0.008
250
315
1.5
315
400
3.5
1.5
A
W2
B
Fig.25
Table40 Accuracy Standard for Model SR-MS
Model No.
15
20
A1-86
Accuracy
Standards
Difference in
Height M
0.006
0.004
0.003
0
0.02
0
0.015
0
0.008
Difference in
Width W2
0.006
0.004
0.003
Super
Ultra
precision precision
grade
grade
506E
LM Guide
A1-87
506E
Endplate
End seal
Ball
Ball cage
Endplate
(Turn-around section)
Ball
Ball cage
LM rail
Grease pocket
Fig.2 Circulation Structure inside the LM Block of the Caged Ball LM Guide
With the Caged Ball LM Guide, the use of a ball cage allows lines of evenly spaced balls to circulate, thus to eliminate friction between the balls.
In addition, grease held in a space between the ball circulation path and the ball cage (grease pocket) is applied on the contact surface between each ball and the ball cage as the ball rotates, forming
an oil film on the ball surface. As a result, an oil film is not easily broken.
A1-88
506E
L=
C
P
( ) 50
L
: Nominal life
(km)
C
: Basic dynamic load rating
(N)
P
: Applied load
(N)
As indicated in the equation, the greater the basic dynamic load rating, the longer the nominal
life of the LM Guide.
[Example of Calculation]
Comparison of Nominal Life Between the Caged Ball LM Guide model SHS25V and the Conventional Full-ball Type Model HSR25A
Model SHS25V
C
P
50 =
Model HSR25A
31.7
50 = 1160 km
11.1
( )
( )
C
19.9
L= (
50 = (
50 = 280 km
P )
11.1 )
L=
The nominal life of the Caged Ball LM Guide model SHS25V is 4.0 times longer than the conventional full-ball
type model HSR25A.
When selecting a model number, it is necessary to perform a service life calculation according to the conditions.
A1-89
LM Guide
(1) The absence of friction between balls, together with increased grease retention, achieves long
service life and long-term maintenance-free (lubrication-free) operation.
(2) The absence of ball-to-ball collision achieves low noise and acceptable running sound.
(3) The absence of friction between balls achieves low heat generation and high speed operation.
(4) The circulation of lines of evenly spaced balls ensures smooth ball rotation.
(5) The absence of friction between balls allows high grease retention and low dust generation.
506E
: 60m/min
Stroke
: 350mm
Acceleration: 9.8m/s2
Orientation : horizontal
Load
HSR25
(Conventional full-ball type)
Lubricated every 100 km
L = 435 km
Nominal life: 400 km
SHS25
(Caged Ball LM Guide)
Initial lubrication only
0
400
800
Distance traveled (km)
A1-90
L = 1347 km
1200
1600
506E
50
80
70
90
LM Guide
HSR35LR
60
50
SHS35LV
40
40
30
HSR35LR
20
SHS35LV
10
9.6dBA
30
0
25
50
75
Speed (m/min)
100
125
[High Speed]
: 200m/min
Stroke
: 2500mm
19718km
Travel distance
Acceleration: 1.5G
30000km
0
5000
10000
15000
20000
25000
30000
A1-91
506E
[Smooth Motion]
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
50
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
50
300
200
100
0
0
10
Time (hour)
A1-92
15
20
0.3-0.5
0.5-1.0
1.0-2.0
Particle accumulation (No. of particles per 2min. liter)
2.0-5.0
5.0-
300
200
100
0
0
10
Time (hour)
15
20
506E
LM Guide
A1-93
506E
SHS
Caged Ball LM Guide Global Standard Size Model SHS
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45
45
Ball
Ball cage
Cross section
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-460
A1-466
A1-484
A1-94
506E
SHS
Structure and Features
A1-95
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and ball cages
and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM
Guide to be used in all orientations. In addition, the LM block can receive a well-balanced preload,
increasing the rigidity in the four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. With
the low sectional height and the high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and stable straight motion.
506E
Model SHS-C
Specification TableA1-98
Model SHS-V
Specification TableA1-100
Model SHS-R
The LM block has a smaller width (W) and the
mounting holes are tapped.
It succeeds the height dimension of full-ball type
LM Guide HSR-R.
A1-96
Specification TableA1-102
506E
SHS
Model SHS-LC
Specification TableA1-98
Model SHS-LV
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-100
Model SHS-LR
Specification TableA1-102
A1-97
506E
T1
T
K
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
SHS 15C
SHS 15LC
SHS 20C
SHS 20LC
SHS 25C
SHS 25LC
SHS 30C
SHS 30LC
SHS 35C
SHS 35LC
SHS 45C
SHS 45LC
SHS 55C
SHS 55LC
SHS 65C
SHS 65LC
LM block dimensions
24
47
30
63
36
70
42
90
48
100
60
120
70
140
90
170
64.4
38 30 M5
79.4
79
53 40 M6
98
92
57 45 M8
109
106
72 52 M10
131
122
82 62 M10
152
140
100 80 M12
174
171
116 95 M14
213
221
142 110 M16
272
H
4.4
5.4
6.8
8.5
8.5
10.5
12.5
14.5
L1
48
63
59
78
71
88
80
105
93
123
106
140
131
173
175
226
T1
5.9
21
7.2
10 25.4 6.5
12
9.1
12 30.2 7.5
11.5 15
35
11.5 15 40.5
e0
f0
D0
B-M6F
4.3
5.3
12
B-M6F
4.5
5.5
12
B-M6F
5.8
5.2
12
B-M6F
6.5
5.5
5.2
B-PT1/8
5.2
16
B-PT1/8
10
5.2
16
B-PT1/8
10
12
5.2
21 57.3 11
18.8 24
71
19
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
jointed use
With steel
tape
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-98
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SHS
L
4- D0
L1
e0
C
f0
LM Guide
d2
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
H3
3
Height Pitch
W1
0
W2
-0.05
15
16
Length
C0
kN
kN
14.2
17.2
22.3
28.1
31.7
36.8
44.8
54.2
62.3
72.9
82.8
100
128
161
205
253
24.2
31.9
38.4
50.3
52.4
64.7
66.6
88.8
96.6
127
126
166
197
259
320
408
M1
d1d2h
Max
13
60
4.57.55.3
3000
69.58.5
3000
4.6
20 21.5 16.5 60
5.8
23 23.5 20
60
7119
3000
28
31
23
80
91412
3000
7.5
34
33
26
80
91412
3000
8.9
45 37.5 32
105
142017
3090
12.7 53 43.5 38
120
162320
3060
182622
3000
19
63 53.5 53
150
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.175
0.296
0.334
0.568
0.566
0.848
0.786
1.36
1.38
2.34
2.05
3.46
3.96
6.68
8.26
13.3
0.898
1.43
1.75
2.8
2.75
3.98
4.08
6.6
6.76
10.9
10.1
16.3
19.3
31.1
40.4
62.6
0.175
0.296
0.334
0.568
0.566
0.848
0.786
1.36
1.38
2.34
2.05
3.46
3.96
6.68
8.26
13.3
0.898
1.43
1.75
2.8
2.75
3.98
4.08
6.6
6.76
10.9
10.1
16.3
19.3
31.1
40.4
62.6
0.16
0.212
0.361
0.473
0.563
0.696
0.865
1.15
1.53
2.01
2.68
3.53
4.9
6.44
9.4
11.9
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.23
0.29
0.46
0.61
0.72
0.89
1.34
1.66
1.9
2.54
3.24
4.19
5.35
6.97
10.7
13.7
1.3
2.3
3.2
4.5
6.2
10.4
14.5
23.7
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-104.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-99
506E
T
K
H3
W2
Outer dimensions
W1
Pilot hole for side nipple
LM block dimensions
SHS 15V
SHS 15LV
SHS 20V
SHS 20LV
SHS 25V
SHS 25LV
SHS 30V
SHS 30LV
SHS 35V
SHS 35LV
SHS 45V
SHS 45LV
SHS 55V
SHS 55LV
SHS 65V
SHS 65LV
Grease
nipple
M
24
34
30
44
36
48
42
60
48
70
60
86
70
100
90
126
L
64.4
79.4
79
98
92
109
106
131
122
152
140
174
171
213
221
272
B
26
32
35
40
50
60
75
76
C
26
34
36
50
35
50
40
60
50
72
60
80
75
95
70
120
S
M44
M55
M66.5
M88
M810
M1015
M1215
M1620
L1
48
63
59
78
71
88
80
105
93
123
106
140
131
173
175
226
5.9
21
5.5
E
5.5 PB1021B
e0
f0
D0
25.4 6.5
12
B-M6F
4.3
5.3
30.2 7.5
12
B-M6F
4.5
5.5
12
B-M6F
5.8
5.2
12
B-M6F
6.5
5.5
5.2
B-PT1/8
5.2
19.4 57.3
11
16
B-PT1/8
10
5.2
19.5 71
19
16
B-PT1/8
10
12
5.2
35
14.7 40.5
SHS30
2 QZ KKHH C1 +1240L P Z T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
jointed
use
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Light preload (C1)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Medium preload (C0)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
LM rail length
(in mm)
With steel
tape
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-100
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SHS
E
4- D0
e0
L1
C
f0
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
H3
Height Pitch
W1
0
W2
-0.05
Length
C0
kN
kN
14.2
17.2
22.3
28.1
31.7
36.8
44.8
54.2
62.3
72.9
82.8
100
128
161
205
253
24.2
31.9
38.4
50.3
52.4
64.7
66.6
88.8
96.6
127
126
166
197
259
320
408
M1
d1d2h
Max
13
60
4.57.55.3
3000
69.58.5
3000
15
9.5
4.6
20
12 16.5 60
5.8
23 12.5 20
60
7119
3000
28
16
23
80
91412
3000
7.5
34
18
26
80
91412
3000
8.9
45 20.5 32
105
142017
3090
12.7 53 23.5 38
120
162320
3060
63 31.5 53
150
182622
3000
19
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.175
0.296
0.334
0.568
0.566
0.848
0.786
1.36
1.38
2.34
2.05
3.46
3.96
6.68
8.26
13.3
0.898
1.43
1.75
2.8
2.75
3.98
4.08
6.6
6.76
10.9
10.1
16.3
19.3
31.1
40.4
62.6
0.175
0.296
0.334
0.568
0.566
0.848
0.786
1.36
1.38
2.34
2.05
3.46
3.96
6.68
8.26
13.3
0.898
1.43
1.75
2.8
2.75
3.98
4.08
6.6
6.76
10.9
10.1
16.3
19.3
31.1
40.4
62.6
0.16
0.212
0.361
0.473
0.563
0.696
0.865
1.15
1.53
2.01
2.68
3.53
4.9
6.44
9.4
11.9
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.19
0.22
0.35
0.46
0.54
0.67
0.94
1.16
1.4
1.84
2.54
3.19
4.05
5.23
8.41
10.7
1.3
2.3
3.2
4.5
6.2
10.4
14.5
23.7
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-104.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-101
506E
T
K
H3
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
W1
Pilot hole for side nipple
LM block dimensions
SHS 15R
Grease
nipple
M
L1
28
34
64.4
26
26
M45
48
5.9
25
9.5
35
35
50
M68
71
88
8
8
e0
f0
D0
5.5 PB1021B
12
B-M6F
9.5
SHS 25R
SHS 25LR
40
48
92
109
SHS 30R
SHS 30LR
45
60
106
131
40
40
60
M810
80
105
11
12
B-M6F
5.8
5.2
SHS 35R
SHS 35LR
55
70
122
152
50
50
72
M812
93
14.7 47.5 15
123
12
B-M6F
6.5
12.5
5.2
SHS 45R
SHS 45LR
70
86
140
174
60
60
80
M1017
106
14.9 61.1 20.5 16
140
B-PT1/8
18
5.2
SHS 55R
SHS 55LR
80
100
171
213
75
75
95
M1218
131
19.4 67.3 21
173
B-PT1/8
10
18
5.2
34.2 11.5
38
16
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-102
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SHS
E
4- D
e0
L1
C
f0
LM Guide
h
M
d
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
W1
H3
3
0
W2
-0.05
15
9.5
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
M1
d1d2h
13
60
4.57.55.3
0.22
1.3
0.66
0.8
3.2
23 12.5 20
60
7119
28
16
23
80
91412
3000
1.04
1.36
4.5
7.5
34
18
26
80
91412
3000
6.76
10.9
1.38
2.34
6.76
10.9
1.53
2.01
1.8
2.34
6.2
8.9
45 20.5 32
105
142017
3090
82.8 126
100 166
2.05
3.46
10.1
16.3
2.05
3.46
10.1
16.3
2.68
3.53
3.24
4.19
10.4
12.7 53 23.5 38
120
162320
3060
128
161
3.96
6.68
19.3
31.1
3.96
6.68
19.3
31.1
4.9
6.44
5.05
6.57
14.5
5.8
197
259
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-104.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-103
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SHS
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (L0)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SHS 15
SHS 20
SHS 25
SHS 30
SHS 35
SHS 45
SHS 55
SHS 65
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
60
20
3000
60
20
3000
60
20
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3090
120
30
3060
150
35
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-104
506E
SHS
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SHS
1
S1
Model No.
S1
SHS 15
SHS 20
SHS 25
SHS 30
SHS 35
SHS 45
SHS 55
SHS 65
M5
M6
M6
M8
M8
M12
M14
M20
8
10
12
15
17
20
24
30
A1-105
LM Guide
Clearance
SHS model rails also include a type where the LM rail is tapped from the bottom. This type is useful
when mounting from the bottom of the base and when increased contamination protection is desired.
506E
SSR
Caged Ball LM Guide Radial Type Model SSR
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
90
30
Ball cage
Ball
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-463
A1-466
A1-484
A1-106
506E
SSR
Structure and Features
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and ball cages
and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Use of the ball cage eliminates friction between balls and increases grease retention, thus to
achieve low noise, high speed and long-term maintenance-free operation.
A1-107
LM Guide
506E
Model SSR-XW
Specification TableA1-110
Model SSR-XV
Specification TableA1-112
Model SSR-XTB
Since the LM block can be mounted from the
bottom, this type is optimal for applications
where through holes for mounting bolts cannot
be drilled on the table.
A1-108
Specification TableA1-114
506E
SSR
LM Guide
A1-109
506E
4-S
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
SSR 15XW
SSR 15XWM
24
34
56.9
26
26
SSR 20XW
SSR 20XWM
28
42
66.5
32
SSR 25XW
SSR 25XWM
33
48
83
SSR 30XW
SSR 30XWM
42
60
SSR 35XW
48
70
L1
f0
e0
D0
H3
5.5
2.7
4.5
PB1021B 4.5
32
5.5
12
2.9
5.2
B-M6F
35
35
12
3.3
6.8
B-M6F
6.8
97
40
12
4.5
7.6
B-M6F
9.5
110.9
50
12
4.7
8.8
B-M6F 11.5
22
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
SSR25X W 2 UU C1 M +1200L Y P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Contamination Stainless
protection
steel
accessory
LM block
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-110
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SSR
L
L1
e0
4- D0
LM Guide
f0
d2
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
15
9.5
12.5
60
4.57.55.3
3000
14.7 16.5 0.0792 0.44 0.0486 0.274 0.0962
(1240)
0.15
1.2
20
11
15.5
60
69.58.5
3000
19.6 23.4 0.138 0.723 0.0847 0.448 0.18
(1480)
0.25
2.1
23
12.5
18
60
7119
3000
31.5 36.4 0.258
(2020)
0.4
2.7
28
16
23
80
7119
3000
46.5 52.7 0.446
(2520)
2.4
0.8
4.3
34
18
27.5
80
91412
1.1
6.4
3000
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-116.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SSR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SSR 15
SSR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-111
506E
T
K
M
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
SSR 15XV
SSR 15XVM
24
34
40.3
26
SSR 20XV
SSR 20XVM
28
42
47.7
SSR 25XV
SSR 25XVM
33
48
60
L1
f0
e0
D0
H3
M47 23.3
6.5
19.5
4.5
5.5
2.7
4.5
PB1021B 4.5
32
M58 27.8
8.2
22
5.5
12
2.9
5.2
B-M6F
35
M69 36.8
8.4
26.2
12
3.3
6.8
B-M6F
6.8
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
SSR25X V 2 UU C1 M +1200L Y P T M -
Contamination Stainless
Type of
protection
steel
LM block accessory
LM block
symbol (*1)
Model
number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 3 rails are
used in parallel is 3 at a minimum.)
A1-112
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SSR
L
L1
e0
4- D0
LM Guide
f0
N
d2
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
15
9.5
12.5
60
4.57.55.3
20
11
15.5
60
69.58.5
23
12.5
18
60
7119
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.08
1.2
0.111
0.14
2.1
3000
21.7 22.5 0.104 0.661 0.0652 0.419 0.204
(2020)
0.23
2.7
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
3000
9.1
(1240)
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
3000
13.4 14.4 0.0523 0.336 0.0326 0.213
(1480)
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-116.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SSR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SSR 15
SSR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-113
506E
Model SSR-XTB
W
4- H
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
SSR 15XTB
24
52
56.9
41
26
4.5 39.9
SSR 20XTB
28
59
66.5
49
32
5.5 46.6
SSR 25XTB
33
73
83
60
35
L1
f0
e0
D0
H3
5.5
2.7
4.5
PB1021B 4.5
5.5
12
2.9
5.2
B-M6F
12
3.3
6.8
B-M6F
6.8
19.5 4.5
22
59.8 10 26.2
SSR15X TB 2 UU C1 +820L Y P T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
Symbol for
Symbol for
(in mm)
LM rail
No. of rails used
Applied to only jointed use on the same plane (*4)
15 and 25 sizes
No. of LM blocks
used on the same Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-114
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SSR
L
L1
e0
4- D0
LM Guide
f0
N
d2
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
15
18.5 12.5
60
4.57.55.3
20
19.5 15.5
60
69.58.5
60
7119
23
25
18
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
3000
14.7 16.5 0.0792 0.44 0.0486 0.274 0.0962
(1240)
3000
19.6 23.4 0.138 0.723 0.0847 0.448 0.18
(1480)
3000
31.5 36.4 0.258 1.42 0.158 0.884 0.33
(2020)
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.19
1.2
0.31
2.1
0.53
2.7
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-116.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SSR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SSR 15
SSR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-115
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SSR 15X
SSR 20X
SSR 25X
SSR 30X
SSR 35X
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1660
1720
1780
1840
1900
1960
2020
2080
2140
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1660
1720
1780
1840
1900
1960
2020
2080
2140
2200
2260
2320
2380
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2120
2200
2280
2360
2440
2520
2600
2680
2760
2840
2920
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2120
2200
2280
2360
2440
2520
2600
2680
2760
2840
2920
60
20
3000 (1240)
60
20
3000 (1480)
60
20
3000 (2020)
80
20
3000 (2520)
80
20
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note3) The values in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel types.
A1-116
506E
SSR
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SSR
1
S1
Unit: mm
Model No.
S1
SSR 15X
M5
SSR 20X
M6
SSR 25X
M6
10
SSR 30X
M8
14
SSR 35X
M8
16
A1-117
LM Guide
Clearance
SSR model rails also include a type where the LM rail is tapped from the bottom. This type is useful
when mounting from the bottom of the base and when increased contamination protection is desired.
506E
SVR/SVS
Caged Ball LM Guide Ultra-heavy Load Type for Machine Tools Model SVR/SVS
LM block
90
40
Protector
Ball cage
Ball
4-Way Type Model SVS
Cross section
40
LM rail
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-460
A1-466
A1-484
A1-118
506E
SVR/SVS
Structure and Features
Models SVR/SVS have especially high rigidity and load carrying capacity among the Caged Ball LM
Guide series. In addition, these models maintain the LM Guide performance and achieve high reliability through the strengthening of the dust proof performance with a broad range of options that
take into account the service environments of machine tools, etc.
A1-119
LM Guide
* Since models SVR/SVS have very high rigidity, their structures are easily affected by the misalignment of the mounting
surface and the installation error. If affected by these factors, their service life may be shortened or their motion may be disrupted. When considering using these models, contact THK.
506E
Test conditions
Item
Tested model
Maximum speed
Stroke
Grease used
Environmental
conditions
Description
SVS45LR1TTHHYYC1+2880LP2set
200m/min
2500mm
THK AFB-LF Grease
Type: Metal powder (Atomized Powder)
Foreign
(particle diameter: 125 m or less)
material
Amount: 0.4 g/20 min
Water-soluble coolant
Coolant
Amount: 0.2 cc/10 s
Spray Water-soluble Coolant Release foreign material
Test equipment
Tested model
Tested model
Stroke
Double Seals
TTHHYY Option:
LaCS
Protector
Side Scraper
Double Seals
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
Protector
Side Scraper
Test Result
Tested model 2
No damage
after traveling 3000 km
Tested model 1
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
A1-120
506E
SVR/SVS
Types and Features
Models SVR-R/SVS-R
Specification TableA1-124/A1-126
Models SVR-LR/SVS-LR
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-124/A1-126
Models SVR-C/SVS-C
Specification TableA1-128/A1-130
A1-121
506E
Models SVR-LC/SVS-LC
Specification TableA1-128/A1-130
Specification TableA1-132
A1-122
Specification TableA1-132
506E
SVR/SVS
Specification TableA1-134
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-134
A1-123
506E
d2
T
K
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
M1
H3
W2
4-S
W
B
d1
F
W1
SVR-R
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVR 25R
SVR 25LR
SVR 30R
SVR 30LR
SVR 35R
SVR 35LR
SVR 45R
SVR 45LR
SVR 55R
SVR 55LR
SVR 65R
SVR 65LR
31
50
38
60
44
70
52
86
63
100
75
126
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
B
32
40
50
60
65
76
C
35
50
40
60
50
72
60
80
75
95
70
110
S
M68
M810
M812
M1017
M1218
M1620
L1
61.4
80.6
72.1
94.6
79
104.5
105
137.8
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
f0
e0
D0
5.1
12
4.5
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
31 10.3
12
6.5
3.9
B-M6F
11.7 35 12.1
12
5.2
B-M6F
16
8.5
17.7 49 16.6 10
16
10
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
21.6 60
16
8.7
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
19
15
H3
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm) Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2) LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-124
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
6-S
d2
M1
e0
LM Guide
L
L1
C
4- D0
f0
h
d1
F
SVR-LR
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
48.2
57
67.9
84
89.6
112
138
161
177
214
271
339
68.1
86.3
91.6
124
116
160
186
233
235
309
352
484
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
12.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
16
21
80
7119
3000
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
63
31.5
182622
3000
43
150
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.602
0.944
0.907
1.64
1.26
2.35
2.76
4.52
3.99
6.8
7.26
13.5
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.9
1
1.3
1.8
2.3
3.3
4.3
6.0
8.5
3.02
4.67
4.85
7.92
6.91
11.5
13.7
22.1
20.6
32.7
34.9
62.6
0.365
0.57
0.552
0.991
0.769
1.42
1.67
2.74
2.42
4.1
4.4
8.14
1.83
2.81
2.94
4.76
4.2
6.91
8.3
13.4
12.4
19.7
21.1
37.6
0.71
0.9
1.08
1.47
1.64
2.26
3.5
4.6
5.07
6.67
9
12.4
2.9
4.2
6.0
9.5
14
19.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-125
506E
W
B
d2
T
K
M1
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
H3
W2
4-S
d1
F
W1
SVS-R
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVS 25R
SVS 25LR
SVS 30R
SVS 30LR
SVS 35R
SVS 35LR
SVS 45R
SVS 45LR
SVS 55R
SVS 55LR
SVS 65R
SVS 65LR
31
50
38
60
44
70
52
86
63
100
75
126
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
B
32
40
50
60
65
76
C
35
50
40
60
50
72
60
80
75
95
70
110
S
M68
M810
M812
M1017
M1218
M1620
L1
61.4
80.6
72.1
94.6
79
104.5
105
137.8
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
f0
e0
D0
5.1
12
4.5
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
31 10.3
12
6.5
3.9
B-M6F
11.7 35 12.1
12
5.2
B-M6F
16
8.5
17.7 49 16.6 10
16
10
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
21.6 60
16
8.7
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
19
15
H3
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm) Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2) LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-126
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
6-S
E
d2
M1
e0
LM Guide
L
L1
C
4- D0
f0
h
d1
F
SVS-LR
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
37
43.7
52
64.4
68.6
86.1
105
123
136
164
208
260
52.2
66.1
70.1
95.2
88.6
123
142
178
180
237
269
370
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
12.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
16
21
80
7119
3000
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
63
31.5
182622
3000
43
150
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.479
0.75
0.722
1.31
1
1.88
2.19
3.58
3.17
5.4
5.76
10.7
2.41
3.71
3.86
6.3
5.49
9.15
10.9
17.5
16.4
26
27.7
49.6
0.443
0.693
0.667
1.21
0.927
1.73
2.02
3.31
2.93
4.99
5.33
9.88
2.23 0.525
3.43 0.665
3.58 0.798
5.83 1.08
5.09 1.2
8.46 1.67
10.1 2.6
16.2 3.44
15.1 3.76
24 4.96
25.6 6.66
45.8 9.16
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.9
1
1.3
1.8
2.3
3.3
4.3
6.0
8.5
2.9
4.2
6.0
9.5
14
19.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-127
506E
W
B
d2
t T T1
K
M1
4- D0
f0
H3
W2
e0
L1
C
d1
W1
SVR-C
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVR 25C
SVR 25LC
SVR 30C
SVR 30LC
SVR 35C
SVR 35LC
SVR 45C
SVR 45LC
SVR 55C
SVR 55LC
SVR 65C
SVR 65LC
31 72
38 90
44 100
52 120
63 140
75 170
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
59 45 M8 6.8
72 52 M10 8.5
82 62 M10 8.5
100 80 M12 10.5
116 95 M14 12.5
142 110 M16 14.5
L1
61.4
80.6
72.1
94.6
79
104.5
105
137.8
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
B-M6F
5.5
12 6.5 3.9
B-M6F
12
5.2
B-M6F
16 8.5 5.2
B-PT1/8
11.6
B-PT1/8
14
28 26 25 60 19 15 16 8.7 8.2
B-PT1/8
15
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm) Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2) LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-128
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
6-S
( H through)
e0
4- D0
d2 N
M1
LM Guide
L
L1
C
f0
d1
F
SVR-LC
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
48.2
57
67.9
84
89.6
112
138
161
177
214
271
339
68.1
86.3
91.6
124
116
160
186
233
235
309
352
484
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
63
53.5
182622
3000
43
150
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.602
0.944
0.907
1.64
1.26
2.35
2.76
4.52
3.99
6.8
7.26
13.5
3.02
4.67
4.85
7.92
6.91
11.5
13.7
22.1
20.6
32.7
34.9
62.6
0.365
0.57
0.552
0.991
0.769
1.42
1.67
2.74
2.42
4.1
4.4
8.14
1.83
2.81
2.94
4.76
4.2
6.91
8.3
13.4
12.4
19.7
21.1
37.6
0.71
0.9
1.08
1.47
1.64
2.26
3.5
4.6
5.07
6.67
9
12.4
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.5
1.6
2
2.7
3.6
4.5
5.9
7.8
11.0
2.9
4.2
6.0
9.5
14
19.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-129
506E
4-S
( H through)
E
L
L1
C
W
B
d2
t T T1
4- D0
e0
f0
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
SVS-C
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVS 25C
SVS 25LC
SVS 30C
SVS 30LC
SVS 35C
SVS 35LC
SVS 45C
SVS 45LC
SVS 55C
SVS 55LC
SVS 65C
SVS 65LC
31 72
38 90
44 100
52 120
63 140
75 170
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
59 45 M8 6.8
72 52 M10 8.5
82 62 M10 8.5
100 80 M12 10.5
116 95 M14 12.5
142 110 M16 14.5
L1
61.4
80.6
72.1
94.6
79
104.5
105
137.8
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
B-M6F
5.5
12 6.5 3.9
B-M6F
12
5.2
B-M6F
16 8.5 5.2
B-PT1/8
11.6
B-PT1/8
14
28 26 25 60 19 15 16 8.7 8.2
B-PT1/8
15
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm) Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2) LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-130
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
6-S
( H through)
e0
4- D0
d2 N
M1
LM Guide
L
L1
C
f0
d1
F
SVS-LC
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
kN
kN
37
43.7
52
64.4
68.6
86.1
105
123
136
164
208
260
52.2
66.1
70.1
95.2
88.6
123
142
178
180
237
269
370
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
63
53.5
182622
3000
43
150
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.479
0.75
0.722
1.31
1
1.88
2.19
3.58
3.17
5.4
5.76
10.7
2.41
3.71
3.86
6.3
5.49
9.15
10.9
17.5
16.4
26
27.7
49.6
0.443
0.693
0.667
1.21
0.927
1.73
2.02
3.31
2.93
4.99
5.33
9.88
2.23 0.525
3.43 0.665
3.58 0.798
5.83 1.08
5.09 1.2
8.46 1.67
10.1 2.6
16.2 3.44
15.1 3.76
24 4.96
25.6 6.66
45.8 9.16
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.5
1.5
2
2.7
3.6
4.5
5.9
7.8
11.0
2.9
4.2
6.0
9.5
14
19.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-131
506E
W
B
4-S
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVR 35RH
SVS 35RH
SVR 35LRH
SVS 35LRH
SVR 45RH
SVS 45RH
SVR 45LRH
SVS 45LRH
SVR 55RH
SVS 55RH
SVR 55LRH
SVS 55LRH
55
70
109.5
50
50 M812
55
70
135
70
86
70
L1
f0
e0
D0
11.7 46 23.1 19
12
5.2
B-M6F
50
12
5.2
B-M6F
138.2
60
60
26
16
8.5
5.2
B-PT1/8
11.6
86
171
60
80
26
16
8.5
5.2
B-PT1/8
11.6
80
100
163.3
75
75
33.6
27
16
10
5.2
B-PT1/8
14
80
100
200.5
75
95
33.6
27
16
10
5.2
B-PT1/8
14
79
H3
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm)
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2)
symbol (*1)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
used on the same rail
Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-132
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
d2
LM Guide
M1
d1
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
89.6
68.6
112
86.1
138
105
161
123
177
136
214
164
116
88.6
160
123
186
142
233
178
235
180
309
237
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3090
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
53
162320
3060
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
1.26
1
2.35
1.88
2.76
2.19
4.52
3.58
3.99
3.17
6.8
5.4
1.64
1.2
2.26
1.67
3.5
2.6
4.6
3.44
5.07
3.76
6.67
4.96
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
1.5
6.0
6.0
3.1
9.5
4.1
9.5
4.7
14
6.2
14
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-133
506E
4-S
( H through)
t T T1
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer
dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
SVR 35CH
SVS 35CH
SVR 35LCH
SVS 35LCH
SVR 45CH
SVS 45CH
SVR 45LCH
SVS 45LCH
SVR 55CH
SVS 55CH
SVR 55LCH
SVS 55LCH
L1
e0
D0
20 19 16 39 16.1 12 12
5.2
B-M6F
5.2
B-M6F
T1
f0
H3
60 120 138.2 100 80 M12 10.5 105 22 20.5 20 48.4 21.9 16 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.6
60 120 171 100 80 M12 10.5 137.8 22 20.5 20 48.4 21.9 16 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.6
70 140 163.3 116 95 M14 12.5 123.6 24 22.5 22 56 23.6 17 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8
14
70 140 200.5 116 95 M14 12.5 160.8 24 22.5 22 56 23.6 17 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8
14
Type of
LM block
With QZ Contamination
LM rail length (in mm)
Lubricator protection accessory Radial clearance symbol (*2)
symbol (*1)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
No. of LM blocks
Medium preload (C0)
used on the same rail
Symbol for
Symbol for No. of rails
LM rail jointed use used on the same plane (*4)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used in parallel is 2).
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-134
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SVR/SVS
4- D0
e0
LM Guide
d2
L
L1
C
f0
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
89.6
68.6
112
86.1
138
105
161
123
177
136
214
164
116
88.6
160
123
186
142
233
178
235
180
309
237
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3090
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
53
162320
3060
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
1.26
1
2.35
1.88
2.76
2.19
4.52
3.58
3.99
3.17
6.8
5.4
1.64
1.2
2.26
1.67
3.5
2.6
4.6
3.44
5.07
3.76
6.67
4.96
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
1.7
6.0
2.2
6.0
3.3
9.5
4.3
9.5
5.1
14
6.6
14
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-136 .)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-135
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Models SVR/SVS
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SVR/SVS 25
SVR/SVS 30
SVR/SVS 35
SVR/SVS 45
SVR/SVS 55
SVR/SVS 65
230
270
350
390
470
510
590
630
710
750
830
950
990
1070
1110
1190
1230
1310
1350
1430
1470
1550
1590
1710
1830
1950
2070
2190
2310
2430
2470
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
40
15
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3090
120
30
3060
150
35
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-136
506E
SVR/SVS
LM Guide
A1-137
506E
SHW
Caged Ball LM Guide Wide Rail Model SHW
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45
45
Ball
Ball cage
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-463
A1-467
A1-484
A1-138
506E
SHW
Structure and Features
A wide and highly rigid LM Guide that uses ball cages to achieve low noise, long-term maintenancefree operation and high speed.
A1-139
LM Guide
506E
Model SHW-CA
Specification TableA1-142
Model SHW-CR
The LM block has tapped holes.
A1-140
Specification TableA1-144
506E
SHW
LM Guide
A1-141
506E
Model SHW-CA
L
L1
W
B
4-S
H through
d2
N
h
M1
d1
H3
W2
W1
Model No.
LM block dimensions
L1
H3
SHW 12CAM
12
40
37
35
18
M3
2.5
27
10
2.8
SHW 14CAM
14
50
45.5
45
24
M3
2.5
34
12
3.3
SHW 17CAM
17
60
51
53
26
M4
3.3
38
14.5
2.5
SHW 21CA
21
68
59
60
29
M5
4.4
43.6
17.7
3.3
SHW 27CA
27
80
72.8
70
40
M6
5.3
56.6
10
23.5
3.5
SHW 35CA
35
120
107
107
60
M8
6.8
83
14
31
7.6
SHW 50CA
50
162
141
144
80
M10
8.6
107
18
46
14
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
SHW17 CA 2 QZ UU C1 M +580L P M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With QZ Contamination
Lubricator protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
Stainless
steel
LM block
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-142
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SHW
LM Guide
L
L1
C
W
6-S
( H through)
d2
M1
d1
H3
W3
W2
W1
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
W1
0
W2
-0.05
Length
C0
kN
kN
W3
M1
d1d2h
Max
6.6
40
4.57.55.3
1230
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.05
0.8
18
11
24
13
7.5
40
4.57.55.3
1430
0.1
1.23
33 13.5 18
8.6
40
4.57.55.3
1800
0.15
1.9
0.24
2.9
0.47
4.5
37 15.5 22
11
50
4.57.55.3
3000
42
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
69 25.5 40
19
80
7119
3000
0.603
1.63
1.4
9.6
90
24
80
91412
3000
7.37
1.46
7.37
3.97
3.7
15
19
36
60
16
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate with grease nipple; if a greasing hole is required, indicate with a tapped hole for
greasing.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-146.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-143
506E
W
B
6-S
L
L1
C
d2
M1
H3
W2
d1
W3
W1
LM block dimensions
Width Length
Model No.
M
L1
H3
SHW 12CRM
12
30
37
21
12
M33.5
27
10
2.8
SHW 12HRM
12
30
50.4
21
24
M33.5
40.4
10
2.8
SHW 14CRM
14
40
45.5
28
15
M34
34
12
3.3
SHW 17CRM
17
50
51
29
15
M45
38
14.5
2.5
SHW 21CR
21
54
59
31
19
M56
43.6
17.7
3.3
SHW 27CR
27
62
72.8
46
32
M66
56.6
10
23.5
3.5
SHW 35CR
35
100
107
76
50
M88
83
14
31
7.6
SHW 50CR
50
130
141
100
65
M1015
107
18
46
14
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly corrosion resistance and environment.
Model number coding
Type of
LM block
Contamination
With QZ
Lubricator protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
Stainless
steel
LM block
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-144
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SHW
d2
N
M
L
L1
C
W
B
4-S
K
H3
W2
M1
d1
F
W1
LM Guide
W
B
4-S
d2
N
T
M1
H3
W2
L
L1
C
d1
W3
W1
F
Models SHW17CRM and SHW21CR
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MB
MA
Width
Height Pitch
W1
0
W2
-0.05
Length
C0
kN
kN
W3
M1
d1d2h
Max
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.8
18
6.6
40
4.57.55.3
1230
0.04
18
6.6
40
4.57.55.3
1000
0.06
0.8
24
7.5
40
4.57.55.3
1430
0.08
1.23
33
8.5
18
8.6
40
4.57.55.3
1800
0.13
1.9
37
8.5
22
11
50
4.57.55.3
3000
0.19
2.9
42
10
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
0.36
4.5
16
69 15.5 40
19
80
7119
3000
0.603
1.63
1.2
9.6
90
24
80
91412
3000
7.37
1.46
7.37
3.97
15
20
60
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate with grease nipple; if a greasing hole is required, indicate with a tapped hole for
greasing.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-146.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-145
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SHW
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SHW 12
SHW 14
SHW 17
SHW 21
SHW 27
SHW 35
SHW 50
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
390
470
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
390
470
550
670
110
190
310
470
550
130
230
380
480
580
780
160
280
340
460
640
820
280
440
760
1000
1240
1560
280
440
760
1000
1240
1640
2040
40
15
1230
40
15
1430
40
15
1800
50
15
3000
60
20
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note3) Models SHW12, 14 and 17 are made of stainless steel.
A1-146
506E
SHW
Greasing Hole
Note1)
Note2)
Note3)
Note4)
Grease nipple is not available for models SHW12 and SHW14. They can have a greasing hole.
Using a greasing hole other than for greasing may cause damage.
For QZ Lubricator*, see A1-502. For Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS*, see A1-479.
When desiring a grease nipple for a model attached with QZ Lubricator, contact THK.
Table2 Table of Grease Nipple and
Greasing Hole Dimensions
L
End seal
Unit: mm
End seal
Model No.
SHW
Fig.1 Dimensions of the Grease Nipple for Model SHW
Note) For the L dimension, see the corresponding specification table.
12
14
17
PB107
21
5.5
PB1021B
27
12
B-M6F
35
12
B-M6F
50
16
B-PT1/8
A1-147
LM Guide
506E
SRS
Caged Ball LM Guide Miniature Type Model SRS
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Compact type
Model SRS-M
Side seal
Ball
Ball cage
Wide type
Model SRS-WM
* For the ball cage, see A1-88.
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-83
A1-465
A1-467
A1-468
A1-484
A1-148
506E
SRS
Structure and Features
A1-149
LM Guide
Caged Ball LM Guide model SRS has a structure where two raceways are incorporated into the
compact body, enabling the model to receive loads in all directions, and to be used in locations
where a moment is applied with a single rail. In addition, use of ball cages eliminates friction between balls, thus achieving high speed, low noise, acceptable running sound, long service life, and
long-term maintenance-free operation.
506E
Model SRS5M
Specification TableA1-154
Model SRS5WM
Specification TableA1-154
Model SRS-M
A standard type of SRS.
Note) In addition to model SRS-M, a full-ball type without
ball cage is also available.If desiring this type, indicate
type SRS-G when placing an order.However, since
SRS-G does not have a ball cage, its dynamic load
rating is smaller than SRS-M. See the table of basic
load ratings for SRS-G on A1-157 for details.
A1-150
Specification TableA1-156
506E
SRS
Model SRS-WM
Specification TableA1-158
LM Guide
Has a longer overall LM block length (L), a greater width and a larger rated load and permissible
moment than SRS-M.
Note) In addition to model SRS-WM, a full-ball type without
ball cage is also available.If desiring this type, indicate
type SRS-G when placing an order.However, since
SRS-G does not have a ball cage, its dynamic load
rating is smaller than SRS-WM. See the table of basic
load ratings for SRS-G on A1-159 for details.
Model SRS-N
Specification TableA1-156
Model SRS-WN
Specification TableA1-158
A1-151
506E
A1-152
Model No.
Flatness error
SRS 5
0.015/200
SRS 7
0.025/200
SRS 9
0.035/200
SRS 12
0.050/200
SRS 15
0.060/200
SRS 20
0.070/200
SRS 25
0.070/200
506E
SRS
LM Guide
A1-153
506E
W
B
N
L
L1
2-S
M1
H3
W2
d2
d1
W1
SRS5M
Outer dimensions
Model No.
SRS 5M
SRS 5WM
Height
LM block dimensions
Width Length
L1
H3
12
16.9
M21.5
8.8
1.7
4.5
0.93
1.5
6.5
M3
through
13.7
2.7
1.1
1.5
6.5
17
22.1
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion.
To secure the LM rail of model SRS5M, use cross-recessed head screws for precision equipment (No. 0 pan head screw,
class 1) M2.
Model number coding
2 SRS5WM UU C1 +150L P M -
Model
number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set.(i.e. If you are using 2 shafts in parallel, the required
number of sets is 2.)
A1-154
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRS
L
L1
C
M1 h
H3
d1
W1
W2
2-S
LM Guide
d2
SRS5WM
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0
0.02
0
10
0.02
Length
C0
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
3.5
15
2.43.51
220
5.11
0.86
1.21
0.002
0.13
3.5
20
35.53
220
9.59
0.005
0.27
5.99
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-160.)
Static Permissible Moment
1 block: Static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Reference bolt tightening torque when mounting an LM block for model SRS 5M/5WM is shown in
the table below.
Reference tightening torque
Model No.
SRS 5M
M2
1.5
0.4
SRS 5WM
M3
2.3
0.4
OptionsA1-473
A1-155
506E
4-S
N
T
K
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
Height
LM block dimensions
Width Length
L1
H3
17
23.4
12
M22.3
13.4
3.3
6.7
1.6
1.3
10
20
4.5
8.5
2.4
1.5
13
27
5.7
11
16
32
6.5
13.3
2.7
SRS 20M
20
40
50
30
25
M46
34
16.6
3.4
SRS 25M
25
48
77
35
35
M67
56
11
20
SRS 7M
SRS 9XS
SRS 9XM
SRS 9XN
SRS 12M
SRS 12N
SRS 15M
SRS 15N
21.5
30.8
40.8
34.4
47.1
43
60.8
15
20
25
10
16
15
20
20
25
M32.8
M33.2
M33.5
10.5
19.8
29.8
20.6
33.3
25.7
43.5
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and
environment.
Model number coding
2 SRS20M QZ UU C1 +220L P M -
Model
With QZ Contamination
number Lubricator protection
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-156
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRS
L
L1
C
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
kN
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
0
7
0.02
4.7
15
2.44.22.3
480
5.5
5.5
20
3.563.3
1240
7.5
7.5
25
3.564.5
1430
8.5
9.5
40
3.564.5
1600
10
11
60
69.58
12.5
15
60
7119
0
0.02
0
0.02
0
15
0.02
0
20
0.03
0
23
0.03
12
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
W1
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.25
19
3.69
22.1
5.02
0.009
3.15
9.31
18.7
12
28.4
26.2
59.7
22.2
52.2
96.5
78.5
151
154
312
3.61
10.7
21.6
12
28.4
26.2
59.7
25.6
60.3
112
78.5
151
154
312
7.04
12.7
18.3
23.1
34.7
40.4
60.7
0.009
0.016
0.024
0.027
0.049
0.047
0.095
1800
296
62.4
341
104
0.11
1.68
1800
932
177
932
248
0.24
2.6
1.78
2.69
3.48
4
5.82
6.66
9.71
1.53
2.75
3.98
3.53
5.30
5.7
8.55
0.36
0.65
0.96
SRS 7GM
SRS 9XGS
1.37
1.53
SRS 9XGM
2.22
3.06
SRS 9XGN
2.94
4.59
SRS 12GM
3.36
3.55
SRS 15GM
5.59
5.72
SRS 20GM
5.95
9.40
SRS 25GM
13.3
22.3
Model No.
Reference bolt tightening torque when mounting an LM block for model SRS 7M is shown in the table below.
Reference tightening torque
Model No.
SRS 7M
M2
2.3
0.4
OptionsA1-473
A1-157
506E
4-S
4-S
B
N
N
T
H3
H3
W3
W2
W1
W2
Models SRS15WM/WN
Outer dimensions
Model No.
Height
SRS 7WM
W1
LM block dimensions
Width Length
L1
H3
25
31
19
10
M32.8
20.4
3.8
7.2
1.8
1.8
21
23
12
24
M32.8
27
38.7
4.9
9.1
2.3
2.9
SRS 9WM
SRS 9WN
12
30
39
50.7
SRS 12WM
SRS 12WN
14
40
44.5
59.5
28
15
28
M33.5
30.9
45.9
5.7
11
SRS 15WM
SRS 15WN
16
60
55.5
74.5
45
20
35
M44.5
38.9
57.9
6.5
13.3
2.7
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and
environment.
Model number coding
2 SRS15WM QZ UU C1 +550L P M -
Model
number
With QZ Contamination
Lubricator protection
accessory
LM rail length
(in mm)
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-158
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRS
L
L1
LM Guide
C
d2
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
W2
W3
M1
d1d2h
Max
0
14
0.02
5.5
5.2
30
3.563.2
480
36.4
7.71
0.56
78.6
130
16.2
29.1
91
151
31.5
41.3
0.031
0.049
1.01
0
18
0.02
7.5
30
3.564.5
1430
3.29 3.34 14
4.20 4.37 25.1
24
0
0.02
8.5
40
4.584.5
1600
143
249
26.4
49.2
143
249
66.5
88.7
0.055
0.091
1.52
42
0
0.02
23
9.5
40
4.584.5
1800
290
532
51.2
106
290
532
176
250
0.13
0.201
2.87
Model No.
SRS 7WGM
1.63
2.51
SRS 9WGM
2.67
3.35
SRS 12WGM
4.46
5.32
SRS 15WGM
7.43
8.59
Reference bolt tightening torque when mounting an LM block for model SRS 7WM is shown in the table below.
Reference tightening torque
Model No.
SRS 7WM
M3
2.8
0.4
OptionsA1-473
A1-159
506E
F
L0
Table2 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRS
Model No.
LM rail
standard
length
(LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
SRS
5M
40
55
70
100
130
160
SRS
5WM
50
70
90
110
130
150
170
SRS
7M
40
55
70
85
100
115
130
15
5
220
20
5
220
15
5
480
Unit: mm
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
SRS
7WM 9XS/XM/XN 9WM/WN 12M/N 12WM/WN 15M/N 15WM/WN 20M
70
55
50
70
70
110
220
50
110
75
95
80
150
280
110
80
340
95
110
120
150
150
190
110
460
115
140
145
190
190
230
140
640
170
170
230
270
230
170
135
880
200
200
195
310
270
270
155
1000
260
175
260
220
310
310
430
290
290
245
195
390
350
550
270
275
320
390
670
470
375
320
790
550
430
370
470
470
550
570
670
870
30
10
480
20
7.5
1240
30
10
1430
25
10
1430
40
15
1600
40
15
1600
40
15
1800
60
20
1800
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-160
SRS
25M
220
280
340
460
640
880
1000
60
20
1800
506E
SRS
Greasing Hole
Note1) Grease nipple is not available for models SRS5M, SRS5WM, SRS7M, SRS7WM, SRS9XS, SRS9XM, SRS9XN, SRS9WM, SRS12M and SRS12WM. They can have a greasing hole.
Note2) Using a greasing hole other than for greasing may cause damage.
Note3) For QZ Lubricator*, see A1-502. For Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS*, see A1-479.
Note4) When desiring a grease nipple for a model attached with QZ Lubricator, contact THK.
End seal
L
End seal
Model No.
5M
5WM
7M
7WM
9XS/XM/XN
9 WM/WN
12 M/N
SRS
4.0
15 M/N
(5.0)
4.0
15 WM/WN
(5.0)
3.5
20M
(5.0)
4.0
25M
(5.5)
7GM
7WGM
9XGS/
XGM/XGN
9WGM
12GM
12 WM/WN
SRS-G 12WGM
4.0
15GM
(5.0)
4.0
15WGM
(5.0)
3.5
20GM
(5.0)
4.0
25GM
(5.5)
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB1021B
1.2 drilled hole
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB1021B
A1-161
LM Guide
506E
SCR
Caged Ball LM Guide Cross LM Guide Model SCR
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
Grease nipple
LM block
Side seal
LM rail
Ball
Ball cage
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-80
A1-460
A1-466
A1-484
A1-162
506E
SCR
Structure and Features
A1-163
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and ball cages
and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
This model is an integral type of Caged Ball LM Guide that squares an internal structure similar to
model SHS, which has a proven track record and is highly reliable, with another and uses two LM
rails in combination. Since an orthogonal LM system can be achieved with model SCR alone, a
conventionally required saddle is no longer necessary, the structure for X-Y motion can be simplified
and the whole system can be downsized.
506E
Model SCR
Specification TableA1-166
Inner saddle
A1-164
506E
SCR
LM Guide
A1-165
506E
Model SCR
F
C1
M1
d1
H3
L2
B1
B4
B3
d2
W1
25-S
W2
W
E
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
B1
B3
B4
11.3 34.8
C1
L2
H3
E
5.5
SCR 15S
47
48
64.4
20
14
M46
33.4
18.5
SCR 20S
57
59
79
13
42.5
30
14.5
M58
43
4.6
23.5
12
SCR 20
57
78
98
13
7.5
37
24
56
11
M58
43
4.6
23.5
12
SCR 25
70
88
109
18
44
26
64
12
M610
47.4
5.8
28.5
12
SCR 30
82
105
131
21
12
53
32
76
14.5
M610
58
34
12
12
SCR 35
95
123
152
24
14
61
37
90
16.5
M814
68
7.5
40
SCR 45
118
140
174
30
16.5
75
45
110
15
M1015
84.6
8.9
49.5
16
SCR 65
180
226
272
40
27.5
116
76
180
23
M1422
123
19
71
16
Total No. of
LM blocks
Contamination
protection
accessory symbol (*1)
With QZ
Lubricator
LM rail length
on the X axis
(in mm)
LM rail length
on the Y axis
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-80.
A1-166
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SCR
E
L
W
W2
25-S
d2
B3
B4
H3
LM Guide
B1
W1
M1
L2
d1
C1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Grease
nipple
Static permissible
moment
Mass
Height
Pitch
Mounting
hole
C0
MO
MB
M1
d1d2h
kN
kN
kN-m
kN-m
kg
kg/m
LM block LM rail
W1
0
0.05
W2
PB-1021B
15
31.5
13
60
4.57.55.3
14.2
24.2
0.16
0.175
0.54
1.3
B-M6F
20
39.5
16.5
60
69.58.5
22.3
38.4
0.334
0.334
0.88
2.3
B-M6F
20
49
16.5
60
69.58.5
28.1
50.3
0.473
0.568
1.7
2.3
B-M6F
23
55.5
20
60
7119
36.8
64.7
0.696
0.848
3.4
3.2
B-M6F
28
66.5
23
80
91412
54.2
88.8
1.15
1.36
4.6
4.5
B-M6F
34
78.5
26
80
91412
72.9
127
2.01
2.34
6.8
6.2
B-PT1/8
45
92.5
32
105
142017
100
166
3.46
3.46
10.8
10.4
B-PT1/8
63
144.5
53
150
182622
253
408
11.9
13.3
44.5
23.7
Note) Static permissible moment: Static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
MB
M0
OptionsA1-473
A1-167
506E
G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SCR
Model No.
LM rail
standard length
(L0)
Unit: mm
SCR 15
SCR 20
SCR 25
SCR 30
SCR 35
SCR 45
SCR 65
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
1270
1570
2020
2620
Standard pitch F
60
60
60
80
80
105
150
20
20
20
20
20
22.5
35
Max length
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3090
3000
A1-168
506E
SCR
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SCR
The model SCR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. With the X-axis LM rail having tapped holes, this model can be secured with bolts from the top.
Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap Unit: mm
X-axis LM rail
Y-axis LM rail
Model No.
15
20
25
30
35
45
65
Tap diamete
M5
M6
M6
M8
M8
M12
M20
Tap depth
8
10
12
15
17
20
30
A1-169
LM Guide
Tapped-hole
rail
506E
EPF
Caged Ball LM Guide Finite stroke Model EPF
Stopper
LM block
Ball
Cage
45
45
LM rail
45
45
Cross-section
(DB configuration)
* For the ball cage, see A1-88.
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-86
A1-461
A1-173
A1-484
A1-170
506E
EPF
Structure and Features
Balls are held in cages with spherical ball holders and the balls roll in four rows of circular-arc
grooves in raceways on precision-ground LM rails and LM blocks.
tan
EPF9M
Existing equivalent products
[High Rigidity]
Because model EPF uses a DB construction
featuring 4 rows of circular-arc grooves, it offers
particularly high rigidity with respect to moment
in the MC direction. This makes it ideal for locations where MC moment is applied with one rail.
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
MC Moment [N-m]
tan
EPF12M
Existing equivalent products
0.0018
0.0016
0.0014
0.0012
0.001
0.0008
0.0006
0.0004
0.0002
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
MC Moment [N-m]
Fig.1 Comparison of MC moment test data
Resistance[N]
[Miniature Type]
Because the mounting method is compatible
with the Miniature LM Guide Model RSR-N, the
models are dimensionally interchangeable.
0.0020
0.0018
0.0016
0.0014
0.0012
0.001
0.0008
0.0006
0.0004
0.0002
0
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
EPF9M
Existing equivalent products
10
15
20
25
30
Resistance[N]
Stroke [mm]
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
EPF15M
Existing equivalent products
10
15
20
25
30
Stroke [mm]
Fig.2 Comparison of rolling resistance test data
A1-171
LM Guide
[Smooth motion]
Because a finite stroke is used, balls do not
circulate and movement is smooth even with
pre-loading. Also, because variations in rolling
resistance are small, this model is ideal for locations where smooth movement is required with
a short stroke.
506E
Model EPF
A1-172
Specification TableA1-174
506E
EPF
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface
If there is not sufficient precision in the LM rail and LM block mounting surfaces, the product may
not function to its full potential.Table1 Machine to values no higher than those shown in... (Recommended value: 70% of Table1)
Model No.
Flatness error
EPF 7M, 9M
0.015/200
EPF 12M
0.025/200
EPF 15M
0.035/200
LM Guide
A1-173
506E
Model EPF
W
B
4S
d3
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
Height
W1
LM block dimensions
LM rail dimensions
Width Length
LB
d3
LB1
W1
W2
M1
EPF 7M
17
31.6
12
13
M22.3
29.6
EPF 9M
10
20
37.8
15
16
M32.8
35.8
5.5
EPF 12M
13
27
43.7
20
20
M33.2
41.7
12
7.5
6.75
EPF 15M
16
32
56.5
25
25
M33.5
54.5
15
8.5
EPF7M 16 +55L P M
Model No.
LM rail length
(in mm)
Guaranteed stroke
(in mm)
Rail material:
Stainless steel (standard)
A1-174
https://tech.thk.com
506E
EPF
LB
LB1
C
LM Guide
d2
M1
h
d1
Unit: mm
C0
MB
Mass
MC
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
d1d2h
ST
kN
kN
15
2.44.22.6
16
0.90
1.60
5.08
5.08
5.26
0.019
0.230
7.5
20
3.563.3
21
1.00
1.87
6.81
6.81
7.89
0.036
0.290
10
25
3.563.8
27
2.26
3.71
15.5
15.5
20.8
0.074
0.550
15
40
3.564
34
3.71
5.88
33.0
33.0
41.3
0.136
0.940
Model No.
EPF 7M
Nominal
bolt
Iron
M2
0.588
Casting Aluminum
0.392
0.294
EPF 9M
EPF 12M
M3
EPF 15M
OptionsA1-473
1.96
1.27
0.98
Unit: N
Model No.
EPF 7M
EPF 9M
20
EPF 12M
30
EPF 15M
30
A1-175
506E
F
L0
Unit: mm
Model No.
EPF 7M
EPF 9M
EPF 12M
EPF 15M
LM rail
standard length
(L0)
55
75
95
110
Standard pitch
F
15
20
25
40
7.5
10
15
Note) Lengths other than the standard LM rail length (L0) are also available. Contact THK for details.
A1-176
506E
EPF
LM Guide
A1-177
506E
HSR
LM Guide Global Standard Size Model HSR
Retainer plate
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Grease nipple
45
Ball
Retainer plate
Inner seal (Optional)
45
Side seal
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-461
A1-466
A1-484
A1-178
506E
HSR
Structure and Features
A1-179
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out (except models HSR 8, 10 and 12).
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM
Guide to be used in all orientations. In addition, the LM block can receive a well-balanced preload,
increasing the rigidity in the four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. With
the low sectional height and the high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and stable straight motion.
506E
Types
Model HSR-A
Specification TableA1-184
Model HSR-B
Specification TableA1-186
Specification TableA1-188
Model HSR-R
Having a smaller LM block width (W) and
tapped holes, this model is optimal for compact
design.
Low-priced LM rails and LM blocks are individually stocked. We also have Ct grade model
HSR-R available with a short delivery time.
A1-180
Specification TableA1-192
506E
HSR
Model HSR-YR
Specification TableA1-196
Model HSR-LA
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-184
Model HSR-LB
Specification TableA1-186
A1-181
506E
Model HSR-LR
Specification TableA1-192
Model HSR-CA
Specification TableA1-198
Model HSR-CB
The LM block has six through holes. Used in
places where the table cannot have through
holes for mounting bolts.
A1-182
Specification TableA1-200
506E
HSR
Model HSR-HA
Specification TableA1-198
Model HSR-HB
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-200
Specification TableA1-202
A1-183
506E
4-S
W
B
4-S
T
t T1
T1 T
K
H3
W2
H3
W1
W2
W1
LM block dimensions
Model No.
HSR 15A
HSR 15AM
HSR 20A
HSR 20AM
HSR 20LA
HSR 20LAM
HSR 25A
HSR 25AM
HSR 25LA
HSR 25LAM
HSR 30A
HSR 30AM
HSR 30LA
HSR 30LAM
HSR 35A
HSR 35AM
HSR 35LA
HSR 35LAM
HSR 45A
HSR 45LA
HSR 55A
HSR 55LA
HSR 65A
HSR 65LA
HSR 85A
HSR 85LA
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
24
47
56.6
38
30
M5
38.8
11
19.3
4.3
30
63
74
53
40
M6
50.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
30
63
90
53
40
M6
66.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
36
70
83.1
57
45
M8
59.5
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
36
70
102.2
57
45
M8
78.6
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
42
90
98
72
52
M10 70.4
18
35
12
B-M6F
42
90
120.6
72
52
M10
18
35
12
B-M6F
48
100 109.4
82
62
M10 80.4
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
48
100 134.8
82
62
M10 105.8
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
25
13
15
50
10
16
B-PT1/8
10
29
13.5
17
57
11
16
B-PT1/8
13
37
21.5
23
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
55
28
30
94
23
16
B-PT1/8
16
60
120
70
140
90
170
110
215
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
100
80
M12
116
95
M14
142
110 M16
185
140 M20
93
98
129.8
118
156.1
147
206.5
178.6
236
H3
HSR25 A 2 QZ UU C0 M +1200L P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With QZ Contamination
Stainless steel
protection
Lubricator accessory
LM block
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless steel
LM rail
Symbol for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-184
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
d2
L
L1
C
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
15
16
15
60
4.57.55.3
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
23
23.5
22
60
7119
23
23.5
22
60
7119
28
31
26
80
91412
28
31
26
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
45
37.5
38
105
142017
3090
53
43.5
44
120
162320
3060
63
53.5
53
150
182622
3000
85
65
65
180
243528
3000
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.2
1.5
1.04 0.201
0.35
2.3
0.27
0.47
2.3
0.59
3.3
0.75
3.3
0.562
1.1
4.8
1.3
4.8
1.6
6.6
6.6
kN
kN
1.04
0.19
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
6.35
1.32
6.35
1.2
60
80.4
88.5
119
141
192
210
282
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.83
2.43
3.2
4.28
5.82
7.7
11
14.7
2.8
3.3
4.5
5.7
8.5
10.7
17
23
95.6
127
137
183
215
286
310
412
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
11
15.1
22.5
35.2
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-185
506E
4- H
t T T1
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Model No.
HSR 15B
HSR 15BM
HSR 20B
HSR 20BM
HSR 20LB
HSR 20LBM
HSR 25B
HSR 25BM
HSR 25LB
HSR 25LBM
HSR 30B
HSR 30BM
HSR 30LB
HSR 30LBM
HSR 35B
HSR 35BM
HSR 35LB
HSR 35LBM
HSR 45B
HSR 45LB
HSR 55B
HSR 55LB
HSR 65B
HSR 65LB
HSR 85B
HSR 85LB
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
24
47
56.6
38
30
4.5
38.8
11
19.3
4.3
30
63
74
53
40
50.8
10
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
30
63
90
53
40
66.8
10
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
36
70
83.1
57
45
59.5
16
11
10
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
36
70
102.2
57
45
78.6
16
11
10
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
42
90
98
72
52
70.4
18
10
35
12
B-M6F
42
90
120.6
72
52
93
18
10
35
12
B-M6F
48
100 109.4
82
62
80.4
21
12
13
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
48
100 134.8
82
62
105.8
21
12
13
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
25
13
15
50
10
16
B-PT1/8
10
29
13.5
17
57
11
16
B-PT1/8
13
37
21.5
23
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
55
28
30
94
23
16
B-PT1/8
16
60
120
70
140
90
170
110
215
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
100
80
11
116
95
14
142
110
16
185
140
18
98
129.8
118
156.1
147
206.5
178.6
236
H3
HSR25 B 2 QZ UU C0 M +1200L P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Stainless steel
LM rail
Symbol for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-186
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
d2
LM Guide
M1
L
L1
C
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
15
16
15
60
20
21.5
18
60
20
21.5
18
60
23
23.5
22
60
23
23.5
22
60
28
31
26
80
28
31
26
80
34
33
29
80
34
33
29
80
d1d2h
3000
4.57.55.3
(1240)
3000
69.58.5
(1480)
3000
69.58.5
(1480)
3000
7119
(2020)
3000
7119
(2020)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
45
37.5
38
105
142017
3090
53
43.5
44
120
162320
3060
63
53.5
53
150
182622
3000
85
65
65
180
243528
3000
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.2
1.5
0.35
2.3
0.27
0.47
2.3
0.59
3.3
0.75
3.3
0.562
1.1
4.8
1.3
4.8
1.6
6.6
6.6
kN
kN
1.04
0.19
1.04 0.201
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
6.35
1.32
6.35
1.2
60
80.4
88.5
119
141
192
210
282
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.83
2.43
3.2
4.28
5.82
7.7
11
14.7
2.8
3.3
4.5
5.7
8.5
10.7
17
23
95.6
127
137
183
215
286
310
412
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
11
15.1
22.5
35.2
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-187
506E
( H through)
T1 T
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
L1
24
47
56.6
38
30
M5
4.4
38.8
30
63
74
53
40
M6
5.4
50.8
36
70
83.1
57
45
M8
6.8
59.5
42
90
98
72
52
M10
8.5
70.4
48
100 109.4 82
62
M10
8.5
80.4
T1
H3
11
19.3
4.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
10
9.5
26
12
B-M6F
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
18
35
12
B-M6F
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
Block:
HSR25 C 1 SS Ct BLOCK
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Accuracy symbol
Indicates Ct Class
This variant: 1
Rail:
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Block symbol
A1-188
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
L
L1
M1
LM Guide
d2
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MB
MA
Width
W1
0.05
Height Pitch
W2
M1
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
15
16
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
0.2
1.5
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
3000
1.04 0.201
0.35
2.3
23
23.5
22
60
7119
3000
28
31
26
80
91412
3000
34
33
29
80
91412
3000
1.04
0.19
0.59
3.3
0.562
1.1
4.8
1.6
6.6
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-189
506E
Model HSR-RM
4-S
B
d
L1
C
d2
N
h
M1
H3
d1
W2 W1
LM block dimensions
L1
15
Greasing
hole Grease
nipple
d
H3
HSR 8RM
11
16
24
10
10
M22.5
8.9
2.6
2.2
2.1
HSR 10RM
13
20
31
13
12
M2.62.5 20.1
10.8
3.5
2.5
2.2
HSR 12RM
20
27
45
15
15
M44.5 30.5
16.9
5.2
PB107
3.1
HSR12 R 2 UU C1 M +670L H T M -
Model
Type of
number LM block
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
Stainless
steel
LM block
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
jointed use
Stainless
steel LM rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-190
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
W
4-S
L
L1
LM Guide
C
d2
T
M
K
M1
H3
d1
W2
W1
Model HSR12RM
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
W1
0.05
Height Pitch
W2
M1
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
20
2.44.22.3
0.012
0.3
10
25
3.563.3
0.025
0.45
12
7.5
11
40
3.564.5
0.08
0.83
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-191
506E
4-S
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
HSR 15R
HSR 15RM
HSR 20R
HSR 20RM
HSR 20LR
HSR 20LRM
HSR 25R
HSR 25RM
HSR 25LR
HSR 25LRM
HSR 30R
HSR 30RM
HSR 30LR
HSR 30LRM
HSR 35R
HSR 35RM
HSR 35LR
HSR 35LRM
HSR 45R
HSR 45LR
HSR 55R
HSR 55LR
HSR 65R
HSR 65LR
HSR 85R
HSR 85LR
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
L1
28
34
56.6
26
26
M45
38.8
23.3
8.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
30
44
74
32
36
M56
50.8
26
12
B-M6F
30
44
90
32
50
M56
66.8
26
12
B-M6F
40
48
83.1
35
35
M68
59.5
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
40
48
102.2
35
50
M68
78.6
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
45
60
98
40
40
M810
70.4
38
10
12
B-M6F
45
60
120.6
40
60
M810
93
38
10
12
B-M6F
55
70
109.4
50
50
M812
80.4
11.7
47.5
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
55
70
134.8
50
72
47.5
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
139
86
60
170.8
163
75
100
201.1
186
76
126
245.5
245.6
156
100
303
60
80
75
95
70
120
80
140
98
15
129.8
118
20.5
156.1
147
23
206.5
178.6
29
236
60
20
16
B-PT1/8
10
67
21
16
B-PT1/8
13
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
94
23
16
B-PT1/8
16
70
80
90
110
M1017
M1218
M1620
M1825
H3
HSR35 R 2 QZ SS C0 M +1400L P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With QZ Contamination
Stainless steel LM rail length
protection
Lubricator accessory
LM block
(in mm)
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
Stainless steel
LM rail
Symbol for
LM rail jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-192
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
d2
L
L1
C
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
15
9.5
15
60
20
12
18
60
20
12
18
60
23
12.5
22
60
23
12.5
22
60
28
16
26
80
28
16
26
80
34
18
29
80
34
18
29
80
d1d2h
3000
4.57.55.3
(1240)
3000
69.58.5
(1480)
3000
69.58.5
(1480)
3000
7119
(2020)
3000
7119
(2020)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
3000
91412
(2520)
45
20.5
38
105
142017
3090
53
23.5
44
120
162320
3060
63
31.5
53
150
182622
3000
85
35.5
65
180
243528
3000
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.18
1.5
1.04 0.201
0.25
2.3
0.27
0.35
2.3
0.54
3.3
0.67
3.3
0.562
0.9
4.8
1.1
4.8
1.5
6.6
6.6
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
1.04
0.19
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
6.35
1.32
6.35
1.2
60
80.4
88.5
119
141
192
210
282
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.83
2.43
3.2
4.28
5.82
7.7
11
14.7
2.6
3.1
4.3
5.4
7.3
9.3
13
16
95.6
127
137
183
215
286
310
412
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
11
15.1
22.5
35.2
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-193
506E
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
L1
28
34
56.6
26
26
M45
38.8
23.3
8.3
5.5
H3
PB1021B
4.7
30
44
74
32
36
M56
50.8
26
12
B-M6F
40
48
83.1
35
35
M68
59.5
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
45
60
98
40
40
M810
70.4
38
10
12
B-M6F
55
70
109.4
50
50
M812
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
Block:
HSR35 R 1 SS Ct BLOCK
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Accuracy symbol
Indicates Ct Class
This variant: 1
Rail:
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Block symbol
A1-194
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
L
L1
C
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
W1
Height Pitch
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.18
1.5
Length
C0
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
15
9.5
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
20
12
18
60
69.58.5
3000
1.04 0.201
0.25
2.3
23
12.5
22
60
7119
3000
0.54
3.3
28
16
26
80
91412
3000
0.562
0.9
4.8
34
18
29
80
91412
3000
1.5
6.6
28
46.8 0.524
1.04
2.7
0.19
0.524
2.7
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-195
506E
B1
B
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
B1
L1
H3
HSR 15YR
HSR 15YRM
28
33.5
56.6
4.3
11.5
18
M45
38.8
23.3
8.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
HSR 20YR
HSR 20YRM
30
43.5
74
11.5
25
M56
50.8
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 25YR
HSR 25YRM
40
47.5
83.1
16
30
M66
59.5
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
HSR 30YR
HSR 30YRM
45
59.5
98
16
40
M69
70.4
38
10
12
B-M6F
HSR 35YR
HSR 35YRM
55
69.5 109.4
23
43
M810
80.4
47.5
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
HSR 45YR
70
85.5
139
10
30
55
M1014
98
60
20
16
B-PT1/8
10
HSR 55YR
80
99.5
163
12
32
70
M1215
118
67
21
16
B-PT1/8
13
HSR 65YR
90
124.5 186
12
35
85
M1622
147
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
HSR25 YR 2 UU C0 M +1200L P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Contamination Stainless
protection
steel
accessory
LM block
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-196
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
L
L1
C
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MB
MA
Width
W1
Height Pitch
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
3000
8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844
(1240)
0.18
1.5
3000
13.8 23.8 0.19
(1480)
1.04 0.201
0.25
2.3
3000
19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344
(2020)
0.54
3.3
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
15
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
20
31.5
18
60
69.58.5
23
35
22
60
7119
28
43.5
26
80
91412
3000
(2520)
0.562
0.9
4.8
34
51.5
29
80
91412
3000
37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905
(2520)
1.5
6.6
45
65
38
105
142017
2.6
11
3090
28
60
46.8 0.524
95.6 1.42
1.04
2.7
0.19
0.524
7.92
1.42
2.7
7.92
1.83
53
76
44
120
162320
3060
13.2
2.45
13.2
3.2
4.3
15.1
63
93
53
150
182622
3000
141 215
23.5
4.8
23.5
5.82
7.3
22.5
4.8
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-197
506E
6-S
W
B
6-S
T
t T1
T1 T
H3
H3
W2
W2
W1
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Model No.
HSR 20CA
HSR 20CAM
HSR 20HA
HSR 20HAM
HSR 25CA
HSR 25CAM
HSR 25HA
HSR 25HAM
HSR 30CA
HSR 30CAM
HSR 30HA
HSR 30HAM
HSR 35CA
HSR 35CAM
HSR 35HA
HSR 35HAM
HSR 45CA
HSR 45HA
HSR 55CA
HSR 55HA
HSR 65CA
HSR 65HA
HSR 85CA
HSR 85HA
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
30
63
74
53
40
M6
50.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
30
63
90
53
40
M6
66.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
36
70
83.1
57
45
M8
59.5
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
36
70
102.2
57
45
M8
78.6
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
42
90
98
72
52
M10 70.4
18
35
12
B-M6F
42
90
120.6
72
52
M10
18
35
12
B-M6F
48
100 109.4
82
62
M10 80.4
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
48
100 134.8
82
62
M10 105.8
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
25
13
15
50
10
16
B-PT1/8
10
29
13.5
17
57
11
16
B-PT1/8
13
37
21.5
23
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
55
28
30
94
23
16
B-PT1/8
16
60
120
70
140
90
170
110
215
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
100
80
M12
116
95
M14
142
110 M16
185
140 M20
93
98
129.8
118
156.1
147
206.5
178.6
236
H3
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
Symbol
for LM rail No. of rails used
jointed use on the same
plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-198
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
d2
L
L1
C
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
23
23.5
22
60
7119
23
23.5
22
60
7119
28
31
26
80
91412
28
31
26
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
45
37.5
38
105
142017
3090
53
43.5
44
120
162320
3060
63
53.5
53
150
182622
3000
85
65
65
180
243528
3000
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.35
2.3
0.27
0.47
2.3
0.59
3.3
0.75
3.3
0.562
1.1
4.8
1.3
4.8
1.6
6.6
6.6
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
1.04
0.19
1.04 0.201
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
6.35
1.32
6.35
1.2
60
80.4
88.5
119
141
192
210
282
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.83
2.43
3.2
4.28
5.82
7.7
11
14.7
2.8
3.3
4.5
5.7
8.5
10.7
17
23
95.6
127
137
183
215
286
310
412
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
11
15.1
22.5
35.2
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-199
506E
6- H
T T1
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Model No.
HSR 20CB
HSR 20CBM
HSR 20HB
HSR 20HBM
HSR 25CB
HSR 25CBM
HSR 25HB
HSR 25HBM
HSR 30CB
HSR 30CBM
HSR 30HB
HSR 30HBM
HSR 35CB
HSR 35CBM
HSR 35HB
HSR 35HBM
HSR 45CB
HSR 45HB
HSR 55CB
HSR 55HB
HSR 65CB
HSR 65HB
HSR 85CB
HSR 85HB
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
30
63
74
53
40
50.8
10
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
30
63
90
53
40
66.8
10
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
36
70
83.1
57
45
59.5
16
11
10
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
36
70
102.2
57
45
78.6
16
11
10
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
42
90
98
72
52
70.4
18
10
35
12
B-M6F
42
90
120.6
72
52
93
18
10
35
12
B-M6F
48
100
109.4
82
62
80.4
21
12
13
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
48
100
134.8
82
62
105.8
21
12
13
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
60
120
100
80
11
25
13
15
50
10
16
B-PT1/8
10
70
140
116
95
14
29
13.5
17
57
11
16
B-PT1/8
13
90
170
142
110
16
37
21.5
23
76
19
16
B-PT1/8
14
110
215
185 140
18
55
28
30
94
23
16
B-PT1/8
16
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
98
129.8
118
156.1
147
206.5
178.6
236
H3
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
Symbol
No. of rails used
for LM rail on the same
jointed use plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-200
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
E
L
L1
C
d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
23
23.5
22
60
7119
23
23.5
22
60
7119
28
31
26
80
91412
28
31
26
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
34
33
29
80
91412
45
37.5
38
105
142017
3090
53
43.5
44
120
162320
3060
63
53.5
53
150
182622
3000
85
65
65
180
243528
3000
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.35
2.3
0.27
0.47
2.3
0.59
3.3
0.75
3.3
0.562
1.1
4.8
1.3
4.8
1.6
6.6
6.6
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
1.04
0.19
1.04 0.201
28
46.8 0.524
2.7
0.524
2.7
6.35
1.32
6.35
1.2
60
80.4
88.5
119
141
192
210
282
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
7.92
12.6
13.2
21.3
23.5
40.5
45.6
72.5
1.83
2.43
3.2
4.28
5.82
7.7
11
14.7
2.8
3.3
4.5
5.7
8.5
10.7
17
23
95.6
127
137
183
215
286
310
412
1.42
2.44
2.45
4.22
4.8
8.72
8.31
14.2
11
15.1
22.5
35.2
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-201
506E
9-S
W
B
9- H
T1 T
T1 T
K
H3
W2
H3
Outer dimensions
Model No.
W1
W2
W1
LM block dimensions
L1
T1
H3
32
32
33
35
35
100
23
16
B-PT1/4
20
HSR 100HA
HSR 100HB
HSR 100HR
120
250
250
200
334
220
220 200
130
20
M18
261
M1827
HSR 120HA
HSR 120HB
HSR 120HR
130
290
290
220
365
250
250 210
146
22
M20
34
287 34
M2030
33.7
38
38
110 26.5
16
B-PT1/4
20
HSR 150HA
HSR 150HB
HSR 150HR
145
350
350
266
396
300
300 230
180
26
M24
314
M2435
40
40
123
16
B-PT1/4
22
36
36
33
29
HSR150 HR 2 UU C1 +2350L H T -
Model
number
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
Normal (No symbol)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Type of
LM block
Symbol
for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-202
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR
L
L1
C
W
B
6-S
T
K
M1
d1
H3
W2
LM Guide
d2
W1
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
W1
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
100
75
75
50
70
210
263932
3000
98.2
19.4
98.2
22.4
32
49
114
88
88
53
75
230
334843
3000
129
25.9
129
31.1
43
61
144
103
103
61
85
250
395846
3000
167
33.6
167
45.2
62
87
0.05
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-204.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-203
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR
Model No.
35
55
75
95
115
135
155
175
195
215
235
255
275
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
45
70
95
120
145
170
195
220
245
270
295
320
345
370
395
420
445
470
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
350
390
430
470
510
550
590
630
670
Standard pitch F 20
25
40
G
7.5
10
15
Max length
(975) (995) (1240)
Note1)
Note2)
Note3)
Note4)
Unit: mm
HSR 8 HSR 10 HSR 12 HSR 15 HSR 20 HSR 25 HSR 30 HSR 35 HSR 45 HSR 55 HSR 65 HSR 85 HSR 100 HSR 120 HSR 150
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
60
20
60
20
60
20
80
20
80
20
3000
(1240)
3000
(1480)
3000
(2020)
3000
(2520)
3000
(2520)
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
1530
1890
2250
2610
The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
The figures in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel made models.
The LM rail standard lengths appearing in dimmed text for models HSR 15 to HSR 35 are not available as standard
for Ct7 and Ct5 grades. If desiring a length in dimmed text, contact THK.
A1-204
506E
HSR
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model HSR
HSR model rails also include a type where the LM rail is tapped from the bottom. This type is useful
when mounting from the bottom of the base and when increased contamination protection is desired.
Clearance
LM Guide
1
S1
Model No.
S1
HSR 15
HSR 20
HSR 25
HSR 30
HSR 35
HSR 45
HSR 55
HSR 65
M5
M6
M6
M8
M8
M12
M14
M20
8
10
12
15
17
24
24
30
HSR30A2UU +1000LH K
Symbol for
tapped-hole LM rail type
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 grades are not applicable.
A1-205
506E
Stopper
In miniature model HSR, the balls fall out if the LM block comes off the LM rail.
For this reason, they are delivered with a stopper fitted to prevent the LM block coming off the rail. If
you remove the stopper when using the product, take care to ensure that overrun does not occur.
Table3 Model HSR stopper (C type) specification table
Unit: mm
Model No.
13
10
10
16
11
12
20
15
Greasing Hole
[Semi-standard Greasing Hole for Model HSR]
For model HSR, a semi-standard greasing hole is available. Specify the appropriate model number
according to the application.
Greasing hole
Greasing hole
A1-206
506E
HSR
LM Guide
A1-207
506E
SR
LM Guide Radial Type Model SR
LM block
Endplate
Grease nipple
End seal
90
LM rail
Ball
30
Retainer plate
Side seal (Optional)
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-459
A1-466
A1-484
A1-208
506E
SR
Structure and Features
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since a retainer plate holds the balls, they
will not fall off even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail. With the low sectional height and the
high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and stable straight motion.
A1-209
LM Guide
506E
Model SR-W
Specification TableA1-214
Model SR-TB
Specification TableA1-216
Model SR-V
A space-saving type whose LM block has the
same cross-sectional shape as model SR-W,
but has a smaller overall LM block length (L).
A1-210
Specification TableA1-214
506E
SR
Model SR-SB
Specification TableA1-216
LM Guide
A1-211
506E
Characteristics of Model SR
When compared to models having a contact angle of 45, model SR shows excellent characteristics
as indicated below. Using these characteristics, you can design and manufacture highly accurate
and highly rigid machines or equipment.
Difference in Rated Load and Service Life
Since SR has a contact angle of 90, its rated load and service life are different from those with a contact angle
of 45. When comparing model SR with a model that has a contact angle of 45 and when the same radial load
is applied to the two models with the same ball diameter as shown in the figure below, the load applied to SR is
70% of the other model. As a result, the service life of SR is more than twice that of the other model.
45
45
30
90
108
Contact Structure
of Model HSR
107
106
105
90
45
Contact Structure
of Model SR
104
Contact structure of 90
(Model SR)
Contact structure of 45
(Model HSR)
10
(mm)
Ball diameter
Ball Diameter and Nominal Life
Fig.1
Difference in Accuracy
ro
er
ng
45
Lower
groove
A1-212
45
di
rin
30
ro
Lower
groove
er
Upper
groove
or
ng
err
di
ing
rin
ind
Gr
90
If a machining error (grinding error) occurs in the LM rail or LM block, it will affect the running accuracy. Assuming that there is a machining error of on the raceway, it results in an error in the radial direction, and the error
with the contact angle of 45 (model HSR) is 1.4 times greater than that of the contact angle of 90 (model SR).
As for the machining error resulting in horizontal direction error, the error with the contact angle of 45 is 1.22
times greater than the contact angle of 30 .
506E
SR
Difference in Rigidity
2
n
io
ct
le
ef
D
P1
P
LM Guide
Deflection 1
Deflection in radial direction 1
The 90 contact angle adopted by model SR has a difference with the 45 contact angle also in rigidity.
When the same radial load P is applied, the displacement in the radial direction with model SR is only 56% of
that with the contact angle of 45. Accordingly, where high rigidity in the radial direction is required, model SR
is more advantageous. The figure below shows the difference in radial load and displacement.
45
90
Load and deflection when contact angles are not the same (Da=6.35mm)
(deflection per ball)
Deflection (m)
25
20
When the contact angle is 90
15
10
5
0
100
500
600
Conclusion
Model SR with this type of 90 contact construction are ideal for locations where the load applied is mostly
radial, locations where radial rigidity is required, and locations where accurate motion is demanded in the up,
down, left and right directions.
However, if the reverse radial load, the lateral load or the moment is large, we recommend model HSR, which
has a contact angle of 45 (4-way equal load).
A1-213
506E
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
SR 15V/VM
SR 15W/WM
SR 20V/VM
SR 20W/WM
SR 25V/VM
SR 25W/WM
SR 30V/VM
SR 30W/WM
SR 35V/VM
SR 35W/WM
SR 45W
SR 55W
SR 70T
SR 85T
SR 100T
SR 120T
SR 150T
LM block dimensions
24
34
28
42
33
48
42
60
48
70
60
68
85
110
120
110
135
86
100
126
156
178
205
250
L
40.4
57
47.3
66.2
59.2
83
67.9
96.8
77.6
111
126
156
194.6
180
200
235
280
Grease
nipple
B
26
32
35
40
50
60
75
90
100
120
160
200
26
32
35
40
50
60
75
90
80
100
120
160
S
M47
M58
M69
M812
M812
M1015
M1220
M1625
M1830
M2035
M2035
M2035
L1
22.9
39.5
27.8
46.7
35.2
59
40.4
69.3
45.7
79
90.5
117
147.6
130
150
180
215
H3
5.7
18.2
5.5
PB1021B
5.8
7.2
22
12
B-M6F
7.7
26
12
B-M6F
8.5
32.5
12
B-M6F
9.5
12.5 36.5
8.5
12
B-M6F
11.5
15 47.5
16.7 54.5
24.5 70
25.5 91.5
29.5 101
24
95
24
113
11.5
12
12
27
32
14
17
16
16
16
12
12
13.5
13.5
B-PT1/8
B-PT1/8
B-PT1/8
A-PT1/8
A-PT1/8
B-PT1/4
B-PT1/4
12.5
13.5
15
18.5
19
15
22
SR25 W 2 UU C0 M +1240L Y P T M -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-214
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SR
d2
4-S
E
d2
M1
L
L1
C
LM Guide
2-S
L
L1
M1
d1
d1
Model SR-V
Model SR-W
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
W1
0.05
Height Pitch
W2
M1
15
9.5
12.5
60
20
11
15.5
60
23
12.5
18
60
28
16
23
80
34
18
27.5
80
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
5.39
9.51
7.16
12.5
11.7
20.3
17.2
30
23.8
41.7
55.3
89.1
156
120
148
279
411
11.1
19.3
14.4
25.2
22.5
39.5
32.5
56.8
44.1
77.2
101
157
266
224
283
377
537
(1240)
3.564.5
3000
(1480)
69.58.5
3000
(2020)
7119
3000
(2520)
7119
3000
(2520)
91412
3000
1117.514 3000
142017
3000
182622
3000
182622
3000
223225
3000
263930
3000
334836
3000
1
block
0.0326
0.0925
0.053
0.146
0.103
0.286
0.163
0.494
0.259
0.74
1.1
2.27
2.54
2.54
3.95
5.83
9.98
Double
blocks
0.224
0.516
0.332
0.778
0.649
1.52
1.08
2.55
1.68
4.01
5.96
11.3
13.2
15.1
20.9
32.9
55.8
MB
1
block
0.0203
0.0567
0.0329
0.0896
0.0642
0.175
0.102
0.303
0.161
0.454
0.679
1.39
2.18
1.25
1.95
2.87
4.92
Double
blocks
0.143
0.321
0.21
0.481
0.41
0.942
0.692
1.57
1.07
2.49
3.69
6.98
11.3
7.47
10.3
16.2
27.5
MC
1
block
0.0654
0.113
0.11
0.194
0.201
0.355
0.352
0.611
0.576
1.01
1.77
2.87
4.14
5.74
8.55
13.7
24.3
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.12
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.2
2.2
3.6
7
10.1
14.1
1.2
2.1
2.7
4.3
6.4
11.3
12.8
22.8
34.9
46.4
Note1) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Those model numbers including and greater than SR85T are semi-standard models. If desiring these models, contact THK.
Models SR85T and SR100T are equipped with grease nipple on the side face of the LM block.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-218.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Note2) For models SR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SR 15
SR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-215
506E
T1 T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
SR 15SB/SBM
SR 15TB/TBM
SR 20SB/SBM
SR 20TB/TBM
SR 25SB/SBM
SR 25TB/TBM
SR 30SB/SBM
SR 30TB/TBM
SR 35SB/SBM
SR 35TB/TBM
SR 45TB
SR 55TB
LM block dimensions
24
52
28
59
33
73
42
90
48
100
60
68
120
140
L
40.4
57
47.3
66.2
59.2
83
67.9
96.8
77.6
111
126
156
B
41
49
60
72
82
100
116
26
32
35
40
50
60
75
H
4.5
5.5
7
9
9
11
14
L1
22.9
6.1
39.5
27.8
8
46.7
35.2
9.1
59
40.4
8.7
69.3
45.7
11.2
79
90.5 12.8
117 15.3
T1
H3
18.2
5.5
PB1021B
5.8
22
12
B-M6F
10
26
12
B-M6F
10
32.5
12
B-M6F
9.5
13
36.5
8.5
12
B-M6F
11.5
15
17
47.5 11.5
54.5 12
16
16
B-PT1/8
B-PT1/8
12.5
13.5
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
SR25 TB 2 UU C1 +1200L Y H T -
Contamination
Symbol for
LM rail length
protection
Symbol for
LM rail
(in mm)
accessory
Applied to only jointed use No. of rails used
symbol (*1)
on the same plane (*4)
15 and 25
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks
Accuracy symbol (*3)
used on the same Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Model Type of
number LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-216
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SR
d2
2- H
L
L1
d2
4- H
LM Guide
L
L1
C
M1
M1
d1
d1
Model SR-SB
Model SR-TB
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
W2
M1
15
18.5 12.5
60
20
19.5 15.5
60
23
25
18
60
28
31
23
80
33
27.5
80
34
45
48
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
5.39
9.51
7.16
12.5
11.7
20.3
17.2
30
23.8
41.7
55.3
89.1
11.1
19.3
14.4
25.2
22.5
39.5
32.5
56.8
44.1
77.2
101
157
(1240)
3000
(1480)
69.58.5
3000
(2020)
7119
3000
(2520)
7119
3000
(2520)
91412
3000
1117.514 3000
142017
3000
3.564.5
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.0326
0.0925
0.053
0.146
0.103
0.286
0.163
0.494
0.259
0.74
1.1
2.27
0.224
0.516
0.332
0.778
0.649
1.52
1.08
2.55
1.68
4.01
5.96
11.3
0.0203
0.0567
0.0329
0.0896
0.0642
0.175
0.102
0.303
0.161
0.454
0.679
1.39
0.143
0.321
0.21
0.481
0.41
0.942
0.692
1.57
1.07
2.49
3.69
6.98
0.0654
0.113
0.11
0.194
0.201
0.355
0.352
0.611
0.576
1.01
1.77
2.87
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.1
1
1.5
2.5
4.2
1.2
2.1
2.7
4.3
6.4
11.3
12.8
Note1) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-218.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SR 15
SR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-217
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SR
Model No.
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1660
1720
1780
1840
1900
1960
2020
2080
2140
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1660
1720
1780
1840
1900
1960
2020
2080
2140
2200
2260
2320
2380
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2120
2200
2280
2360
2440
2520
2600
2680
2760
2840
2920
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2120
2200
2280
2360
2440
2520
2600
2680
2760
2840
2920
60
60
60
80
80
20
20
20
20
20
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
(1240) (1480) (2020) (2520) (2520)
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
1270
1570
2020
2620
1520
2060
2600
1550
1970
2600
1700
2390
1600
2100
105
22.5
120
30
150
35
180
40
210
40
230
45
250
50
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note3) Those model numbers including and greater than SR85T are semi-standard models. If desiring these models, contact
THK.
Note4) The figures in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel made models.
A1-218
506E
SR
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SR
SR model rails also include a type where the LM rail is tapped from the bottom. This type is useful
when mounting from the bottom of the base and when increased contamination protection is desired.
Clearance
LM Guide
1
S1
Model No.
S1
SR 15
M5
SR 20
M6
SR 25
M6
10
SR 30
M8
14
SR 35
M8
16
SR 45
M12
20
SR 55
M14
22
A1-219
506E
NR/NRS
LM Guide Ultra-heavy Load Type for Machine Tools Model NR/NRS
LM rail
LM block
Inner seal
Endplate
90
End seal
45
45
Oil valve
Grease nipple
45
Ball
Side seal
Radial Type
Model NR
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-70
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-460
A1-466
A1-484
A1-220
506E
NR/NRS
Structure and Features
* Due to the extremely high rigidity of the LM guides used in models NR/NRS, the construction does not easily absorb the
effects of mounting surface misalignment and installation errors. Where such effects arise, there is a risk of reduced operating life and/or malfunction. Contact THK when considering the use of these products.
A1-221
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. The raceways are cut into deep grooves
that have a radius closer to that of the balls than in the conventional design, using special equipment and an extremely precise cutting technique. This design allows high rigidity, high vibration/impact resistance and high damping capacity, all of which are required for machine tools, thus making
these models capable of bearing ultra-heavy loads.
506E
Models NR-R/NRS-R
Specification TableA1-226/A1-228
Models NR-A/NRS-A
Specification TableA1-230/A1-232
Models NR-B/NRS-B
The flange of the LM block has through holes.
Used in places where the table cannot have
through holes for mounting bolts.
A1-222
Specification TableA1-234/A1-236
506E
NR/NRS
Models NR-LR/NRS-LR
Specification TableA1-226/A1-228
Models NR-LA/NRS-LA
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-230/A1-232
Models NR-LB/NRS-LB
Specification TableA1-234/A1-236
A1-223
506E
fle
ctio
De
45
90
Contact structure of 90
(Model NR)
Contact structure of 45
Load and deflection when contact angles are not the same (Da=6.35mm)
(deflection per 24 balls)
25
Deflection (m)
20
15
10
5
0
A1-224
4
6
8
Applied load (kN)
10
B
H
W
Radial type structure
Fig.3 Cross Section of Model NR
506E
NR/NRS
[Comparison of Contact Surface and Internal Stress between Different Contact Structures]
As shown in Fig.4, the contact area and the internal stress of a ball greatly vary depending on the
shape of contact surface.
With the conventional roller guide, the effective length is shorter than the apparent value due to the
retention of the rollers. Additionally, the change of stress distribution in the contact section caused
by a mounting error significantly affects the differential slip.
0.52Da
LM Guide
0.51Da
0.55Da
d1d2
1.2
1.0
1.0
3.6
d2 d1
d 2 d1
d1d2
d1 d 2
d1d2
d1d2
Change in differential
slip: large
A1-225
506E
W
B
d2
L
L1
C
4- D0
e0
f0
4-S
M1
H3
d1
W1
W2
Model NR-R
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
M
NR 25XR
31
NR 25XLR
NR 30R
38
NR 30LR
NR 35R
44
NR 35LR
NR 45R
52
NR 45LR
NR 55R
63
NR 55LR
NR 65R
75
NR 65LR
NR 75R
83
NR 75LR
NR 85R
90
NR 85LR
NR 100R
105
NR 100LR
W
50
60
70
86
100
126
145
156
200
L1
82.8
35
62.4
32
M68
102
50
81.6
98
40
70.9
40
M810
120.5
60
93.4
109.5
50
77.9
50
M812
135
72
103.4
139
60
105
60
M1017
171
80
137
75
162.8
123.6
65
M1218
200
95
160.8
185.6
143.6
70
76
M1620
245.6
110
203.6
218
80
170.2
95
M1825
274
130
226.2
246.7
194.9
80
100
M1825
251
302.8
140
286.2
223.4
150
130
M1827
326.2
200
263.4
f0
e0
D0
H3
9.7 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
9.7
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
11.7 35
12
5.2
B-M6F
14.7 40.5 10
16
17.5 49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
21.5 60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
25.3 68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
27.3 73
20
20
16
10
8.2 B-PT1/8
17
34.3 85
23
23
10
12
8.2 B-PT1/4
20
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-226
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
E
6-S
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
Model NR-LR
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
33
44
48.7
64.9
63.1
85.7
96
126
131
170
189
260
271
355
336
435
479
599
84.6
113
122
162
155
210
231
303
310
402
436
600
610
800
751
972
1040
1300
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
12.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
16
21
80
7119
3000
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3090
53
162320
3060
63
31.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
35
44
150
223226
3000
85
35.5
48
180
243528
3000
100
50
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.43
0.55
0.74
1
1.1
1.4
2
2.8
3.3
4.3
6
8.7
8.7
11.6
12.3
15.8
21.8
26.1
0.771
1.26
1.26
2.18
1.75
3.14
3.37
5.93
5.39
8.87
8.76
16.8
14.4
25.4
20.3
34.7
34
47.3
0.91
1.21
1.47
1.95
2.24
3.03
4.45
5.82
6.98
9.05
11.6
15.9
19.3
25.2
26.8
34.6
43.4
54.6
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-227
506E
W
B
d2
L
L1
C
4- D0
e0
f0
T
h
4-S
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
Model NRS-R
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
NRS 25XR
NRS 25XLR
NRS 30R
NRS 30LR
NRS 35R
NRS 35LR
NRS 45R
NRS 45LR
NRS 55R
NRS 55LR
NRS 65R
NRS 65LR
NRS 75R
NRS 75LR
NRS 85R
NRS 85LR
NRS 100R
NRS 100LR
Grease
nipple
M
31
50
38
60
44
70
52
86
63
100
75
126
83
145
90
156
105
200
L1
82.8
35
62.4
32
M68
102
50
81.6
98
40
70.9
40
M810
120.5
60
93.4
109.5
50
77.9
50
M812
135
72
103.4
139
60
105
60
M1017
171
80
137
75
162.8
123.6
65
M1218
200
95
160.8
185.6
143.6
70
76
M1620
245.6
110
203.6
218
80
170.2
95
M1825
274
130
226.2
246.7
194.9
80
100
M1825
251
302.8
140
286.2
223.4
150
130
M1827
326.2
200
263.4
f0
e0
D0
H3
9.7 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
9.7
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
11.7 35
12
5.2
B-M6F
14.7 40.5 10
16
17.5 49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
21.5 60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
25.3 68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
27.3 73
20
20
16
10
8.2 B-PT1/8
17
34.3 85
23
23
10
12
8.2 B-PT1/4
20
Type of
LM block
Contamination
With QZ
Lubricator protection
accessory
LM rail length
(in mm)
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-228
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
E
6-S
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
d2
LM Guide
N
h
M1
d1
F
Model NRS-LR
Width
Height Pitch
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
25.9
34.5
38.2
51
49.5
67.2
75.3
98.8
103
133
148
204
212
278
264
342
376
470
59.8
79.7
86.1
115
109
148
163
214
220
284
309
425
431
566
531
687
737
920
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
12.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
16
21
80
7119
3000
34
18
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
20.5
29
105
142017
3000
53
162320
3000
63
31.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
35
44
150
223226
3000
85
35.5
48
180
243528
3000
100
50
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.568
0.926
0.926
1.6
1.28
2.29
2.47
4.34
3.97
6.49
6.45
12.3
10.6
18.6
14.9
25.4
25.1
34.6
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.43
0.55
0.74
1
1.1
1.4
2
2.8
3.3
4.3
6
8.7
8.7
11.6
12.3
15.8
21.8
26.1
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-229
506E
W
B
d2
T1 T
L
L1
C
4- D0
e0
f0
4-S
M1
H3
d1
W1
W2
Model NR-A
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
NR 25XA
NR 25XLA
NR 30A
NR 30LA
NR 35A
NR 35LA
NR 45A
NR 45LA
NR 55A
NR 55LA
NR 65A
NR 65LA
NR 75A
NR 75LA
NR 85A
NR 85LA
NR 100A
NR 100LA
Grease
nipple
M
31
72
38
90
44
100
52
120
63
140
75
170
83
195
90
215
105 260
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
59
45
M816
72
52 M1018
82
62 M1020
100
80 M1222
116
95 M1424
L1
62.4
81.6
70.9
93.4
77.9
103.4
105
137
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
170.2
226.2
194.9
251
223.4
263.4
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
14.8 16 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
16.8 18
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
18.8 20
35
12
5.2
B-M6F
20.5 22 40.5 10
16
22.5 24
49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8 14
26
28
60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8 15
28
30
68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8 15
32
34
73
20
20
16
10
8.2 B-PT1/8 17
35
38
85
23
23
10
12
8.2 B-PT1/4 20
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
With plate cover or
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-230
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
E
6-S
L
L1
e0
4- D0
C
f0
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
Model NR-LA
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
33
44
48.7
64.9
63.1
85.7
96
126
131
170
189
260
271
355
336
435
479
599
84.6
113
122
162
155
210
231
303
310
402
436
600
610
800
751
972
1040
1300
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3000
53
162320
3000
63
53.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
60
44
150
223226
3000
85
65
48
180
243528
3000
100
80
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.58
0.77
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.4
5.7
7.6
10.9
11.3
15
16.2
20.7
26.7
31.2
0.771
1.26
1.26
2.18
1.75
3.14
3.37
5.93
5.39
8.87
8.76
16.8
14.4
25.4
20.3
34.7
34
47.3
0.91
1.21
1.47
1.95
2.24
3.03
4.45
5.82
6.98
9.05
11.6
15.9
19.3
25.2
26.8
34.6
43.4
54.6
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-231
506E
W
B
d2
T1 T
L
L1
C
4- D0
e0
f0
4-S
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
Model NRS-A
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
M
NRS 25XA
31
NRS 25XLA
NRS 30A
38
NRS 30LA
NRS 35A
44
NRS 35LA
NRS 45A
52
NRS 45LA
NRS 55A
63
NRS 55LA
NRS 65A
75
NRS 65LA
NRS 75A
83
NRS 75LA
NRS 85A
90
NRS 85LA
NRS 100A
105
NRS 100LA
72
90
100
120
140
170
195
215
260
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
59
45 M816
72
52 M1018
82
62 M1020
100
80 M1222
116
95 M1424
L1
62.4
81.6
70.9
93.4
77.9
103.4
105
137
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
170.2
226.2
194.9
251
223.4
263.4
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
14.8 16 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
16.8 18
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
18.8 20
35
12
5.2
B-M6F
20.5 22 40.5 10
16
22.5 24
49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8 14
26
28
60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8 15
28
30
68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8 15
32
34
73
20
20
16
10
8.2 B-PT1/8 17
35
38
85
23
23
10
12
8.2 B-PT1/4 20
Type of
LM block
Contamination
With QZ
Lubricator protection
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
With plate cover or
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-232
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
E
6-S
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Model NRS-LA
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
25.9
34.5
38.2
51
49.5
67.2
75.3
98.8
103
133
148
204
212
278
264
342
376
470
59.8
79.7
86.1
115
109
148
163
214
220
284
309
425
431
566
531
687
737
920
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3000
53
162320
3000
63
53.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
60
44
150
223226
3000
85
65
48
180
243528
3000
100
80
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.568
0.926
0.926
1.6
1.28
2.29
2.47
4.34
3.97
6.49
6.45
12.3
10.6
18.6
14.9
25.4
25.1
34.6
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.58
0.77
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.4
5.7
7.6
10.9
11.3
15
16.2
20.7
26.7
31.2
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-233
506E
W
B
d2
t T T1
4- D0
e0
f0
L
L1
C
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
Model NR-B
LM block dimensions
Outer dimensions
Model No.
NR 25XB
31
NR 25XLB
NR 30B
38
NR 30LB
NR 35B
44
NR 35LB
NR 45B
52
NR 45LB
NR 55B
63
NR 55LB
NR 65B
75
NR 65LB
NR 75B
83
NR 75LB
NR 85B
90
NR 85LB
NR 100B
105
NR 100LB
W
72
90
100
120
140
170
195
215
260
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
59
45
72
52
82
62
100 80
11
116 95
14
L1
62.4
81.6
70.9
93.4
77.9
103.4
105
137
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
170.2
226.2
194.9
251
223.4
263.4
142 110 16
165 130 18
185 140 18
220
150
20
200
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
16 14.8 12 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
18 16.8 14
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
20 18.8 16
35
12
5.2
B-M6F
22 20.5 20 40.5 10
16
24 22.5 22
49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
28
26
25
60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
30
28
26
68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
34
32
28
73
20
20
16
10 8.2 B-PT1/8
17
38
35
32
85
23
23
10
12 8.2 B-PT1/4
20
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
With plate cover or
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-234
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
6- H
E
d2
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Model NR-LB
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
kN
kN
33
44
48.7
64.9
63.1
85.7
96
126
131
170
189
260
271
355
336
435
479
599
84.6
113
122
162
155
210
231
303
310
402
436
600
610
800
751
972
1040
1300
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3000
53
162320
3000
63
53.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
60
44
150
223226
3000
85
65
48
180
243528
3000
100
80
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
0.58
0.77
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.4
5.7
7.6
10.9
11.3
15
16.2
20.7
26.7
31.2
0.771
1.26
1.26
2.18
1.75
3.14
3.37
5.93
5.39
8.87
8.76
16.8
14.4
25.4
20.3
34.7
34
47.3
0.91
1.21
1.47
1.95
2.24
3.03
4.45
5.82
6.98
9.05
11.6
15.9
19.3
25.2
26.8
34.6
43.4
54.6
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-235
506E
W
B
d2
t T T1
4- D0
e0
f0
L
L1
C
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
Model NRS-B
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
NRS 25XB
31
NRS 25XLB
NRS 30B
38
NRS 30LB
NRS 35B
44
NRS 35LB
NRS 45B
52
NRS 45LB
NRS 55B
63
NRS 55LB
NRS 65B
75
NRS 65LB
NRS 75B
83
NRS 75LB
NRS 85B
90
NRS 85LB
NRS 100B
105
NRS 100LB
W
72
90
100
120
140
170
195
215
260
L
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
59
45
72
52
82
62
100 80
11
116 95
14
142 110 16
165 130 18
185 140 18
150
220
20
200
L1
62.4
81.6
70.9
93.4
77.9
103.4
105
137
123.6
160.8
143.6
203.6
170.2
226.2
194.9
251
223.4
263.4
T1
f0
e0
D0
H3
16 14.8 12 25.5
12
3.9
B-M6F
5.5
18 16.8 14
31
12
3.9
B-M6F
20 18.8 16
35
12
5.2
B-M6F
22 20.5 20 40.5 10
16
24 22.5 22
49
11
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8
14
28
26
25
60
16
15
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
30
28
26
68
18
17
16
8.2 B-PT1/8
15
34
32
28
73
20
20
16
10 8.2 B-PT1/8
17
38
35
32
85
23
23
10
12 8.2 B-PT1/4
20
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
With plate cover or
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same
plane (*5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510 (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-77.
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-236
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NR/NRS
6- H
E
d2
L
L1
C
e0
4- D0
f0
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Model NRS-LB
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
kN
kN
25.9
34.5
38.2
51
49.5
67.2
75.3
98.8
103
133
148
204
212
278
264
342
376
470
59.8
79.7
86.1
115
109
148
163
214
220
284
309
425
431
566
531
687
737
920
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
25
23.5
17
40
69.58.5
3000
28
31
21
80
7119
3000
34
33
24.5
80
91412
3000
45
37.5
29
105
142017
3000
53
162320
3000
63
53.5
43
150
182622
3000
75
60
44
150
223226
3000
85
65
48
180
243528
3000
100
80
57
210
263932
3000
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.568
0.926
0.926
1.6
1.28
2.29
2.47
4.34
3.97
6.49
6.45
12.3
10.6
18.6
14.9
25.4
25.1
34.6
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.58
0.77
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.4
5.7
7.6
10.9
11.3
15
16.2
20.7
26.7
31.2
3.1
4.3
6.2
9.8
14.5
20.3
24.6
30.5
42.6
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-238.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-237
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Models NR/NRS
Model No.
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
1270
1570
2020
2620
1280
1580
2030
2630
1530
1890
2250
2610
1340
1760
2180
2600
40
15
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3000
120
30
3000
150
35
3000
150
40
3000
180
45
3000
210
40
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-238
506E
NR/NRS
LM Guide
A1-239
506E
HRW
LM Guide Wide Rail Model HRW
Endplate
90
End seal
Grease nipple
45
LM block
45
Ball
Retainer plate
45
Side seal
LM rail
Models HRW17 to 60
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-463
A1-467
A1-484
A1-240
506E
HRW
Structure and Features
A1-241
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out. (except models
HRW 12 and 14LR).
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM
Guide to be used in all orientations. In addition, the LM block can receive a well-balanced preload,
increasing the rigidity in four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. In a low
center of gravity structure with a large rail width and a low overall height, this model can be used in
places where space saving is required or high rigidity against a moment is required even in a single
axis configuration.
506E
Model HRW-CA
Specification TableA1-244
Model HRW-CR
Specification TableA1-246
A1-242
Specification TableA1-246
506E
HRW
LM Guide
A1-243
506E
6-S
( H through)
T1
T
K
H3
W3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
HRW 17CA
HRW 17CAM
17
60
50.8
53
26
3.3
HRW 21CA
HRW 21CAM
21
68
58.8
60
29
HRW 27CA
HRW 27CAM
27
80
72.8
70
HRW 35CA
HRW 35CAM
35
HRW 50CA
HRW 60CA
L1
T1
M4 33.6 5.5
14.5
PB107
2.5
4.4
M5
7.3
18
4.5
12
B-M6F
40
5.3
M6 51.8 9.5
10
24
12
B-M6F
60
6.8
M8 77.6
14
31
12
B-M6F
50
80
18
46.6
14
16
B-PT1/8
3.4
60
80
25
53.5
15
16
B-PT1/8
6.5
40
13
H3
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
HRW35 CA 2 UU C1 M +1000L P T M
Model
number
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77.
A1-244
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HRW
LM Guide
L1
C
d2
N
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
W1
0.05
Length
C0
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
Height Pitch
W2
W3
M1
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
33 13.5 18
40
4.57.55.3
1900
(800)
4.31
0.15
2.1
37 15.5 22
11
50
4.57.55.3
3000
6.18
(1000)
0.25
2.9
42
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
11.5
(1200)
20.4
0.5
4.3
69 25.5 40
19
80
7119
3000
27.2
45.9
0.529
2.89
0.529
2.89
1.49
1.4
9.9
90
36
60
24
80
91412
3000
50.2
81.5
1.25
6.74
1.25
6.74
3.46
14.6
120
40
80
31
105 1117.514
3000
63.8
102
1.76
12.3
1.76
12.3
5.76
5.7
27.8
19
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-248.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-245
506E
4-S
B
d
L1
C
d2
N
T
K
H3
M1
d1
W1
W2
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole Grease
nipple
HRW 12LRM
12
HRW 14LRM
14
30
37
40
45.5
HRW 17CR
HRW 17CRM
17
50
HRW 21CR
HRW 21CRM
21
HRW 27CR
HRW 27CRM
L1
H3
21
12
M33.5
27
10
2.8
2.2
28
15
M34
32.9
12
3.3
2.2
50.8
29
15
M45
33.6
14.5
PB107
2.5
54
58.8
31
19
M56
40
18
4.5
12
B-M6F
27
62
72.8
46
32
M66
51.8
10
24
12
B-M6F
HRW 35CR
HRW 35CRM
35
100 106.6
76
50
M88
77.6
14
31
12
B-M6F
HRW 50 CR
50
65
M1015 103.5
18
46.6
14
16
B-PT1/8
3.4
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
HRW27 CR 2 UU C1 M +820L P T M
Model
number
Contamination
Stainless LM rail length Symbol
Stainless steel
protection
steel
for LM rail LM rail
(in mm)
accessory
LM block
jointed use
symbol (*1)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
No. of LM blocks
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same rail Normal (No symbol)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Light preload (C1)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Medium preload (C0)
Type of
LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77.
A1-246
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HRW
W
B
4-S
H3
W3
W1
W2
LM Guide
W
B
6-S
L
L1
C
d2
T
K
M1
H3
d1
W3
W1
W2
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
W1
Height Pitch
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.05
W2
W3
M1
18
6.5
40
0.045
0.79
24
7.2
40
0.112
0.08
1.2
33
8.5
18
40
4.57.55.3
1900
(800)
4.31
0.12
2.1
37
8.5
22
11
50
4.57.55.3
3000
6.18
(1000)
0.19
2.9
42
10
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
11.5
(1200)
20.4
0.37
4.3
69 15.5 40
19
80
7119
3000
27.2
45.9
0.529
2.89
0.529
2.89
1.49
1.2
9.9
90
24
80
91412
3000
50.2
81.5
1.25
6.74
1.25
6.74
3.46
3.2
14.6
20
60
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-248.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-247
506E
F
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HRW
Model No.
Unit: mm
HRW 12
HRW 14
HRW 17
HRW 21
HRW 27
HRW 35
HRW 50
HRW 60
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
390
470
110
190
310
470
550
130
230
380
480
580
780
160
280
340
460
640
820
280
440
760
1000
1240
1560
280
440
760
1000
1240
1640
2040
570
885
1200
1620
2040
2460
40
15
1900
(800)
50
15
3000
(1000)
60
20
3000
(1200)
80
20
80
20
105
22.5
3000
3000
3000
Standard pitch F
G
40
15
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
390
470
550
670
40
15
Max length
(1000)
(1430)
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note3) The figures in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel made models.
Stopper
In miniature model HRW, the balls fall out if the LM block comes off the LM rail.
For this reason, they are delivered with a stopper fitted to prevent the LM block coming off the rail. If
you remove the stopper when using the product, take care to ensure that overrun does not occur.
Table2 Model HRW stopper (C type) specification table
Unit: mm
Model No.
12
22
10.5
14
29
7.8
11.2
A1-248
506E
HRW
LM Guide
A1-249
506E
RSR
LM Guide Miniature Types Model RSR
Endplate
LM block
End seal
LM rail
Ball
Grease nipple
Cross section
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-83
A1-465
A1-467
A1-468
A1-484
A1-250
506E
RSR
Structure and Features
[Ultra Compact]
The absence of cage displacement, a problem that cross-roller guides and types of ball slides with
finite stroke tend to cause, make these models highly reliable LM systems.
[Capable of Receiving Loads in All Directions]
These models are capable of receiving loads in all directions, and a single-rail guide can adequately
operate under a small moment load. Model RSR-W, in particular, has a greater number of effective
balls and a broader LM rail to increase its rigidity against a moment. Thus, it achieves a more compact structure and more durable straight motion than a pair of linear bushes in parallel use.
[Stainless Steel Type also Available]
A special type where LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A1-251
LM Guide
With models RSR and RSR-W, balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and
an LM block, and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Since balls circulate in a compact structure, the LM Block is able to provide infinite straight motion
and thus infinite stroke.
The LM block is designed to have a shape with high rigidity in a limited space, and in combination
with large-diameter balls, demonstrates high rigidity in all directions.
506E
Models RSR-M/RSR-KM/RSR-VM
Specification TableA1-258
Models RSR-WM/WV/WVM
Specification TableA1-260
Model RSR-WTM
Has position of LM block mounting holes
changed compared with RSR-WM.
A1-252
Specification TableA1-260
506E
RSR
Model RSR-N
Specification TableA1-256
LM Guide
Model RSR-TN
Specification TableA1-256
Models RSR-WN/WTN
Specification TableA1-260
A1-253
506E
MA24.5Nm
MA0.42Nm
Mc59.5Nm
10
C =4020N
40 Radial load C0=6080N
Radial load
C = 746N
C0=1098N
25
14
LM10
24
47.5
72.5
Linear Bushing Model LM10
Model RSR12WV
Fig.1
Radial load
C =2450N
C0=3920N
C =380N
C0=412N
17
12
30
30
Model RSR9WV
Fig.2
A1-254
Model VRU1035
506E
RSR
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface
A1-255
LM Guide
Model RSR uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails of RSR are used in parallel, any error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively
affect the smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see [Flatness
of the Mounting Surface] on A1-468.
When using this model in locations where it is difficult to obtain satisfactory accuracy of the mounting surface, we recommend using types RSRA (semi standard) whose ball raceways have circular-arc grooves. (avoid using these types in a single-rail configuration).
For specific accuracy of the mounting surface for types RSRA, [Flatness of the Mounting Surface]
is on A1-468.
506E
2-
M1.6 through
K
M1
H3
W2 W1
Model RSR3M
L
L1
2-
M1.6 through
K
M1
H3
W2
W1
Model RSR3N
Outer dimensions
Model No.
RSR 5M
RSR 5N
RSR 5TN
Greasing
hole
RSR 3M
RSR 3N
LM block dimensions
L1
Grease
nipple
12
16
3.5
5.5
M1.61.3 6.7
M21.3 10.7
12
16.9
20.1
20.1
M21.5
M2.61.8
M21.5
4.5
0.8
0.8
1.5
8.8
12
12
H3
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Models RSR3M and 3N do not have an oil hole. When lubricating them, apply a lubricant directly to the LM rail raceways.
No contamination protection seal for RSR3M/3N.
To secure the LM rail of models RSR5M and 5N, use cross-recessed head screws for precision equipment (No. 0 pan
head screw, class 1) M2.
Model number coding
2 RSR5 M UU C1 +130L P M -
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-256
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR
W
2-S
d2
N
h
K
H3
L1
M1
LM Guide
d1
W2 W1
Models RSR5M/5TN
L
2-S
W
d
d2
K
H3
L1
M1
d1
W2 W1
Model RSR5N
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
W1
Height Pitch
W2
M1
C0
Max
kN
kN
d1d2h
0
3
0.02
2.5
2.6
10
0
0.02
3.5
15
2.43.51
Length
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
220
0.45 0.0011
0.73 0.0016
0.055
480
1.53
2.49
2.49
0.14
0.003
0.004
0.004
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-264.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Recommended
tightening torque (N-m)
M1.6
0.09
M2
0.19
OptionsA1-473
A1-257
506E
W
B
d
N
L
L1
C
4-S
d2
K
H3
M1
d1
W2 W1
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Grease
nipple
L1
H3
RSR 7M
RSR 7N
17
23.4
33
12
8
13
M22.5
13.4
23
6.5
1.7
1.2
1.5
RSR 9KM
RSR 9N
10
20
30.8
40.8
15
10
16
M33
19.8
29.8
7.8
2.4
1.5
2.2
RSR 12VM
RSR 12N
13
27
35
47.7
20
15
20
M33.5
20.6
33.3
10
RSR 15VM
RSR 15N
16
32
42.9
60.7
25
20
25
M34
25.7
43.5
12
3.5
3.6
3.7
PB107
RSR 20VM
RSR 20N
25
46
66.5
86.3
38
38
M46
45.2
5.7 17.5
65
6.4
A-M6F
7.5
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and
environment.
Model number coding
2 RSR15V M UU C1 +230L P M -
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Stainless
Contamination
LM rail length
Symbol for
steel
protection
(in mm)
No. of rails used
LM rail
accessory
on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-258
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR
W
B
4-S
LM Guide
L
L1
C
d2
T
K
H3
W2
M1
h
d1
W1
MB
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Unit: mm
C0
kN
kN
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
0
7
0.02
4.7
15
2.44.22.3
480
20.8
49.9
2.93
8.68
20.8
49.9
5
9.12
0.013
0.018
0.23
5.5
5.5
20
3.563.3
1240
43.3
97
7.34
18.4
43.3
97
10.4
18.4
0.018
0.027
0.32
12
0
7.5
0.025
7.5
25
3.564.5
1430
74.9
163
10.1
25.5
67.7
145
19.2
31.8
0.037
0.055
0.58
15
0
8.5
0.025
9.5
40
3.564.5
1600
149
330
21.1
55.6
135
293
38.8
63
0.069
0.093
0.925
20
0
0.03
15
60
69.58.5
1800
435
897
66.7
151
389
795
96.6
157
0.245
0.337
1.95
0
0.02
13
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-264.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-259
506E
d2
K
H3
M
W2
L
L1
C
2-S
W
d
N
M1
d1
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
RSR 3WM
RSR 3WN
RSR 5WM
RSR 5WTM
RSR 5WN
RSR 5WTN
RSR 7WM
RSR 7WTM
RSR 7WN
RSR 7WTN
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
4.5
12
6.5
17
25
14.9
19.9
22.1
22.1
28.1
28.1
31
31
40.9
40.9
13
13
19
19
C
4.5
8
6.5
11
12
8
18
17
L1
8.5
13.3
M32.3 13.7
M2.51.5 13.7
M32.3 19.7
M2.51.5 19.7
M43.5 20.4
M33
20.4
M43.5 30.3
M33
30.3
M21.7
Grease
nipple
H3
3.5
0.8
0.8
1.1
0.8
1.5
1.6
1.2
Note) The LM block, rail, and ball material are composed of stainless steel and are corrosion resistant to general environments.
To secure the LM rail of models RSR3WM and 3WN, use cross-recessed head screws for precision equipment (No. 0
pan head screw, class 1) M2.
Model number coding
2 RSR7WM UU C1 +130L P M
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless steel
LM rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83.
A1-260
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR
W
B
2-S
d2
N
M1
LM Guide
d1
W1
W2
K
H3
L
L1
Models RSR5WTM/WTN
W
B
4-S
L
L1
C
d2
N
h
K
H3
M
W2
M1
d1
W1
F
Models RSR7WTM/WTN
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
0.25
0.39
0.51
0.51
0.75
0.75
1.37
1.37
2.04
2.04
0.47
0.75
0.96
0.96
1.4
1.4
2.16
2.16
3.21
3.21
W1
W2
W3
M1
d1d2h
Max
0
6
0.02
2.6
15
2.441.5
480
10
0
3.5
0.025
20
35.53
480
14
0
0.05
5.2
30
3.563.2
480
5.5
1
block
0.668
1.57
1.97
1.97
4.06
4.06
7.02
7.02
14.7
14.7
Double
blocks
4.44
9.06
13.1
13.1
23.5
23.5
40.7
40.7
77.6
77.6
MB
1
block
0.668
1.57
1.97
1.97
4.06
4.06
7.02
7.02
14.7
14.7
Double
blocks
4.44
9.06
13.1
13.1
23.5
23.5
40.7
40.7
77.6
77.6
MC
1
block
1.48
2.36
4.89
4.89
7.13
7.13
15.4
15.4
22.9
22.9
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.002
0.12
0.003
0.007
0.007
0.28
0.01
0.01
0.021
0.021
0.51
0.026
0.026
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-264.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-261
506E
W
B
d
L
L1
C
4-S
d2
N
T
K
H3
W2
h
M1
d1
W1
F
Models RSR9, 12WV/WVM/WN
Outer dimensions
Model No.
RSR 14WVM
RSR 15WV
RSR 15WVM
RSR 15WN
Greasing
hole
RSR 9WV
RSR 9WVM
RSR 9WN
RSR 12WV
RSR 12WVM
RSR 12WN
LM block dimensions
39
39
50.7
44.5
44.5
59.5
21
21
23
12
12
24
15
15
28
M2.63
M2.63
M33
12
30
14
40
15
50
50
60
55.5
55.5
74.5
16
28
35
18
45
20
20
35
M33.5
L1
27
27
38.7
30.9
30.9 4.5
45.9
M44.5
34.3
M44.5
38.9
38.9 5.6
57.9
Grease
nipple
H3
7.8
1.6
4.2
10
11.5
PB107
3.5
12
3.5
PB107
Note) The LM block, rail, and ball material are composed of stainless steel and are corrosion resistant to general
environments.
Model number coding
2 RSR12WV M UU C1 +310L H M
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless steel
LM rail
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Precision grade (P)
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83.
A1-262
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR
W
B
4-S
K
H3
L
L1
C
N
M1
h
d1
W1
LM Guide
W2
L
L1
C
d2
N
M
Model RSR14WVM
W
B
4-S
d2
K
H3
W2
N
M1
h
d1
W3
W1
F
Models RSR15WV/WVM/WN
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Height Pitch
Width
W1
W2
W3
M1
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
2.45
3.564.5 1430 2.45
3.52
4.02
4.584.5 1600 4.02
5.96
3.92
3.92
5.37
6.08
6.08
9.21
1
block
16
16
31
24.5
24.5
53.9
MC
Double
blocks
92.9
92.9
161
138
138
274
1
block
16
16
31
21.7
21.7
47.3
Double
blocks
92.9
92.9
161
123
123
242
1
block
36
36
49.4
59.5
59.5
90.1
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.035
0.035 1.08
0.051
0.075
0.075 1.5
0.101
18
0
0.05
7.5
30
24
0
0.05
8.5
40
30
0
0.05
10
40
4.57.55.3
233
38.2
208
110 0.096
40
278
278
555
44.4
44.4
97.3
248
248
490
168
168
255
42
0
0.05
23
9.5
0.17
0.17
0.21
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-264.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-263
506E
F
L0
Table2 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR/RSR-W
Unit: mm
Model No. RSR 3 RSR 5 RSR 7 RSR 9 RSR 12 RSR 15 RSR 20 RSR 3W RSR 5W RSR 7W RSR 9W RSR 12W RSR 14W RSR 15W
30
40
40
55
70
70
50
50
70
220
40
50
110
110
40
55
55
75
95
110
80
110
80
280
55
70
150
150
60
70
70
95
120
150
150
110
110
340
70
90
190
190
80
100
85
115
145
190
190
140
140
460
110
230
230
100
130
100
135
170
170
170
230
640
130
270
230
270
160
130
155
195
200
200
270
880
150
310
270
310
LM rail
175
220
170
260
260
310 1000
310
430
430
standard
length
195
245
290
290
350
390
550
550
(LO)
275
270
320
390
670
670
470
375
320
430
790
790
550
370
470
470
550
570
670
870
15
15
20
25
40
60
15
20
30
30
40
40
40
Standard pitch F 10
5
5
5
7.5
10
15
20
5
5
10
10
15
15
15
G
480
480 1240 1430 1600 1800 480
480
480 1430 1600 1800 1800
Max length 220
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) The LM rail mounting hole of model RSR3 is an M1.6 through hole.
Stopper
In model RSR/RSR-W, the balls fall out if the LM block comes off the LM rail.
For this reason, they are delivered with a stopper fitted to prevent the LM block coming off the rail. If
you remove the stopper when using the product, take care to ensure that overrun does not occur.
Table3 Model RSR/RSR-W stopper (C type)
specification table
Unit: mm
Model No.
7
9
12
15
20
7W
9W
12W
14W
15W
A
11
13
16
19
25
18
23
29
33.8
46
B
5
6
7
7
7
6
7
7
7
7
C
7.7
9.5
12.5
14.5
20.0
8.2
11.5
13.5
13
14.5
A1-264
506E
RSR
LM Guide
A1-265
506E
RSR-Z
LM Guide Miniature Type (Low Cost Type) Model RSR-Z
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
(Optional)
Side seal
Ball
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-83
A1-465
A1-467
A1-468
A1-484
A1-266
506E
RSR-Z
Structure and Features
[Lightweight]
Since part of the LM block body uses a resin material, the block mass is reduced by up to 28% from
the conventional type model RSR-V. This makes RSR-Z a low-inertia type.
[Smooth Motion]
The unique structure of the endplate allows the balls to circulate smoothly and infinitely.
[Low Noise]
Since the unloaded ball path is made of resin,
there is no metal to metal contact and low noise
is achieved.
RSR12V
RSR12Z
20
40
60
80
Speed (m/min)
100
A1-267
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Balls of model RSR-Z circulate in a compact structure and perform infinite straight motion with no
limit in stroke.
Also, it has the same dimensions as models RSR/RSR-W, but achieves a lighter weight and a lower
price.
506E
Model RSR-ZM
Specification TableA1-270
Model RSR-WZM
It has a longer overall LM block length (L), a
broader width (W) and greater rated load and
permissible moment than RSR-Z.
A1-268
Specification TableA1-272
506E
RSR-Z
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface
Model RSR-Z uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails are used in parallel,
any error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively affect
the smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see [Flatness of the
Mounting Surface] on A1-468.
LM Guide
A1-269
506E
Model RSR-ZM
W
d
L1
C
d2
N
T
K
H3
W2
4-S
M1
d1
W1
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
RSR 7ZM
17
23.4
12
M22.5
RSR 9ZM
10
20
30.8
15
10
RSR 12ZM
13
27
35
20
RSR 15ZM
16
32
43
25
L1
Grease
nipple
H3
13.2 3.4
6.5
1.6
1.5
1.5
M32.7
19.4 4.6
7.8
2.4
1.6
2.2
15
M33.2
2.4
20
M33.5
3.6
PB107
3.4
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and
environment.
Model number coding
2 RSR15Z M UU C1 +230L P M -
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
Stainless
LM rail length
Symbol for
protection
steel
(in mm)
No. of rails used
accessory
LM rail
on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Normal (No symbol)
Precision grade (P)
Light preload (C1)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-270
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR-Z
LM Guide
4-S
L1
C
d2
H3
W2
M1
d1
W1
Model RSR15ZM
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
7
9
12
15
W2
0
5
0.02
0
5.5
0.02
0
7.5
0.025
0
8.5
0.025
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
M1
d1d2h
Max
4.7
15
2.44.22.3
480
20.7
2.93
20.7
0.008
0.23
5.5
20
3.563.3
1240
43
7.34
43
10.4
0.014
0.32
7.5
25
3.564.5
1430
74.9
10.1
67.7
19.2
0.028
0.58
9.5
40
3.564.5
1600
149
21.1
135
38.8
0.05
0.925
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-274.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-271
506E
Model RSR-WZM
L
L1
4-S
B
d
d2
N
M
K
H3
W2
M1
h
d1
W1
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Model No.
RSR 7WZM
25
31.5
19
10
M32.5
RSR 9WZM
12
30
39
21
12
M32.8
RSR 12WZM
14
40
44.5
28
15
RSR 15WZM
16
60
55.5
45
20
L1
Grease
nipple
1.8
1.6
3.9
9.1
2.3
1.6
2.9
M33.6
29.3 4.5
10.6
3.4
M44.5
39.3 5.4
12.6
3.6
PB107
3.4
19.7 3.4
27
H3
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and
environment.
Model number coding
2 RSR12WZ M SS C1 +390L H M
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Stainless steel
LM rail
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)
High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83.
A1-272
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR-Z
4-S
L
L1
LM Guide
d2
H3
M1
h
d1
W3
W1
W2
Model RSR15WZM
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
14
18
24
42
0
0.05
0
0.05
0
0.05
0
0.05
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
W2
W3
M1
d1d2h
Max
5.5
5.2
30
3.563.2
480
7.5
30
8.5
40
23
9.5
40
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
92.9
16
92.9
36
0.03
1.08
138
21.7
123
59.5
0.06
1.5
278
44.4
248
168 0.135
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-274.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-273
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR-Z/WZ
Model No.
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
RSR 7Z
40
55
70
85
100
130
RSR 9Z
55
75
95
115
135
155
175
195
275
375
RSR 12Z
70
95
120
145
170
195
220
245
270
320
370
470
570
15
5
480
20
7.5
1240
25
10
1430
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
RSR 15Z
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
350
390
430
470
550
670
870
40
15
1600
Unit: mm
30
10
480
30
10
1430
40
15
1600
RSR 15WZ
110
150
190
230
270
310
430
550
670
790
40
15
1800
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) The LM rails of these models are all made of stainless steel.
Stopper
In models RSR-Z/RSR-WZ, the balls fall out if the LM block comes off the LM rail.
For this reason, they are delivered with a stopper fitted to prevent the LM block coming off the rail. If
you remove the stopper when using the product, take care to ensure that overrun does not occur.
Table2 Model RSR-Z/RSR-WZ stopper (C type) specification table
Unit: mm
Model No.
7
9
12
15
7W
9W
12W
15W
A
11
13
16
19
18
23
29
46
B
5
6
7
7
6
7
7
7
C
7.7
9.5
12.5
14.5
8.2
11.5
13.5
14.5
A1-274
506E
RSR-Z
LM Guide
A1-275
506E
HR
LM Guide Separate Type (4-way Equal Load) Model HR
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
LM block
45
Ball
Retainer plate
45
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
A1-279
Accuracy Standards
A1-81
A1-464
A1-467
A1-484
A1-276
506E
HR
Structure and Features
[Easy Installation]
Model HR is easier to adjust a clearance and achieve more accuracy than cross-roller guides.
[Self-adjustment Capability]
Even if the parallelism or the level between the two rails is poorly established, the self-adjustment
capability through front-to-front configuration of THKs unique circular-arc grooves (DF set) enables
a mounting error to be absorbed and smooth straight motion to be achieved even under a preload.
[4-way Equal Load]
When the two rails are mounted in parallel, each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so
that the rated loads applied to the LM block are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial
and lateral directions), enabling the LM Guide to be used in various orientations and in applications.
[Sectional Dimensions Approximate to Cross-roller Guides]
Since model HR utilizes endcaps for recirculation, cage/retainer creep cannot occur as with crossroller guides. In addition, the sectional shape of model HR is approximate to that of cross-roller
guides, therefore, its components are dimensionally interchangeable with that of cross-roller guides.
[Stainless Steel Type also Available]
A special type whose LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A1-277
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off.
Because of the angular contact structure where two rows of balls rolling on the LM rail each contact
the raceway at 45, the same load can be applied in all directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral
directions) if a set of LM rails and LM block is mounted on the same plane (i.e., when two LM rails
are combined with an LM block on the same plane). Furthermore, since the sectional height is low, a
compact and stable linear guide mechanism is achieved.
This structure makes clearance adjustment relatively easy, and is highly capable of absorbing a
mounting error.
506E
Specification TableA1-282
A1-278
Specification TableA1-282
506E
HR
Example of Clearance Adjustment
Design the clearance adjustment bolt so that it presses the center of the side face of the LM block.
LM Guide
A1-279
506E
30
8.5
15
15
18
18
VR6
HR1530
8
HR918
VR3
23
22
42
11
40
20
20
11
HR1123
VR4
VR9
HR2042
58
55
28
25
VR12
HR2555
71
75
36
35
VR15
HR3575
83
85
40
40
HR4085
VR18
Fig.1
A1-280
506E
HR
LM Guide
A1-281
506E
B1
d
2-S
C
W0
L
L1
d2
W
h
TK
M1
W4
d1
W1
Height Width
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Length
W0
B1
h2
L1
D1
HR 918
HR 918M
8.5
11.4
18
45
5.5
15
M3
25
7.5
1.5
HR 1123
HR 1123M
11
13.7
23
52
15
2.55
M3
30
9.5
10
HR 1530
HR 1530M
15
19.2
30
69
10
20
3.3
M4
3.5
40
13
14
6.5
HR 2042
HR 2042M
20
26.3
42
91.6
13
35
5.3
M6
5.5
56.6
17.5
19
10
HR 2042T
HR 2042TM
20
26.3
42
110.7
13
50
5.3
M6
5.5
75.7
17.5
19
10
HR 2555
HR 2555M
25
33.3
55
121
16
45
6.8
M8
80
22.5
24
11
HR 2555T
HR 2555TM
25
33.3
55
146.4
16
72
6.8
M8
105.4 22.5
24
11
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
2 HR2555 UU M +1000L P T M
Symbol for Stainless steel
LM rail length
Model number Contamination
LM rail
protection
(in mm)
LM rail
jointed use
accessory
Stainless
steel
symbol
(*1)
No. of LM blocks
Accuracy symbol (*2)
LM block
used on the same rail
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
A1-282
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HR
B1
d
2-S
( H through)
LM Guide
L
L1
W0
d2
h
TK
M1
W4
D1
d1
W1
A
h2
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
kN
MB
1 Double 1 Double
block blocks block blocks
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
W4
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
6.7
3.5
8.7
6.5
25
35.53
300
1.57
0.01
0.3
9.5
11.6
40
3.564.5
500
2.35
0.03
0.5
10.7
13.5
11
60
3.564.5
1600
4.31
0.08
15.6
19.5
14.5
60
69.58.5
2200
9.9
0.13
1.8
15.6
19.5
14.5
60
69.58.5
2200
13.6
22.9
2.99
0.26
1.8
22
10
27
18
80
91412
2600
18.6
0.43
3.2
22
10
27
18
80
91412
3000
25.1
40.8
0.5
3.2
0.53
1.33
2.99
6.95
0.53
1.33
6.95
Note) A moment in the direction MC can be received if two rails are used in parallel. However, since it depends on the distance between the two rails, the moment in the direction MC is omitted here.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-286.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: Static permissible moment value with one LM block mounted on two LM rails used
on the same plane
Double blocks: Static permissible moment value with 2 blocks in close contact with each
other on 2 LM blocks used on the same plane
OptionsA1-473
A1-283
506E
W0
W
TK
M
W4
W1
A
Outer dimensions
Model No.
Height Width
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Length
W0
B1
h2
HR 3065
HR 3065T
30
40.3
65
145
173.5
19
50
80
8.6
M10
HR 3575
HR 3575T
35
44.9
75
154.8
21.5
182.5
60
92.5
10.5
M12
HR 4085
HR 4085T
40
50.4
85
177.8
215.9
24
70
110
12.5
HR 50105
HR 50105T
50
63.4
105
227
274.5
30
85
130
HR 60125
60
74.4
125
329
35
160
L1
D1
90
27.5
118.5
29
14
12
103.8
131.5
32
34
18
M14
13
120.8
158.9
36
38
20
14.5
M16
15.5
150
197.5
45
48
23
18
M20
18
236
55
58
26
2 HR4085T UU +1500L P T
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
Symbol for LM rail
(in mm)
jointed use
Accuracy symbol (*2)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
A1-284
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HR
B1
LM Guide
2-S
( H through)
L
L1
d2
h
M1
D1
d1
h2
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
Length
C0
Mass
MB
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double
block blocks block blocks
kg
kg/m
W1
W4
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
25
12
31.5
22.5
80
91412
3000
24.2
32.1
38.6
51.6
1.11
1.89
6.72
10.4
1.11
1.89
6.72
10.4
0.7
0.9
4.6
30.5
14.5
37
26
105
1117.514
3000
30
40.2
47.8
63.6
1.53
2.59
8.84
13.5
1.53
2.59
8.84
13.5
1.05
1.4
6.4
35
16
42.5
29
120
142017
3000
44.1
59.5
68.6
91.7
2.64
4.48
14.4
23
2.64
4.48
14.4
23
1.53
1.7
42
20
51.5
37
150
182622
3000
70.7
96
107
143
5.15
8.74
28.9
45.7
5.15
8.74
28.9
45.7
3.06
3.5
12.1
51
25
65
45
180
223225
3000
141
206
14.3
79.6
14.3
79.6
7.5
19.3
Note) A moment in the direction MC can be received if two rails are used in parallel. However, since it depends on the distance between the two rails, the moment in the direction MC is omitted here.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-286.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: Static permissible moment value with one LM block mounted on two LM rails used
on the same plane
Double blocks: Static permissible moment value with 2 blocks in close contact with each
other on 2 LM blocks used on the same plane
OptionsA1-473
A1-285
506E
F
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HR
Model No.
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
HR 918 HR 1123 HR 1530 HR 2042 HR 2555 HR 3065 HR 3575 HR 4085 HR 50105 HR 60125
70
120
220
295
110
230
310
390
160
280
340
460
580
220
280
340
460
640
280
440
600
760
1000
1240
280
440
600
760
1000
1240
570
885
1200
1620
2040
2460
780
1020
1260
1500
1980
2580
1270
1570
2020
2620
1530
1890
2250
2610
25
10
300
40
15
500
60
20
1600
60
20
2200
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3000
120
30
3000
150
35
3000
180
45
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-286
506E
HR
Accessories
D1
d1
Fig.2
Fig.3
H
Fig.4
Model No.
B3
B5
B6
B8
B 10
B 12
B 14
B 16
M3
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
2.4
4.1
4.9
6.6
8.3
10.1
11.8
13.8
5.5
8.5
10
13
16
18
21
24
3
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
17
22
28
34
39
45
55
66
5
7
9
12
15
18
21
24
Unit: mm
Supported
model
number
HR 1530
HR 2042
HR 2555
HR 3065
HR 3575
HR 4085
HR 50105
HR 60125
A1-287
LM Guide
506E
Greasing Hole
[Lubrication for Model HR]
The LM block has a greasing hole in the center
of its top face. To provide lubrication through this
hole, the table must be machined to also have
a greasing hole as shown in Fig.5 and attach a
grease nipple or the like. When using oil lubrication, it is necessary to identify the lubrication route.
Contact THK for details.
Table
A1-288
506E
HR
LM Guide
A1-289
506E
GSR
LM Guide Separate Type (Radial) Model GSR
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Ball
Retainer plate
Side seal
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
A1-293
Accuracy Standards
A1-82
A1-464
A1-467
A1-484
A1-290
506E
GSR
Structure and Features
[Interchangeability]
Both the LM block and LM rail are interchangeable and can be stored separately. Therefore, it is
possible to store a long-size LM rail and cut it to a desired length before using it.
[Compact]
Since model GSR has a low center of gravity structure with a low overall height, the machine can be
downsized.
[Capable of Receiving a Load in any Direction]
The ball contact angle is designed so that this model can receive a load in any direction. As a result,
it can be used in places where a reverse radial load, lateral load or a moment in any direction is applied.
A1-291
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off.
As the top face of the LM block is inclined, a clearance is eliminated and an appropriate preload is
applied simply by securing the LM block with mounting bolts.
Model GSR has a special contact structure using circular-arc grooves. This increases self-adjusting
capability and makes GSR an optimal model for places associated with difficulty establishing high
accuracy and for general industrial machinery.
506E
Model GSR-T
Specification TableA1-294
Model GSR-V
A space-saving type that has the same crosssectional shape as GSR-T, but has a shorter
overall LM block length (L).
A1-292
Specification TableA1-294
506E
GSR
Example of Clearance Adjustment
By providing a shoulder maybe on the side face of each LM block and pressing either LM block with
a bolt, a preload is applied and the rigidity is increased.
Preload adjustment bolt
LM Guide
A1-293
506E
W
B
N1
d2
K1
M
M1
H3
W4
T
K
d1
W1
W2
Model GSR15T/V
Outer dimensions
Model No.
L
L1
B1
B1
GSR 15V
GSR 15T
20
32
47.1
59.8
15
26
M47
GSR 20V
GSR 20T
24
43
58.1
74
20
30
M58
GSR 25V
GSR 25T
30
50
69
88
GSR 30T
33
57
103
GSR 35T
38
68
117
L1
K1
N1
H3
27.5
8.25 16.8 12
40.2
4.5
5.5 PB107
3.2
34.3
9.7 20.6 13.6
50.2
12
B-M6F
3.4
23
41.2
12
B-M6F
4.6
26
12
B-M6F
4.5
32
12
B-M6F
5.5
GSR25 T 2 UU +1060L H T K
Model
number
Contamination
Type of
LM block protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
Symbol
tapped-hole LM rail type
for LM rail
jointed use
A1-294
https://tech.thk.com
506E
GSR
4-S
E
L
L1
C
B1
LM Guide
d2
T
K
K1
M
h
M1
H3
W4
d1
W1
W2
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
MB
Double
Double
1 block
blocks
blocks
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
d1d2h
Max
kN
7.5 11.5
60
4.57.55.3
2000
4.31
5.69
0.08
0.13
1.2
10
60
69.58.5
3000
7.01
9.22
0.17
0.25
1.8
7119
3000
0.29
0.5
2.6
W1
W2
W4
M1
15
25
20
33
23
38 11.5 16.5 60
13
1 block
28 44.5 14
19
80
91412
3000
18.8
25.9 0.282
1.54
0.243
1.32
0.6
3.6
34
22
80
1117.514
3000
25.1
33.8 0.421
2.28
0.362
1.96
54
17
Note) A moment in the direction MC can be received if two rails are used in parallel. However, since it depends on the distance between the two rails, the moment in the direction MC is omitted here.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-296.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Clients who require wall-mounted installations or oil lubrication should contact THK.
Model number coding
LM block
LM rail
GSR25 T UU
Model
number
GSR25 -1060L H K
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Type of LM block
Model
number
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
tapped-hole
LM rail type
OptionsA1-473
A1-295
506E
G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model GSR
Unit: mm
Model No.
GSR 15
GSR 20
GSR 25
GSR 30
GSR 35
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
460
820
1060
1600
460
820
1060
1600
460
820
1060
1600
1240
1720
2200
3000
1240
1720
2200
3000
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
60
20
2000
60
20
3000
60
20
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
Note) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
M1
B2
Tapered washer
S
W1
Fig.2
A1-296
Model No.
W1
B2
M1
GSR 15
15
7.5
11.5
M47
GSR 20
20
10
13
M58
GSR 25
23
11.5
16.5
M610
GSR 30
28
14
19
M812
GSR 35
34
17
22
M1014
506E
GSR
LM Guide
A1-297
506E
GSR-R
LM Guide Separate Type (Radial) Model GSR-R
Rail with rack
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Accuracy Standards
A1-82
A1-464
A1-467
A1-484
A1-298
506E
GSR-R
Structure and Features
A1-299
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off.
As the top face of the LM block is inclined, a clearance is eliminated and an appropriate preload is
applied simply by securing the LM block with mounting bolts.
Model GSR-R is based on model GSR, but has rack teeth on the LM rail. This facilitates the design
and assembly of drive mechanisms.
506E
A1-300
Specification TableA1-309
506E
GSR-R
LM Guide
A1-301
506E
Model GSR-R
P
Rh
4-S
W
B
L
L1
B1
d2
T
KM
h
M1
M1 M2
W4
W1
W0
H3
d1
W2
F
Model GSR-T-R
Rack
Model No.
Outer dimensions
Reference
Pitch
pitch Module line Height Width
dimension
height
P
Rh
LM block dimensions
Length
Grease
nipple
W0
B1
L1
H3
GSR 25V-R
GSR 25T-R
1.91
43
30
50 59.91
69
88
23
41.2
M610
12.7 25.4
40
60.2
12 B-M6F 4.6
GSR 30T-R
2.55
48
33
57 67.05 103
26
12 B-M6F 4.5
GSR 35T-R
10
3.18
57
38
68 80.18 117
32
12 B-M6F 5.5
Note) A special type with a module pitch is also available. Contact THK for details.
For checking the pinion strength, see A1-306.
Model number coding
Single-rail LM Guide
GSR25T 2 UU +5000L H R T
Contamination LM rail length
Symbol for LM rail jointed use
protection
(in mm)
accessory
Symbol for rail with rack type
symbol (*1)
R: Symbol for rail with rack type
No. of LM blocks
Accuracy symbol (*2)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Model number
A1-302
https://tech.thk.com
506E
GSR-R
P
Rh
LM Guide
2-S
W
B
E
B1
d2
T
KM
L
L1
h
M1
M1 M2
W4
W1
W0
d1
H3
W2
F
Model GSR25V-R
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
C0
kN
kN
Mass
MB
1 Double 1 Double
block blocks block blocks
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
W2
W4
M1
M2
d1d2h
44.91
15
11.5
16.5
60
11.5
7119
0.29
0.5
4.7
50.55 16.5
14
19
80
12
91412
0.6
5.9
60.18
17
22
80
14.5
8.1
20
Note) A moment in the direction MC can be received if two rails are used in parallel. However, since it depends on the distance between the two rails, the moment in the direction MC is omitted here.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-304.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Clients who require wall-mounted installations or oil lubrication should contact THK.
Model number coding
LM block
GSR25T UU
Model
number
GSR25-2004L H R
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
OptionsA1-473
A1-303
506E
F
L0
Model No.
GSR 25-R
Unit: mm
GSR 30-R
GSR 35-R
LM rail
Standard length
(LO)
1500
2004
1504
2000
1500
2000
Standard pitch
F
60
60
80
80
80
80
30
42
32
40
30
40
A1-304
506E
GSR-R
Rack and Pinion
Rack-aligning jig
LM Guide
Scroll
Chuck
Fig.2
A1-305
506E
[Checking Strength]
The strength of the assembled rack and pinion must be checked in advance.
(1) Calculate the maximum thrust acting on the pinion.
(2) Divide the permissible power transmission capacity of the pinion to be used (Table1) by an overload factor (Table2).
(3) By comparing the thrust acting on the pinion obtained in step 1 with the pinion power transmission capacity obtained in step 2, make sure the applied thrust does not exceed the permissible
power transmission capacity.
[Example of calculation]
Model GSR-R is used in a horizontal conveyance system receiving a medium impact (assuming external load to be zero).
Conditions
Model No.
Permissible
Power transmission Capacity
GP 6-20A
2.33
GP 6-20C
2.05
GP 6-25A
2.73
GP 6-25C
2.23
Consideration
GP 8-20A
3.58
GP 8-20C
3.15
GP 8-25A
4.19
GP 8-25C
3.42
GP6-20A
m=100kg
v=1 m/s
T1 =0.1 s
v
Fmax m 1.00kN
T1
Pmax
Permissible power
transmission capacity
(see Table 1)
Overload factor
(see Table 2)
GSR 25-R
GSR 30-R
GP10-20A
5.19
GP10-20C
4.57
GP10-25A
6.06
GP10-25C
4.96
GSR 35-R
2.33
1.25
1.86kN
Supported
model
Uniform
load
Medium
impact
Large
impact
1.0
1.25
1.75
Speed (mm/sec)
T1
T1
Time (sec)
Fig.3
A1-306
506E
GSR-R
[Example of Assembling Model GSR-R with the Table]
Clearance adjustment bolt
(Pinion)
Pulley
LM block
LM Guide
Motor
Belt
Clearance adjustment bolt
(Pinion, LM Guide)
Pulley
LM block
Pinion
A1-307
506E
F
E
3-G
J
K
A PCDB
H
DH7 C
Keyway
Unit: mm
Number
Model No. Pitch of
teeth
GP6-20A
20
6
GP6-25A
25
GP8-20A
20
8
GP8-25A
25
GP10-20A
20
10
GP10-25A
25
Tip circle
diameter
A
42.9
51.9
57.1
69.1
70.4
86.4
Meshing
PCD
B
39
48
52
64
64
80
Boss
Hole Tooth Overall
Keyway
diameter diameter width length G H
JK
C
D
E
F
30
18
16.5 24.5 M3 4 62.8
35
18
40
20
M3
19
26
5 83.3
40
20
M4
45
25
83.3
22
30
M4 5
60
25
103.3
Supported
model
numbers
GSR 25-R
GSR 30-R
GSR 35-R
Note1) When placing an order, specify the model number from the table.
Note2) Non-standard pinions with different numbers of teeth are also available upon request. Contact THK for details.
A1-308
506E
GSR-R
[Pinion for rack - type C]
F
E
DH7 C
PCDB
Model No.
GP 6-20C
GP 6-25C
GP 8-20C
GP 8-25C
GP10-20C
GP10-25C
20
25
20
25
20
25
6
8
10
Tip circle
diameter
A
42.9
51.9
57.1
69.1
70.4
86.4
Meshing
PCD
B
39
48
52
64
64
80
Boss
Hole
Tooth Overall
diameter diameter width length
C
D
E
F
30
12
16.5
24.5
35
15
40
18
19
26
40
18
45
18
22
30
60
18
Supported
model
numbers
GSR 25-R
GSR 30-R
GSR 35-R
Note1) When placing an order, specify the model number from the table.
Note2) Non-standard pinions with different numbers of teeth are also available upon request. Contact THK for details.
Rh
B
2
Rh
Unit: mm
Model GSR
Model No.
GSR 25-R
GSR 30-R
GSR 35-R
Pinion
Model No.
GP 6-20A
GP 6-20C
GP 6-25A
GP 6-25C
GP 8-20A
GP 8-20C
GP 8-25A
GP 8-25C
GP 10-20A
GP 10-20C
GP 10-25A
GP 10-25C
LM rail
Pitch line height
Rh
Pinion
Meshing PCD
B
Rh+B/2
39
62.5
48
67
52
74
64
80
64
89
80
97
43
48
57
A1-309
LM Guide
Unit: mm
Number
Pitch
of teeth
506E
CSR
LM Guide Cross LM Guide Model CSR
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
Grease nipple
LM block
Ball
Retainer plate
Side seal
LM rail
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-80
A1-459
A1-466
A1-484
A1-310
506E
CSR
Structure and Features
A1-311
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on a LM rail and a LM block, and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out.
This model is an integral type of LM Guide that squares an internal structure similar to model HSR,
which has a proven track record and is highly reliable, with another and uses two LM rails in combination. It is machined with high precision so that the perpendicularity of the hexahedron of the
LM block is within 2 m per 100 mm in error. The two rails are also machined with high precision
in relative straightness. As a result, extremely high accuracy in orthogonality is achieved. Since an
orthogonal LM system can be achieved with model CSR alone, a conventionally required saddle is
no longer necessary, the structure for X-Y motion can be simplified and the whole system can be
downsized.
506E
Model CSR-S
Specification TableA1-314
Model CSR
It has a longer overall LM block length (L) and a
greater rated load.
A1-312
Specification TableA1-314
506E
CSR
Drawing of Using an Inner Saddle
Model CSR can easily be assembled and
adjusted by using an inner saddle to link four
LM blocks together. When installed on an
inner saddle, model CSR achieves a highly
accurate X-Y guide and high rigidity moment
in the yawing direction
(as indicated by
the arrow in the figure).
LM Guide
Inner saddle
A1-313
506E
Model CSR
L2
L
W
C1
F
d1
25-S
W2
W1
H3
M1
h
B4
B
B1
d2
B3
d2
M1 h
d1
H3
W1
W2
W
L
B1
B3 B B4
N
M
25-S
L2
F
E
C1
Models CSR20 to 45
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
B1
B3
B4
Grease
nipple
C1
L2
H3
20
9.4
M46
32
30 10.4
M58
56 5.4
42
25
12
B-M6F
H3
CSR 15
47
CSR 20S
CSR 20
57
50.8
66.8
CSR 25S
CSR 25
70
59.5 83.1
78.6 102.2 18
17
9
52
44
26
34 12.75
M610
64 7.3
46
5.5
30
12
B-M6F
5.5
CSR 30S
CSR 30
82
70.4 98
93 120.6 21
20
12
61
53
32
40 15.2
M610
76 8.5
58
35
12
B-M6F
CSR 35
95
105.8 134.8 24
14
61
37
90
68
7.5
40
12
B-M6F
7.5
CSR 45
16
75
45
10
50
16
B-PT1/8
10
74
90
13.3 42.5
13 7.8 37 24
7.9 M814
3.5
4 CSR25 UU C0 +1200/1000L P
Contamination
LM rail length
LM rail length
protection
on the X axis
on the Y axis
accessory
(in mm)
(in mm)
symbol (*1)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Total No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Medium preload (C0)
Model
number
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-80.
A1-314
https://tech.thk.com
506E
CSR
E
22-S
L2
C
L
W
W2
W1
F
d1
C1
H3
N
M
N
W1
W2
W
L
B3 B4
d2 h
M
M1
d1
H3
C1
22-S
C
L2
F
E
Basic
load rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height
Pitch
Length
C0
MB
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
kN-m
kN-m
kg
kg/m
15
26.9
15
60
4.57.55.3
3000
8.33
13.5
0.0805
0.0805
0.34
1.5
20
35.4
43.4
18
60
69.58.5
3000
13.8
21.3
23.8
31.8
0.19
0.27
0.19
0.323
0.73
1.3
2.3
23
41.25
50.8
22
60
7119
3000
19.9
27.2
34.4
45.9
0.307
0.459
0.307
0.529
1.2
2.2
3.3
28
49.2
60.5
26
80
91412
3000
28
37.3
46.8
62.5
0.524
0.751
0.524
0.889
2
3.6
4.8
34
69.9
29
80
91412
3000
50.2
81.5
1.2
1.32
5.3
6.6
45
87.4
38
105
142017
3090
80.4
127.5
2.43
2.44
9.8
11
Note) The maximum length under Length* indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-316.)
Static permissible moment: Static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
MB
M0
OptionsA1-473
A1-315
LM Guide
B4 B3
M1
d2
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model CSR
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
CSR 20
CSR 25
CSR 30
CSR 35
CSR 45
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
60
20
3000
60
20
3000
60
20
3000
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3090
Note) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
A1-316
Unit: mm
CSR 15
506E
CSR
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model CSR
The model CSR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. With the X-axis LM rail having tapped holes, this model can be secured with bolts from the top.
Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap Unit: mm
Tapped-hole rail
X-axis LM rail
Y-axis LM rail
Model No.
S1
15
M5
20
M6
10
25
M6
12
30
M8
15
35
M8
17
45
M12
24
A1-317
LM Guide
506E
MX
LM Guide Miniature Cross Guide Model MX
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Ball
LM rail
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-84
A1-460
A1-484
A1-318
506E
MX
Structure and Features
Model MX
Specification TableA1-320
A1-319
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. This model is an integral type of LM Guide
that squares a unit of miniature LM Guide model RSR with another and uses two LM rails in combination. Since an orthogonal LM system with an extremely low height can be achieved with model
MX alone, a conventionally required saddle is no longer necessary and the whole system can be
downsized.
506E
Model MX
L
L2
F
d1
M1
M
d2
H3
W1
W2
W
Outer dimensions
Model No.
Greasing
hole
Height
Width
Length
L2
H3
10
15.2
23.3
11.8
5.2
0.8
1.5
14.5
30.2
40.8
24.6
7.4
1.2
MX 5M
MX 7WM
LM block dimensions
Note) The LM block, rail, and ball material are composed of stainless steel and are corrosion resistant to general environments.
Model number coding
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-84.
Note) If the LM rail mount of a semi-standard model is of a tapped-hole LM rail type, add symbol K after the accuracy symbol.
Example: 4 MX7W M UU C1+120/100L P K T M
Add symbol K
A1-320
https://tech.thk.com
506E
MX
W
W2
W1
d2
LM Guide
H3
N
M1
d1
L2
L
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
W1
0
5
0.02
0
14
0.025
Height Pitch
Length
C0
Static Permissible
Moment
N-m
M0
MB
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
10.1
15
2.43.51
200
0.59
1.1
2.57
2.57
0.01
0.14
22.1
5.2
30
3.563.2
400
2.04
3.21
14.7
14.7
0.051
0.51
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-322.)
Static permissible moment: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
MB
M0
For the LM rail mounting hole, a tapped-hole LM rail type is available as semi-standard.
5.2
M2.62
Model MX5M
M3 through
Model MX7WM
When mounting the LM rail of model MX7WM, take into account the thread length of the
mounting bolt in order not to let the bolt end stick out of the top face of the LM rail.
OptionsA1-473
A1-321
506E
G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model MX
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
MX 5
MX 7W
40
55
70
100
130
160
50
80
110
140
170
200
260
290
15
5
480
30
10
480
Note) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
A1-322
Unit: mm
506E
MX
LM Guide
A1-323
506E
JR
LM Guide Structural Member Rail Model JR
Upper plate
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Grease nipple
45
Ball
Lower plate
45
Side seal
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-79
A1-459
A1-466
A1-484
A1-324
506E
JR
Structure and Features
Fig.1
Y axis
JR 25
JR 35
JR 45
JR 55
About
X axis
1.90
4.26
12.1
27.6
About
Y axis
0.51
1.32
3.66
6.54
Modulus of
section
Z [104 mm3]
About
X axis
0.69
1.43
3.31
5.89
About
Y axis
0.21
0.49
1.04
1.40
Height of
gravitational
center
H [mm]
19.5
24.3
33.1
43.3
Fig.2
A1-325
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out.
Model JR uses the same LM block as model HSR, which has a proven track record and is highly
reliable. The LM rail has a sectional shape with high flexural rigidity, and therefore can be used as a
structural member.
Unlike the conventional LM Guide type, whose LM rail was secured onto the base with bolts when
installed, model JRs LM rail is integrated with the mounting base, and the top of the LM rail has the
same structure as LM Guide model HSR. The lower part of the LM rail has a hardness of HRC25 or
less, making it easy to cut the rail and enabling the rail to be welded.
When welding the rail, we recommend using welding rods compliant with JIS D 5816. (suggested manufacturer and model number: Kobelco LB-52).
506E
Model JR-A
Specification TableA1-328
Model JR-B
Specification TableA1-328
Model JR-R
With this type, the LM block has a smaller width
(W) and tapped holes. Used in places where
the space for table width is limited.
A1-326
Specification TableA1-328
506E
JR
LM Guide
A1-327
506E
4-S
W
B
4-S
T1 T
K
T1 T
M
K
M
J2
J2
J1
J1
W1
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
B
L1
JR 25A
JR 25B
JR 25R
61
61
65
70
70
48
83.1
57
57
35
45
45
35
M8
M68
JR 35A
JR 35B
JR 35R
73
73
80
100
100 113.6
70
82
82
50
62
62
50
M10
80.4 21
M812
JR 45A
JR 45B
JR 45R
92 120
100
92 120 145 100
102 86
60
80
80
60
11
M12
M1017
JR 55A
JR 55B
JR 55R
114 140
114 140 165
124 100
95
95
75
14
M14
118
M1218
116
116
75
59.5 16
98
25
25
T1
11
11
9
16 30.5 6
10 30.5 6
34.5 10
12
B-M6F
12
12
11.7
21 40
8
13 40
8
47.4 15
12
B-M6F
13
13
15
15 50 10
15 50 10
59.4 20
16
B-PT1/8
16
B-PT1/8
29 13.5 17
29 13.5 17
20.5
57
57
67
11
11
21
JR35 R 2 UU +1000L T
Type of
LM block
Model
number
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail
length
(in mm)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510
A1-328
https://tech.thk.com
506E
JR
W
B
4- H
W
B
4-S
T
t T T1
K
M
J1
LM Guide
J2
J2
J1
W1
W1
Model JR-B
Model JR-R
E
L
L1
C
M1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Length
Width
MA
C
C0
MB
MC
Double
Double
1 block
1 block
blocks
blocks
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
J1
J2
M1
Max
kN
kN
48
12
47
2000
19.9
34.4
0.59
0.59
0.54
4.2
54
10
54
4000
37.3
61.1
1.6
1.6
1.5
8.6
70
10
10
70
4000
60
95.6
1.42
7.92
1.42
7.92
1.83
2.8
2.8
2.6
15.2
93
4.8
11.6
12
90
4000
88.5
137
2.45
13.2
2.45
13.2
3.2
4.5
4.5
4.3
18.3
1 block
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-330.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-329
506E
Unit: mm
Model No.
JR 25
JR 35
JR 45
JR 55
LM rail standard
length (LO)
1000
1500
2000
1000
2000
4000
1000
2000
4000
1000
2000
4000
Max length
2000
4000
4000
4000
Note1) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note2) For jointing two or more rails, a metal fitting like the one shown in Fig.3 is available. For the mounting method, see
B1-99.
a side
b side
Dial gauge
Rail A
Rail
Rail B G
a side
Rail presser
Bolt
Bolt C
Rail presser
Bolt D
Joint fitting
Fig.3
A1-330
b side
Nut
Setscrew F
Rail presser
Bolt E
506E
JR
Model JB frame for LM rail clamps
LM Guide
C
D
H
R
A
B
F
Unit: mm
Model No.
Mounting
dimensions
A
Clamper dimensions
Bolt used
JB 25
57
78
25
10.5
15
10
3.8
R2
25
10
M 6
JB 35
72
102
35
15
24
12
3.1
R2
32
M 8
JB 45
90
130
45
11
20
30
16
5.4
R2
40
M10
JB 55
115
155
50
14
20
30
17
8.2
R2
50
10
M12
N
U
T
S
K
L
P
Unit: mm
Model No.
Mounting
dimensions
K
Clamper dimensions
Bolt used
N
JT 25
57
79
25
11
10
25
JT 35
65
91
27
13
13
4.5
40
M 6
M 8
JT 45
84
114
33
15
16
11
50
M10
JT 55
110
148
50
19
15
14
50
M12
A1-331
506E
HCR
LM Guide R Guide Model HCR
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
Grease nipple
End seal
Ball
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-79
A1-461
A1-484
A1-332
506E
HCR
Structure and Features
[Freedom of Design]
Multiple LM blocks can individually move on the same rail. By arranging LM blocks on the load
points, efficient structural design is achieved.
[Shortened Assembly Time]
This model allows clearance-free, highly accurate circular motion as opposed to sliding guides or
cam followers. You can easily assemble this model simply by mounting the LM rail and LM blocks
with bolts.
[Allows Circular Motion of 5m or Longer]
It allows circular motion of 5 m or longer, which is impossible with swivel bearings.
In addition, use of this model makes it easy to assemble, disassemble and reassemble equipment
that circularly moves.
[Capable of Receiving Loads in All Directions]
This model is capable of receiving loads in all directions since it has a structure that is basically the
same as model HSR.
A1-333
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
With a structure that is basically the same as four-way equal load type LM Guide model HSR, which
has a proven track record, this R Guide is a new concept product that allows highly accurate circular
motion.
506E
Model HCR
The flange of its LM block has tapped holes.
A1-334
Specification TableA1-336
506E
HCR
LM Guide
A1-335
506E
T1
M
H3
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
HCR 12A+60/100R
HCR 15A+60/150R
HCR 15A+60/300R
HCR 15A+60/400R
HCR 25A+60/500R
HCR 25A+60/750R
HCR 25A+60/1000R
HCR 35A+60/600R
HCR 35A+60/800R
HCR 35A+60/1000R
HCR 35A+60/1300R
HCR 45A+60/800R
HCR 45A+60/1000R
HCR 45A+60/1200R
HCR 45A+60/1600R
HCR 65A+60/1000R
HCR 65A+60/1500R
HCR 65A+45/2000R
HCR 65A+45/2500R
HCR 65A+30/3000R
W2
LM block dimensions
H3
L1
T1
18
39
32
30.5
4.5
3.4
3.5
PB107
3.1
47
18
24
28
28
M4
24
M5
38.8
10.3
11
4.5
5.5
PB1021B
4.8
36
70
57
45
M8
59.5
14.9
16
12
B-M6F
48
100
82
58
M10
80.4
19.9
21
12
B-M6F
8.5
60
120
100
70
M12
98
23.9
25
10
16
B-PT1/8
11.5
90
170
44.6
54.5
55.5
55.8
81.6
82.3
82.5
107.2
107.5
108.2
108.5
136.7
137.3
137.3
138
193.8
195.4
195.9
196.5
196.5
142
106
M16
147
34.9
37
19
16
B-PT1/8
15
38
Model number
(*1) See A1-510 (contamination protection accessories). (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-79.
(*4) Number of LM rails used on one arc. For details, contact THK.
A1-336
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HCR
L
n1- d1 through, d2 counter bore depth h
4-S
LM Guide
C
n1-1
2
Ri
R
Ro
L0
E L1
N
M1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
R
R0
Ri
L0
100
150
300
400
500
750
1000
600
800
1000
1300
800
1000
1200
1600
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
106
157.5
307.5
407.5
511.5
761.5
1011.5
617
817
1017
1317
822.5
1022.5
1222.5
1622.5
1031.5
1531.5
2031.5
2531.5
3031.5
94
142.5
292.5
392.5
488.5
738.5
988.5
583
783
983
1283
777.5
977.5
1177.5
1577.5
968.5
1468.5
1968.5
2468.5
2968.5
100
150
300
400
500
750
1000
600
800
1000
1300
800
1000
1200
1600
1000
1500
1531
1913
1553
13.4
20.1
40
54
67
100
134
80
107
134
174
107
134
161
214
134
201
152
190
102
Height
MB
MC
Mass
LM LM
block rail
C0
W1 W2 M1 d1d2h n1 1 2
kN
kN
12 13.5 11 3.565 3
3
15 16 15 4.57.55.3 5
7
9
23 23.5 22 7119 12
15
7
11
34 33 29 91412
12
17
8
10
45 37.5 38 142017
12
15
8
10
63 53.5 53 182622 12
13
10
4.7
6.66
8.33
8.33
19.9
37.3
6.6
60
11.0
141
215
60 7
7
60 6
3
2
60 2.5
2
3
2.5
60
2.5
2
2
3
60
2.5
2
60 2
60 3
45 0.5
45 1.5
30 1.5
23
23
12
9
7
5
4
9
5.5
5
3.5
8
6
5
4
8
6
4
3.5
3
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
Note) LM rail radiuses other than the radiuses in the above table are also available. Contact THK for details.
The R-Guide center angles in the table are maximum manufacturing angles. To obtain angles greater than them, rails
must be additionally connected. Contact THK for details.
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-337
506E
HMG
LM Guide Straight-Curved Guide Model HMG
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
Straight-Curved seal
Ball
Curved rail
Joint rail
Point of Selection
Point of Design
Straight rail
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-78
A1-461
A1-484
A1-338
506E
HMG
Structure and Features
[Freedom of Design]
It allows free combinations of straight and curved shapes.
Since LM blocks can smoothly transit between the straight and curved sections, various combinations of straight and curved rails can be joined into various shapes such as O, U, L and S shapes.
In addition, HMG allows a large table to be mounted and a heavy object to be carried through combinations of multiple blocks on a single rail or 2 or more LM rails. Thus, it provides great freedom of
design.
O shape
U shape
L shape
S shape
A1-339
LM Guide
The Straight-Curved Guide HMG is a new straight-curved guide that allows the same type of LM
blocks to continuously move on straight and curved rails by combining the technologies of the LM
Guide HSR and the R Guide HCR. It achieves drastic cost reduction through improvement of work
efficiency at the assembly and conveyance lines and the inspection equipment and simplification of
the structure by eliminating a lift and a table.
506E
Feeding a workpiece
Operation
Workpiece carried in
Operation
Returning a workpiece
Operation
Feeding a workpiece
Workpiece placement feeding operation
returning workpiece placement
Operation
Shuttle method
Workpiece
carried in
Operation
Circulation method
Fig.2 Improved process time
Turntable
Conventional method
A1-340
506E
HMG
Types and Features
Model HMG
Specification TableA1-344
LM Guide
A1-341
506E
: Rotating mechanism
: Rotating mechanism and slide mechanism
Fig.4 Examples of Table Mechanisms
Straight section
Rotation + slide
Rotation + slide
Slide distance
of the table
Fig.5 shows examples of designing a table when units are used on multiple axes. HMG requires a rotating mechanism and a slide mechanism since the table is decentered when an LM block transits from
a straight section to a curved section. The amount of decentering differs according to the radius of the
curved section and the LM block span. Therefore, it is necessary to design the system in accordance
with the corresponding specifications.
Fig.6 shows detail drawings of the slide and rotating mechanisms. In the figure, LM Guides are used in
the slide mechanism and Cross-Roller Rings in the rotating mechanism to achieve smooth sliding and
rotating motions.
For driving the Straight-Curved Guide, belt drives and chain drives are available.
LM Guide
Rotation + slide
Cross-roller ring
Rotation
Rotation + slide
LM Guide
Cross-roller ring
Rotation + slide
Rotation
Rotation
Curved section
Fig.5
A1-342
Rotation + slide
Rotation
Fig.6
506E
HMG
LM Guide
A1-343
506E
Model HMG
L
W
L'
L1
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
LM rail dimensions
LM rail
Height
Model No.
M
L1
W1
W2
M1
HMG 15A
24
47
48
28.8
38
M511
16
4.3
5.5
15
16
60
15
HMG 25A
36
70
62.2 42.2
57
M816
25.6
12
23
23.5
60
22
HMG 35A
48
82
M1021
32.6
12
34
33
80
29
HMG 45A
60
M1225
42.6
10
16
45
37.5 105
38
HMG 65A
90
M1637
63.4
19
16
63
53.5 150
53
A1-344
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HMG
d2
h
M1
d1
LM Guide
Straight rail
1
2
Curved rail
Curved rail
Mounting hole
d1d2h
4.57.55.3
7119
91412
142017
182622
150
300
400
500
750
1000
600
800
1000
1300
800
1000
1200
1600
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3
5
7
9
12
15
7
11
12
17
8
10
12
15
8
10
12
13
10
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
45
45
30
7
6
3
2
2.5
2
3
2.5
2.5
2
2
3
2.5
2
2
3
0.5
1.5
1.5
23
12
9
7
5
4
9
5.5
5
3.5
8
6
5
4
8
6
4
3.5
3
Unit: mm
Basic dynamic
load rating (C)
Resultant load
(C) kN
Straight section
(Cost) kN
Curved section
(Cor) kN
2.56
4.23
0.44
9.41
10.8
6.7
17.7
19
11.5
28.1
29.7
18.2
66.2
66.7
36.2
When a moment is applied where one LM block is specified per axis, the LM block may experience non-smooth motion.
We recommend that multiple LM blocks be used per axis when a moment is applied.
Table 1 shows the static permissible moment of an LM block in the MA, MB and MC directions.
Table1 Static Permissible Moments of Model HMG
MA
MB
Unit: kN-m
MC
Model No.
HMG 15
HMG 25
HMG 35
HMG 45
HMG 65
Straight section Curved section Straight section Curved section Straight section Curved section
0.008
0.007
0.008
0.01
0.027
0.003
0.1
0.04
0.1
0.05
0.11
0.07
0.22
0.11
0.22
0.12
0.29
0.17
0.48
0.2
0.48
0.22
0.58
0.34
1.47
0.66
1.47
0.73
1.83
0.94
OptionsA1-473
A1-345
506E
Jointed LM rail
[Level Difference Specification for the Joint]
An accuracy error in LM rail installation has influence
on the service life of the product. When installing the
LM rail, take care to minimize the level difference in the
joint within the specification indicated in Table2. For
the joint between curved rails and another between the
curved section and the joint rail, we recommend using
a flushing piece like the one shown in Fig.7. When using the flushing piece, place the fixed butt piece on the
outer side, push the rail against the butt piece, and then
adjust the level difference in the joint section by turning
the adjustment screw from the inner side.
Model No.
Ball raceway,
side face
Upper face
Maximum
clearance
of the joint
section
0.6
15
0.01
0.02
25
0.01
0.02
0.7
35
0.01
0.02
1.0
45
0.01
0.02
1.3
65
0.01
0.02
1.3
Note) Place the pin on the outer circumference and the bolt on the inner circumference.
Pin or butt piece
adjustment bolt
Fig.7 Flush piece
F
L
F/2
d2
h
M1
Wo
A1-346
d1
W1
506E
HMG
Table3 Dimension of the Jointed Rail
15A
15
60
25A
22
60
35A
29
80
45A
38
105
65A
53
150
60
500
Radius
R
150
300
400
500
750
1000
600
800
1000
1300
800
1000
1200
1600
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
50
Pitch
F
R1
Height
M1
30
60
60
accessory
symbol (*1)
A1-347
LM Guide
Model No.
Unit: mm
506E
NSR-TBC
LM Guide Self-aligning Type Model NSR-TBC
Spline nut
LM casing
LM rail
End seal
Grease nipple
Side plate
Side seal
(Optional)
Ball
Retainer
30
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-459
A1-467
A1-484
A1-348
506E
NSR-TBC
Structure and Features
Model NSR-TBC is the only LM Guide whose casing consists of two pieces instead of a single-piece
LM block. The rigid, cast iron casing contains a cylindrical spline nut that is partially cut at an angle
of 120. This enables the model to self-aligning on the fitting surface with the casing, thus to permit
rough installation.
Model NSR-TBC
Specification TableA1-350
A1-349
LM Guide
506E
Model NSR-TBC
E
H3
Outer dimensions
Model No.
E1
LM casing dimensiones
Grease
nipple
E1
NSR 20TBC
40
70
67
55
50
6.6
34.5
5.5
8.5
A-M6F
5.5
NSR 25TBC
50
90
78
72
60
10
43.5
8.5
7.5
A-M6F
6.5
NSR 30TBC
60
100
90
82
72
12
51
8.5
9.5
A-M6F
NSR 40TBC
75
120
110
100
80
11
13
64
10
8.5
12
A-M6F
10.5
NSR 50TBC
82
140
123
116
95
14
15
74
15
15
A-PT1/8
NSR 70TBC
105
175
150
150
110
14
18
95.5
10
15
16.5
A-PT1/8
9.5
H3
NSR50TBC 2 UU C1 +1200L P T -
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
Symbol for
(in mm)
accessory
Symbol for No. of rails used
symbol (*1)
LM rail
on the same plane (*4)
jointed use
No. of LM cases
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
used on the same
Normal (No symbol)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Medium preload (C0)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Model number
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-350
https://tech.thk.com
506E
NSR-TBC
LM Guide
h
M1
1
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
23
23.5
23
60
69.58.5
2200
9.41
18.6
MB
LM
casing
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.27
0.62
3.1
Double Double
casings casings
0.31
Mass
28
31
28
80
7119
3000
14.9
26.7
0.53
0.46
1.13
4.7
34
33
34.5
80
7119
3000
22.5
38.3
0.85
0.74
1.8
7.2
45
37.5
44.5
105
91412
3000
37.1
62.2
1.7
1.5
3.5
12.2
48
46
47.5
120
1117.514
3000
55.1
87.4
2.7
2.4
5.2
14.3
63
56
62
150
142017
3000
90.8
152
9.8
4.9
9.4
27.6
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-352.)
Static permissible moment: Double casings: static permissible moment value with 2 casings closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-351
506E
G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model NSR-TBC
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
NSR 20TBC
NSR 25TBC
NSR 30TBC
NSR 40TBC
NSR 50TBC
NSR 70TBC
220
280
340
460
640
820
1000
1240
1600
280
440
600
760
1000
1240
1640
2040
2520
3000
280
440
600
760
1000
1240
1640
2040
2520
3000
570
885
1200
1620
2040
2460
2985
780
1020
1260
1500
1980
2580
2940
1270
1570
2020
2620
60
20
2200
80
20
3000
80
20
3000
105
22.5
3000
120
30
3000
150
35
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-352
506E
NSR-TBC
LM Guide
A1-353
506E
HSR-M1
LM Guide High Temperature Type Model HSR-M1
LM block
THK-EX50
Endplate
SUS304
LM rail
THK-EX50
45
End seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
Side seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
Point of Selection
Point of Design
45
Ball
SUS440C
Cross section
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-461
A1-466
A1-484
A1-354
506E
HSR-M1
Structure and Features
A1-355
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM
Guide to be used in all orientations.
The high temperature type LM Guide is capable of being used at service temperature up to 150
thanks to THKs unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
506E
Since this model has been treated for dimensional stability, its dimensional change after being
cooled or heated is only minimal.
0.02
0
-0.02
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.1
-0.12
-0.14
High
Standard
temperature
type
type
Stainless
steel
type
0.2
Vertical
Horizontal
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
High
temperature
type
Standard
type
Stainless
steel
type
Note1) The above data on overall length and curvature indicate dimensional change when the LM rail is cooled to normal
temperature after being heated at 150 for 100 hours.
Note2) The samples consist of high temperature, standard and stainless steel types of model HSR25 + 580L.
THK
s high temperature
grease
Competitor
s high temperature
grease
4
2
0
Normal
temperature
Temperature
measurement
14
THK
s high temperature
12
grease
Competitor
s high temperature
10
grease
8
6
4
2
0
Normal
Temperature
temperature
measurement
150
Average Value
Fluctuation Value
A1-356
150
506E
HSR-M1
Types and Features
Model HSR-M1A
Specification TableA1-360
LM Guide
Model HSR-M1LA
Specification TableA1-360
Model HSR-M1B
Specification TableA1-362
Model HSR-M1LB
Specification TableA1-362
A1-357
506E
Model HSR-M1R
Specification TableA1-364
Model HSR-M1LR
Specification TableA1-364
Model HSR-M1YR
Specification TableA1-366
Service Life
When using this product in temperatures higher than 100C, always multiply the basic dynamic load
rating by the temperature coefficient when calculating the rated service life. See A1-64 for
details.
A1-358
506E
HSR-M1
LM Guide
A1-359
506E
4-S
T1 T
K
H3
W2
W1
LM block dimensions
Outer dimensions
Model No.
HSR 15M1A
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
24
47
59.6
38
30
53
H3
M5
38.8
6.5
11
19.3
4.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
40
M6
50.8
66.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 20M1A
HSR 20M1LA
30
63
76
92
HSR 25M1A
HSR 25M1LA
36
70
83.9
103
57
45
M8
59.5
78.6
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
HSR 30M1A
HSR 30M1LA
42
90
98.8
121.4
72
52
M10
70.4
93
18
35
12
B-M6F
HSR 35M1A
HSR 35M1LA
48
100
112
137.4
82
62
M10
80.4
105.8
12
21
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR is longer than normal type of model HSR. (Dimension
L1 is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR25 M1 A 2 UU C1 +1240L P T -
Model number
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same Normal (No symbol)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Type of
LM block
Symbol
for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-360
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M1
d2
L
L1
C
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
15
16
15
60
4.57.55.3
1240
0.2
1.5
0.35
0.47
2.3
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
1480
23
23.5
22
60
7119
1500
0.59
0.75
3.3
28
31
26
80
91412
1500
1.1
1.3
4.8
34
33
29
80
91412
1500
1.6
2
6.6
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-368.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-361
506E
4- H
W
B
4- H
T1 T
t T T1
K
H3
H3
W1
W2
W2
Models HSR20M1B/M1LB
Outer dimensions
Model No.
HSR 15M1B
W1
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
H3
24
47
59.6
38
30
4.5
38.8
11
6.5
19.3
4.3
53
40
50.8
66.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 20M1B
HSR 20M1LB
30
63
76
92
HSR 25M1B
HSR 25M1LB
36
70
83.9
103
57
45
59.5
78.6
16
11
10
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
HSR 30M1B
HSR 30M1LB
42
90
98.8
121.4
72
52
70.4
93
18
10
35
12
B-M6F
HSR 35M1B
HSR 35M1LB
48
100
112
137.4
82
62
80.4
105.8
21
12
13
40.5
12
B-M6F
7.5
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR is longer than normal type of model HSR. (Dimension
L1 is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR20 M1 LB 2 UU C0 +1000L P T -
Model number
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2)
used on the same Normal (No symbol)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Type of
LM block
Symbol
for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-362
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M1
LM Guide
d2
L
L1
C
h
M1
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
15
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
16
15
60
4.57.55.3
1240
0.2
1.5
0.35
0.47
2.3
20
21.5
18
60
69.58.5
1480
23
23.5
22
60
7119
1500
0.59
0.75
3.3
28
31
26
80
91412
1500
1.1
1.3
4.8
34
33
29
80
91412
1500
1.6
2
6.6
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-368.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-363
506E
4-S
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
HSR 15M1R
Grease
nipple
28
34
59.6
L1
26
26
32
36
50
H3
M45
38.8
23.3
8.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
M56
50.8
66.8
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 20M1R
HSR 20M1LR
30
44
76
92
HSR 25M1R
HSR 25M1LR
40
48
83.9
103
35
35
50
M68
59.5
78.6
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
HSR 30M1R
HSR 30M1LR
45
60
98.8
121.4
40
40
60
M810
70.4
93
38
10
12
B-M6F
HSR 35M1R
HSR 35M1LR
55
70
112
137.4
50
50
72
M812
80.4
105.8
10
47.5
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR is longer than normal type of model HSR. (Dimension
L1 is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR35 M1 R 2 UU C0 +1080L P T -
Model number
Type of
LM block
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol
for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-364
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M1
L
L1
C
LM Guide
d2
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
15
9.5
15
60
4.57.55.3
1240
0.2
1.5
0.35
0.47
2.3
Double
1
Double
1
1
block blocks block blocks block
20
12
18
60
69.58.5
1480
23
12.5
22
60
7119
1500
0.59
0.75
3.3
28
16
26
80
91412
1500
1.1
1.3
4.8
34
18
29
80
91412
1500
1.6
2
6.6
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-368.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-365
506E
Model HSR-M1YR
4-S
B1
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
HSR 15M1YR
Grease
nipple
B1
L1
28
33.5
59.6
4.3
11.5
18
M45
38.8
23.3
8.3
5.5
H3
PB1021B
4.7
HSR 20M1YR
30
43.5
76
11.5
25
M56
50.8
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 25M1YR
40
47.5
83.9
16
30
M66
59.5
34.5
10
12
B-M6F
5.5
HSR 30M1YR
45
59.5
98.8
16
40
M69
70.4
38
10
12
B-M6F
HSR 35M1YR
55
69.5
112
23
43
M810
80.4
47.5
15
12
B-M6F
7.5
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR-YR is longer than normal type of model HSR-YR.
(Dimension L1 is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR25 M1 YR 2 UU C0 +1200L P T -
Model number
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2)
used on the same Normal (No symbol)
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Type of
LM block
Symbol
for LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-366
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M1
L
L1
C
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
0.05
15
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
kg
kg/m
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
24
15
60
4.57.55.3
1240
0.2
1.5
20
31.5
18
60
69.58.5
1480
1.04 0.201
0.35
2.3
23
35
22
60
7119
1500
0.59
3.3
1.04
2.7
0.19
28
43.5
26
80
91412
1500
0.562
1.3
4.8
34
51.5
29
80
91412
1500
0.524
2.7
1.6
6.6
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-368.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-367
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR-M1
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
HSR 15M1
HSR 20M1
HSR 25M1
HSR 30M1
HSR 35M1
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
60
20
1240
60
20
1480
60
20
1500
80
20
1500
80
20
1500
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
Note3) The values for HSR-M1 also apply to HSR-M1YR.
A1-368
506E
HSR-M1
LM Guide
A1-369
506E
SR-M1
LM Guide High Temperature Type Model SR-M1
LM block
THK-EX50
Endplate
SUS304
Grease nipple
SUS304
End seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
LM rail
THK-EX50
Ball
SUS440C
Retainer plate
SUS304
Side seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
Point of Selection
Point of Design
90
30
Cross section
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-459
A1-466
A1-484
A1-370
506E
SR-M1
Structure and Features
A1-371
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Since it is a compactly designed model that has a low sectional height and a ball contact structure
rigid in the radial direction, this model is optimal for horizontal guide units.
High temperature type LM Guide model SR-M1 is capable of being used at service temperature up
to 150 thanks to THKs unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
506E
Model SR-M1W
Specification TableA1-374
Model SR-M1V
Specification TableA1-374
Model SR-M1TB
Specification TableA1-376
A1-372
Specification TableA1-376
506E
SR-M1
Service Life
When using this product in temperatures higher than 100C, always multiply the basic dynamic load
rating by the temperature coefficient when calculating the rated service life. See A1-64 for
details.
LM Guide
A1-373
506E
W
B
d2
T
M1
H3
W2
L
L1
C
d1
W1
Model SR-M1W
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
L1
H3
SR 15M1V
SR 15M1W
24
34
40.4
57
26
26
M47
22.9
39.5
19.5
5.5
PB1021B
4.5
SR 20M1V
SR 20M1W
28
42
47.3
66.2
32
32
M58
27.8
46.7
7.5
22
12
B-M6F
SR 25M1V
SR 25M1W
33
48
59.2
83
35
35
M69
35.2
59
26
12
B-M6F
SR 30M1V
SR 30M1W
42
60
67.9
96.8
40
40
M812
40.4
69.3
32.5
12
B-M6F
9.5
SR 35M1V
SR 35M1W
48
70
77.6
111
50
50
M812
45.7
79
13
36.5
8.5
12
B-M6F
11.5
SR30 M1 W 2 UU C0 +1160L Y P T -
Model
number
Symbol for high
temperature
type LM Guide
Contamination
LM rail length Applied to Symbol for
protection
Symbol for
(in mm)
LM rail
only 15
accessory
jointed use No. of rails used
and 25
symbol (*1)
on the same plane (*4)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
No. of LM blocks
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Type of
LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-374
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SR-M1
2-S
E
L
L1
d2
LM Guide
h
M1
d1
Model SR-M1V
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
15
9.5
12.5
60
3.564.5
1240
0.12
0.2
1.2
20
11
15.5
60
69.58.5
1500
0.2
0.3
2.1
23
12.5
18
60
7119
1500
0.3
0.4
2.7
28
16
23
80
7119
1500
0.5
0.8
4.3
34
18
27.5
80
91412
1500
0.8
1.2
6.4
Note1) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-378.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SR 15
SR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-375
506E
W
B
d2
T1 T
M1
H3
W2
L
L1
C
d1
W1
Model SR-M1TB
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
H3
SR 15M1SB
SR 15M1TB
24
52
40.4
57
41
26
4.5
22.9
39.5
6.1
19.5
5.5
PB1021B
4.5
SR 20M1SB
SR 20M1TB
28
59
47.3
66.2
49
32
5.5
27.8
46.7
22
12
B-M6F
SR 25M1SB
SR 25M1TB
33
73
59.2
83
60
35
35.2
59
10
26
12
B-M6F
SR 30M1SB
SR 30M1TB
42
90
67.9
96.8
72
40
40.4
69.3
8.7
10
32.5
12
B-M6F
9.5
SR 35M1SB
SR 35M1TB
48
100
77.6
111
82
50
45.7
11.2
79
13
36.5
8.5
12
B-M6F
11.5
SR30 M1 W 2 UU C0 +1000L Y P T -
Model number
Contamination
LM rail length
Applied to Symbol for
protection
Symbol for
(in mm)
LM rail
only 15
accessory
jointed use No. of rails used
and 25
symbol (*1)
on the same plane (*4)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
No. of LM blocks
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
Type of
LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-376
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SR-M1
2- H
E
LM Guide
d2
M1
L
L1
h
d1
Model SR-M1SB
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
15
18.5 12.5
60
3.564.5
1240
0.12
0.2
1.2
20
19.5 15.5
60
69.58.5
1500
0.2
0.3
2.1
23
25
18
60
7119
1500
0.3
0.4
2.7
28
31
23
80
7119
1500
0.5
0.8
4.3
34
33
27.5
80
91412
1500
0.8
1.2
6.4
Note1) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-378.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) For models SR15 and 25, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Table1 The dimension of the rail mounting hole
Model No.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
SR 15
SR 25
OptionsA1-473
A1-377
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SR-M1
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SR 15M1
SR 20M1
SR 25M1
SR 30M1
SR 35M1
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
60
20
1240
60
20
1500
60
20
1500
80
20
1500
80
20
1500
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-378
506E
SR-M1
LM Guide
A1-379
506E
RSR-M1
LM Guide High Temperature Type Model RSR-M1
Endplate
SUS304
LM block
THK EX50
End seal
(High temperature rubber)
LM rail
THK EX50
Ball
SUS440C
Grease nipple
SUS304
Point of Selection
A1-10
Point of Design
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-83
A1-465
A1-467
A1-468
A1-484
A1-380
506E
RSR-M1
Structure and Features
A1-381
LM Guide
Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
High temperature type miniature LM Guide model RSR-M1 is capable of being used at service temperature up to 150 thanks to THKs unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
506E
Specification TableA1-384
Model RSR-M1N
Specification TableA1-384
Specification TableA1-386
Model RSR-M1WN
It has a longer overall LM block length (L),
a greater rated load than standard types.
Achieves the greatest load capacity among the
high temperature type miniature LM Guide models.
A1-382
Specification TableA1-386
506E
RSR-M1
Service Life
When using this product in temperatures higher than 100C, always multiply the basic dynamic load
rating by the temperature coefficient when calculating the rated service life. See A1-64 for
details.
LM Guide
A1-383
506E
W
B
L1
4-S
d2
N
h
K
M1
H3
d1
W2
W1
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Grease
nipple
L1
H3
RSR 9M1K
RSR 9M1N
10
20
30.8
41
15
10
16
M33
19.8
29.8
7.8
2.2
RSR 12M1V
RSR 12M1N
13
27
35
47.7
20
15
20
M33.5
20.6
33.3
10
RSR 15M1V
RSR 15M1N
16
32
43
61
25
20
25
M34
25.7
43.5
12
3.5
3.6
3.7
PB107
RSR 20M1V
RSR 20M1N
25
46
66.5
86.3
38
38
M46
45.2
5.7 17.5
65
6.4
A-M6F
7.5
2 RSR15 M1 V UU C1 +230L P T -
Model number
Type of Contamination
LM block protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
LM rail
jointed use
Symbol for
No. of rails used
on the same plane (*4)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-384
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR-M1
4-S
E
W
B
L
L1
C
LM Guide
d2
T
K
M1
H3
h
d1
W1
W2
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
0
9
0.02
5.5
5.5
20
3.563.3
1240
43.3
97
7.34
18.4
43.3
97
10.4
18.4
0.018
0.027
0.32
12
0
7.5
0.025
7.5
25
3.564.5
1430
74.9
163
10.1
25.5
67.7
145
19.2
31.8
0.037
0.055
0.58
15
0
8.5
0.025
9.5
40
3.564.5
1600
149
330
21.1
55.6
135
293
38.8
63
0.069
0.093
0.925
20
0
0.03
15
60
69.58.5
1800
435
897
66.7
151
389
795
96.6
157
0.245
0.337
1.95
13
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-388.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-385
506E
4-S
B
d
L1
C
d2
N
T
K
H3
M1
d1
W2
W1
LM block dimensions
Greasing
hole
Grease
nipple
L1
H3
RSR 9M1WV
RSR 9M1WN
12
30
39
50.7
21
23
12
24
M2.63
M33
27
38.7
7.8
1.6
4.2
RSR 12M1WV
RSR 12M1WN
14
40
44.5
59.5
28
15
28
M33.5
30.9
4.5
45.9
10
RSR 15M1WV
RSR 15M1WN
16
60
55.5
74.5
45
20
35
M44.5
38.9
5.6
57.9
12
3.5
PB107
2 RSR12 M1 WN UU C1 +310L P T
Type of Contamination
LM rail length
Symbol for LM rail
LM block protection
(in mm)
jointed use
accessory
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Symbol for high symbol (*1)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
temperature
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Precision grade (P)
type LM Guide
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Model number
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-71. (*3) See A1-83.
A1-386
https://tech.thk.com
506E
RSR-M1
W
B
L
L1
4-S
K
H3
M1
d1
W3
W1
W2
LM Guide
d2
Models RSR15M1WV/M1WN
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
d1d2h
MA
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
W1
W2
W3
M1
0
18
0.05
7.5
30
3.564.5 1430
2.45 3.92
3.52 5.37
24
0
0.05
8.5
40
4.584.5 1600
42
0
0.05
23
9.5
40
4.584.5 1800
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
16
31
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
92.9
161
16
31
92.9 36 0.035
1.08
161 49.4 0.051
138
274
21.7
47.3
123
242
59.5 0.075
90.1 0.101
278
555
44.4
97.3
248
490
168
255
0.17
0.21
1.5
3
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-388.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-387
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR-M1
Model No.
Unit: mm
RSR 9M1
RSR 12M1
RSR 15M1
RSR 20M1
RSR 9M1W
RSR 12M1W
RSR 15M1W
55
75
95
115
135
155
175
195
275
375
70
95
120
145
170
195
220
245
270
320
370
470
570
220
280
340
460
640
880
1000
50
80
110
140
170
200
260
290
320
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
390
470
550
110
150
190
230
270
310
430
550
670
790
20
7.5
1240
25
10
1430
70
110
150
190
230
270
310
350
390
430
470
550
670
870
40
15
1600
60
20
1800
30
10
1430
40
15
1600
40
15
1800
LM rail
standard length
(LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Note) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Stopper
In models RSR-M1/RSR-M1W, the balls fall out if the LM block comes off the LM rail.
For this reason, they are delivered with a stopper fitted to prevent the LM block coming off the rail. If
you remove the stopper when using the product, take care to ensure that overrun does not occur.
Table2 Model RSR-M1/RSR-M1W stopper (C type)
specification table
Unit: mm
Model No.
9
12
15
20
9W
12W
15W
A
13
16
19
25
23
29
46
B
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
C
9.5
12.5
14.5
20.0
11.5
13.5
14.5
A1-388
506E
RSR-M1
LM Guide
A1-389
506E
HSR-M2
LM Guide High Corrosion Resistance Type Model HSR-M2
LM rail
SUS304
Retainer plate
SUS304
LM block
SUS431
Endplate
(Synthetic resin)
End seal
(Synthetic rubber)
Point of Selection
Point of Design
45
45
Ball
SUS431
Retainer plate
SUS304
Side seal
(Synthetic rubber)
Grease nipple
SUS304
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-461
A1-466
A1-484
A1-390
506E
HSR-M2
Structure and Features
Model HSR-M2A
Specification TableA1-392
A1-391
LM Guide
Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM
Guide to be used in all orientations.
The LM rail, LM block and balls are made of highly corrosion resistant stainless steel and the other
metal parts are made of stainless steel, allowing superb corrosion resistance to be achieved. As a
result, the need for surface treatment is eliminated.
506E
Model HSR-M2A
4-S
T1
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
B
L1
T1
H3
HSR 15M2A
24
47
56.6
38
30
M5
38.8
6.5
11
19.3
4.3
5.5
PB1021B
4.7
HSR 20M2A
30
63
74
53
40
M6
50.8
9.5
10
26
12
B-M6F
HSR 25M2A
36
70
83.1
57
45
M8
59.5
11
16
30.5
12
B-M6F
5.5
Note) For the high corrosion resistance type LM Guide, a stainless steel end plate is optionally available. (symbolI)
Model number coding
HSR20M2 A 2 UU C1 +820L P T -
Model number
(high corrosion
resistance type
LM Guide)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-392
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M2
L
L1
C
LM Guide
d2
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
W1
0.05
Height Pitch
Length*
C0
Max
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
d1d2h
15
60
4.57.55.3
1000
70.3
12.3
70.3
10.8
0.2
1.5
18
60
69.58.5
1000
3.86 3.57
160
29
160
26.5
0.35
2.3
22
60
7119
1000
261
46.9
261
45.1
0.59
3.3
W2
M1
15
16
20
21.5
23
23.5
29
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-394.)
The basic load rating of the high corrosion resistance type LM Guide is smaller than ordinary stainless steel LM Guides.
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-393
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR-M2
Unit: mm
Model No.
HSR 15M2
HSR 20M2
HSR 25M2
LM rail standard
length (LO)
160
280
460
640
280
460
640
820
280
460
640
820
1000
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
60
20
1000
60
20
1000
60
20
1000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-394
506E
HSR-M2
LM Guide
A1-395
506E
HSR-M1VV
LM Guide Medium-to-low Vacuum Type Model HSR-M1VV
LM block:
THK-EX50 (martensitic stainless steel)
45
LM rail:
THK-EX50 (martensitic stainless steel)
45
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-545
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-71
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-461
A1-466
A1-468
A1-484
A1-396
506E
HSR-M1VV
Structure and Features
* If the baking temperature exceeds 100C, multiply the basic load rating with the temperature coefficient.
HSR15R (for
reference)
Grease
Seal
None
Endplate
Stainless steel
Resin
AFB-LF Grease
[Rolling resistance]
The grease used in the LM Guide for Mediumto-Low Vacuum has a smaller rolling resistance
than conventional fluorine grease and ensures
stable rolling motion.
Specimen: HSR15M1RVV
Temperature: 25 (5)
Pressure: atmospheric pressure
Pressure (Pa)
HSR15M1RVV
LM rail
10-1
10-2
HSR15R standard
(without seal)
10-3
HSR15M1RVV
(with labyrinth end seal dedicated
for Medium-to-Low Vacuum)
10-4
10-5
10-6
10
Time (h)
20
30
Minimum clearance
3
2
1
0
30
60
90
120
Stroke (mm)
Rolling resistance fluctuation
A1-397
LM Guide
[Features]
Operable in various environments at pressure between atmospheric pressure and vacuum (10-3 [Pa]).
Capable of withstanding baking temperature up to 200*
Use of a newly developed labyrinth end seal dedicated for Medium-to-Low Vacuum increases
grease retention and allows extended use in vacuum.
Use of grease designed for Medium-to-Low Vacuum achieves a stable rolling resistance.
506E
Model HSR-M1RVV
Specification TableA1-400
Precautions on Design
If a large moment is applied to a system consisting of one block on one axis, the labyrinth end seal
may contact the rail, and it may affect the motion.
If a moment is applied, we recommend using two axes with two blocks per axis.
Contact THK for details.
A1-398
506E
HSR-M1VV
LM Guide
A1-399
506E
Model HSR-M1VV
W
4-S
B
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Height
Model No.
HSR15M1R-VV
LM block dimensions
Width Length
L1
H3
28
34
75
26
26
M45
38.8
23.7
4.3
HSR15M1R 1 VV C1 +400L P -
Model No.
Radial clearance
symbol (*1)
Labyrinth seal
symbol(*2)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Accuracy
symbol (*3)
Symbol for
No. of rails used on the
same plane (*4)
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See A1-71. (*2) See A1-397. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note1) The radial clearance, maximum LM rail length and accuracy class are equal to that of model HSR.
Note2) With this model, a single-rail unit constitutes one set (i.e., the required number of sets when 2 rails are used in parallel
is 2).
A1-400
https://tech.thk.com
506E
HSR-M1VV
L
L1
C
LM Guide
d2
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
rating
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
W1
W2
0.05
15
9.5
M1
15
60
d1d2h
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
4.57.55.3 1240
MB
Mass
MC
1
Double
1
Double
1
block blocks block blocks block
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
0.27
1.5
Note) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-402.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
If a large moment is applied to a system consisting of one block on one axis, the labyrinth end seal may contact the rail,
and it may affect the motion.
If a moment is applied, we recommend using two axes with two blocks per axis.
Contact THK for details.
OptionsA1-473
A1-401
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR-M1VV
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
HSR15M1R-VV
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
60
20
1240
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-402
Unit: mm
506E
HSR-M1VV
LM Guide
A1-403
506E
SR-MS
LM Guide Oil-Free for Special Environments Model SR-MS
LM rail:
THK-EX50 (martensitic stainless steel)
LM block:
THK-EX50 (martensitic stainless steel)
Ball:
SUS440C + Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film
90
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-545
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-73
Accuracy Standards
A1-86
A1-459
A1-467
A1-468
A1-484
A1-404
506E
SR-MS
Structure and Features
Greatest advantage
This achieves
Low outgassing
As a result
Item
Friction coefficient
(reference value)
Wear resistance
Hardness
Service environment
0.04
Vacuum
Soft metal
0.05 to 0.5
Atmosphere,
vacuum
0.08 to 0.15
Atmosphere,
H2O
0.02 to 0.05
Atmosphere,
vacuum
[Low Friction]
The Oil-Free LM Guide for special environments exerts superbly low frictional properties in atmospheric to vacuum environments.
0.8
Friction coefficient
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
50
100
150
200
A1-405
LM Guide
[Structural Characteristics]
1. Uses stainless steel
All components are composed of parts for
special environments such as stainless steel.
2. Degreased and cleaned
Special solvent is used to de-grease this
model.
3. Does not use grease
Use of highly reliable dry lubricant S-compound film for stainless steel balls achieves
grease-free lubrication.
506E
40
30
20
10
0
10
15
Traveling time (hr)
20
50
25
Amount of particles
generated / l (200 s)
Amount of particles
generated / l (200 s)
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
15
20
Traveling time (hr)
25
Oil-Free LM Guide
Conventional dry lubrication
2000
1500
950
1370
1720
Contact surface pressure of a ball (MPa)
* The durable life represents the value at a point from which the Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film is no longer effective.Note
that the durable life differs from the rated service life of the LM Guide.
A1-406
Equipment
506E
SR-MS
Types and Features
Model SR-MSW
Specification TableA1-408
LM Guide
Model SR-MSV
Specification TableA1-408
A1-407
506E
T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
Model No.
SR15MSV
SR15MSW
SR20MSV
SR20MSW
Height
LM block dimensions
Width Length
24
34
28
42
L
36.6
53.2
41.3
60.2
B
26
32
26
32
S
M47
M58
L1
22.9
39.5
27.8
46.7
H3
5.7
19.5
4.5
7.2
22
SR15MSV 1 CS + 340L Y P -
Model No.
LM rail length
(mm)
Radial clearance Applied to
only 15
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Symbol for
No. of rails used on the
same plane (*3)
A1-408
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SR-MS
Type
2-S
Type W
L1
L1
4-S
LM Guide
d2
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
Permissible
load
LM rail dimensions
Permissible moment Nm
MA
Width
MB
Mass
MC
Length
Height Pitch
F0
W1
W2
0.05
M1
d1d2h
Max
400
15
9.5 12.5
60
3.564.5
20
11
60
69.58.5
15.5
400
N
320
570
430
750
LM
block
LM
rail
kg/m
1
Double
1
Double
block blocks block blocks
1
block
kg
0.80
2.35
1.35
3.76
1.16
2.08
2.05
3.59
0.12
0.2
0.2
0.3
5.43
13.0
8.44
19.9
0.51
1.47
0.87
2.36
3.60
8.31
5.52
12.6
1.2
2.1
Note1) The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-410 .)
For the durability of the Oil-Free LM Guide for special environment, contact THK.
The value of permissible load F0 represents the permissible value for the strength of the dry lubricant S-compound film.
Since the service life of the S film may vary according to the environment or the operating conditions, be sure to evaluate and validate the life under the service conditions and operating conditions at the customer.
Note2) For model SR15, two types of rails with different mounting hole dimensions are offered (see Table1).
When, replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to the mounting hole dimension of the LM rail.
Contact THK for details.
Standard rail
Semi-Standard
rail
OptionsA1-473
A1-409
506E
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SR-MS
Model No.
SR15MS
SR20MS
160
220
280
340
400
220
280
340
400
Standard pitch
F
60
60
20
20
Max length
400
400
Note1) If you desire a rail length larger than the maximum length, contact THK.
Note2) A connected-rail type is not available.
A1-410
Unit: mm
506E
SR-MS
LM Guide
A1-411
506E
Endplate
End seal
Retainer plate
Roller cage
Roller
45
45
45
Magnified view of the circulation path
45
Cross section
Caged Roller LM Guide is a roller guide that achieves low-friction, smooth motion and long-term
maintenance-free operation by using a roller cage. In addition, to ensure ultra-high rigidity, rollers
with low elastic deformation are used as the rolling elements and the roller diameter and the roller
length are optimized.
Furthermore, the lines of rollers are placed at a contact angle of 45 so that the same rated load is
applied in all (radial, reverse and lateral) directions.
A1-412
506E
Roller cage
Roller
LM Guide
Grease pocket
[Smooth Motion]
60
50
40
30
SRG45LC
2.26N
20
10
0
100
200
300
400
Stroke(mm)
500
[Conditions]
Feeding speed: 10mm/s
Applied load: no load (one block)
Feeding device (model KR)
Measurement direction
Load cell
A1-413
506E
A sufficient amount
of grease remains
Roller
Stroke
A1-414
506E
[Ultra-high Rigidity]
radial clearance C0
LM Guide
Radial rigidity
Radial rigidity
12
Deflection (m)
10
8
6
4
SRG45LC
(with a caged roller)
2
0
10
15
20
Radial load (kN)
25
30
Deflection (m)
20
15
Conventional roller guide
#45
10
5
0
SRG45LC
(with a caged roller)
0
10
15
20
Reverse radial load (kN)
25
30
Horizontal rigidity
Horizontal rigidity
Table bolt fixed
Deflection (m)
40
Conventional roller guide
#45
30
20
SRG45LC
(with a caged roller)
10
0
0
10
15
20
Horizontal load (kN)
25
30
A1-415
506E
SRG
Caged Roller LM Guide Ultra-high Rigidity Type Model SRG
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Caged roller
45
45
45
45
Roller
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-462
A1-420
A1-484
A1-416
506E
SRG
Structure and Features
SRN is an ultra-high rigidity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion
and achieve long-term maintenance-free operation.
A1-417
LM Guide
[Ultra-high Rigidity]
A higher rigidity is achieved by using highly rigid rollers as the rolling elements and having the overall roller length more than 1.5 times greater than the roller diameter.
506E
Specification TableA1-422
Model SRG-20LA
Specification TableA1-422
Model SRG-C
The flange of the LM block has tapped holes.
Can be mounted from the top or the bottom.
Used in places where the table cannot have
through holes for mounting bolts.
A1-418
Specification TableA1-422
506E
SRG
Model SRG-LC
Specification TableA1-422
Model SRG-R
LM Guide
Specification TableA1-426
Model SRG-LR
Specification TableA1-426
A1-419
506E
Unit: mm
Normal
C1
C0
0.005
0.008
0.009
0.011
0.014
0.017
0.021
0.027
0.040
0.045
0.003
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.010
0.013
0.014
0.018
0.027
0.031
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.009
0.011
0.014
0.021
0.024
Tolerance
for parallelism P
Radial clearance
Model No.
SRG 15
SRG 20
SRG 25
SRG 30
SRG 35
SRG 45
SRG 55
SRG 65
SRG 85
SRG 100
Fig.1
Table2 Error Allowance in Vertical Level (X) between Two Rails
Radial clearance
Permissible error on the
mounting surface X
XX1 X2
Unit: mm
Normal
C1
C0
0.00030a
0.00021a
0.00011a
X2
Example of calculation
Rail span
when a 500mm
Error allowance
of the mounting
surface
X 0.0003 500
0.15
X1
a
Fig.2
0.000036b
b
Fig.3
A1-420
Unit: mm
506E
SRG
LM Guide
A1-421
506E
C2
C
4-S1
( H)
E
L
L1
d2
e0
2-S2
( H)
4- D0
f0
T
K
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
LM block dimensions
SRG 15A
SRG 20A
SRG 20LA
SRG 25C
SRG 25LC
SRG 30C
SRG 30LC
SRG 35C
SRG 35LC
SRG 45C
SRG 45LC
SRG 55C
SRG 55LC
SRG 65LC
24
30
36
42
48
60
70
90
47 69.2
86.2
106.2
95.5
70
115.1
111
90
135
125
100
155
155
120
190
185
140
235
170 303
63
38
53
57
72
82
100
116
142
C2
Grease
nipple
L1
T1
e0
f0
D0
30
(8) 20
4.5
2.9 PB107
40
10 (10) 25.4
4.5
2.9 PB107
12
26 M5 (4.3) 8 7.5 45
58
35 M6 (5.4) 10 9
78
65.5
45 40 M8 6.8
85.1
75
52 44 M10 8.5
99
82.2
62 52 M10 8.5
112.2
107
80 60 M12 10.5
142
129.2
95 70 M14 12.5
179.2
110 82 M16 14.5 229.8
14
37 6.5 12
11.5 10
42 6.5 12
5.2 B-M6F
14.5 15
52
10
16
5.2 B-PT1/8
17.5 18
60
12
16
19.5 20 78.5 17
16
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-422
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRG
W
d2
T T1
K
M1
L
L1
4- D0
e0
f0
H3
W2
C2
C
d1
W1
F
Models SRG25 to 65C/LC
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
W1
0
-0.05
15
16
15.5
30
4.57.55.3
3000
4.6
20
21.5
20
30
69.58.5
3000
4.5
23
23.5
23
30
7119
3000
28
31
26
40
91412
3000
34
33
30
40
91412
3000
45
37.5
37
52.5
142017
3090
10
53
43.5
43
60
162320
3060
11.5
63
53.5
54
75
182622
3000
H3
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
11.3
21
26.7
27.9
34.2
39.3
48.3
59.1
76
91.9
115
131
167
278
25.8
46.9
63.8
57.5
75
82.5
108
119
165
192
256
266
366
599
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.21
0.48
0.88
0.641
1.07
1.02
1.76
1.66
3.13
3.49
6.13
5.82
10.8
22.7
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
1.58
2.58
3.6
4.4
6.9
11.6
15.8
23.7
Note1) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple* are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the block.
THK will mount a grease nipple per your request. Therefore, do not use the greasing hole of the top face and the side
nipple pilot hole for purposes other than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-428.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
Note2) If the mounting holes (4 holes) of the LM block are back spot-faced, these models can be mounted on the table from
the top and the bottom as with model SRG-C.
The value in the parentheses represents a dimension if the mounting hole is back spot-faced.
Contact THK for details.
OptionsA1-473
A1-423
LM Guide
6-S
H through
506E
Model SRG-LC
9-S
H throughNote2
E
d2
T1 T
K
4- D0
f0
M1
d1
H3
W2
e0
L1
C
W
B
W1
Model SRG85LC
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Model No.
M
SRG 85LC
SRG 100LC
L1
T1
e0
f0
D0
35
38
94
104
22
23
16
16
15
15
22
23
8.2 B-PT1/8
8.2 B-PT1/4
SRG85 LC 2 KK C0 +2610L P T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-424
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRG
b
3-S
HNote3
d2
T1 T
K
M1
f0
d1
H3
W1
W2
4- D0
e0
L1
C
W
B
Model SRG100LC
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
W1
0
-0.05
16 85
16 100
H3
Height Pitch
MA
Length
C0
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
65
75
71
77
90
105
243528
263932
3000
3000
239
319
45.3
60
239
319
51.9
72.3
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
26.2 35.7
37.6 46.8
Note1) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple** are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the block.
See A1-429 for details.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-428.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with
each other
The removing/mounting jig is not provided as standard. When desiring to use it, contact THK.
Note2) The LM block mounting holes (9 holes) of SRG85LC are all through holes (full thread).
Note3) The LM block mounting holes in part (a) (6 holes) of SRG100LC are through holes (full thread).
The LM block mounting holes in part (b) (3 holes) have effective thread depth of 22 mm.
OptionsA1-473
A1-425
LM Guide
a
6-S
H throughNote3
506E
4-S1
2-S2
L
L1
d2
e0
f0
T
K
M1
H3
d1
F
W1
W2
4- D0
LM block dimensions
SRG 15V
SRG 20V
SRG 20LV
SRG 25R
SRG 25LR
SRG 30R
SRG 30LR
SRG 35R
SRG 35LR
SRG 45R
SRG 45LR
SRG 55R
SRG 55LR
SRG 65LV
Grease
nipple
M
24
34
26
30
44
40
48
45
60
55
70
70
86
80
100
90
126
69.2
86.2
106.2
95.5
115.1
111
135
125
155
155
190
185
235
303
26
36
50
35
50
40
60
50
72
60
80
75
95
120
32
35
40
50
60
75
76
M4
5 7.5
M5
M6
M8 10
M8 12
M10 20
M12 18
M16 20
L1
e0
f0
D0
45
58
78
65.5
85.1
75
99
82.2
112.2
107
142
129.2
179.2
229.8
20
4.5
2.9
PB107
25.4
4.5
2.9
PB107
12
10.4 5.2
B-M6F
12
12
10.5 5.2
B-M6F
18.5 49 13.5 12
13
5.2
24.5 62
20
17
5.2 B-PT1/8
27.5 70
22
16
19.5 78.5 17
16
40
9.5
16
B-M6F
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for LM
rail jointed use
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
Accuracy
symbol
(*3)
Light preload (C1)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Medium preload (C0)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-426
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRG
6-S
d2
T
K
L
L1
4- D0
e0
f0
h
M1
H3
W2
d1
W1
Height Pitch
Width
H3
4
W1
W2
0
-0.05
15
9.5
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
MA
Length
C0
M1
d1d2h
Max
kN
kN
15.5
30
4.57.55.3
3000
11.3
21
26.7
27.9
34.2
39.3
48.3
59.1
76
91.9
115
131
167
278
25.8
46.9
63.8
57.5
75
82.5
108
119
165
192
256
266
366
599
4.6
20
12
20
30
69.58.5
3000
4.5
23
12.5
23
30
7119
3000
28
16
26
40
91412
3000
34
18
30
40
91412
3000
45
20.5
37
52.5
142017
3090
10
53
23.5
43
60
162320
3060
11.5
63
31.5
54
75
182622
3000
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
0.21
0.48
0.88
0.641
1.07
1.02
1.76
1.66
3.13
3.49
6.13
5.82
10.8
22.7
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
1.58
2.58
3.6
4.4
6.9
11.6
15.8
23.7
Note) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple* are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign
material from entering the block.
THK will mount a grease nipple per your request. Therefore, do not use the greasing hole of the top face and the side
nipple pilot hole for purposes other than mounting a grease nipple.
In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-428.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-427
LM Guide
506E
F
L0
Table4 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRG
Model No.
LM rail
standard
length (LO)
Unit: mm
SRG 15 SRG 20 SRG 25 SRG 30 SRG 35 SRG 45 SRG 55 SRG 65 SRG 85 SRG 100
160
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1360
1480
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
220
280
340
400
460
520
580
640
700
760
820
940
1000
1060
1120
1180
1240
1300
1360
1420
1480
1540
1600
1720
1840
1960
2080
2200
2320
2440
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
1530
1890
2250
2610
1340
1760
2180
2600
Standard
pitch F
30
30
30
40
40
52.5
60
75
90
105
20
20
20
20
20
22.5
30
35
45
40
Max length
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3090
3060
3000
3000
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-428
506E
SRG
Greasing Hole
A1-429
LM Guide
506E
D2 depth d2
e1
D0
(M6 pilot hole)
Side nipple
e0
f0
Unit: mm
e0
f0
D0
Applicable
nipple
D2
(O-ring)
e1
d2
2.9
PB107
9.2
(P6)
0.5
5.5
1.5
2.9
PB107
9.2
(P6)
0.5
6.5
1.5
2.9
PB107
9.2
(P6)
0.5
6.5
1.5
6.4
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.5
1.5
10.4
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
4.5
1.5
7.5
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
1.4
10.5
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
3.4
1.4
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
1.4
13
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
7.4
1.4
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
1.4
17
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
10.4
1.4
8.5
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
11
1.4
18.5
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
10.4
11
1.4
9
9
15
15
13.5
13.5
22
23
5.2
5.2
8.2
8.2
M6F
M6F
PT1/8
PT1/8
10.2
10.2
13
13
(P7)
(P7)
(P10)
(P10)
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
10
10
10
10
1.4
1.4
1
1
Note) The greasing interval is longer than that of full-roller types because of the roller cage effect. However, the actual greasing interval may vary depending on the service environment, such as a high load and high speed. Contact THK for details.
A1-430
506E
SRG
LM Guide
A1-431
506E
SRN
Caged Roller LM Guide Ultra-high Rigidity Type (Low Center of Gravity) Model SRN
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45
45
45
45
Roller
Caged roller
Cross section
* For the caged roller, see A1-412.
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-77
A1-462
A1-435
A1-484
A1-432
506E
SRN
Structure and Features
SRN is an ultra-high rigidity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion
and achieve long-term maintenance-free operation.
A1-433
LM Guide
[Ultra-high Rigidity]
A higher rigidity is achieved by using highly rigid rollers as the rolling elements and having the overall roller length more than 1.5 times greater than the roller diameter.
506E
Model SRN-C
Specification TableA1-436
Model SRN-LC
Specification TableA1-436
Model SRN-R
Specification TableA1-438
Model SRN-LR
The LM block has the same cross-sectional shape
as model SRN-R, but has a longer overall LM
block length (L) and a greater rated load.
A1-434
Specification TableA1-438
506E
SRN
Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface
Unit: mm
Normal
C1
C0
0.014
0.017
0.021
0.027
0.010
0.013
0.014
0.018
0.007
0.009
0.011
0.014
Tolerance
for parallelism P
Radial clearance
Model No.
SRN 35
SRN 45
SRN 55
SRN 65
Fig.1
Table2 Error Allowance in Vertical Level (X) between Two Rails
Radial clearance
Permissible error on the
mounting surface X
XX1 X2
Unit: mm
Normal
C1
C0
0.00030a
0.00021a
0.00011a
X2
Example of calculation
Rail span
when a 500mm
Error allowance
of the mounting
surface
X 0.0003 500
0.15
X1
a
Fig.2
Unit: mm
0.000036b
b
Fig.3
A1-435
LM Guide
The caged roller LM Guide Model SRG features high rigidity since it uses rollers as its rolling element and it also features a cage which prevents the rollers from skewing. However, high machining
accuracy is required in the mounting surface. If the error on the mounting surface is large, it will affect the rolling resistance and the service life. The following shows the maximum permissible value
according to the radial clearance.
506E
T1 T
K
H3
W2
W1
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
M
C2
L1
T1
e0
f0
D0
H3
5.2 B-M6F
SRN 35C
SRN 35LC
44 100
125
82
155
62
52 M10 8.5
82.2
7.5 10
112.2
38 6.5 12
SRN 45C
SRN 45LC
52 120
155
100 80
190
60 M12 10.5
107
7.5 15
142
45
SRN 55C
SRN 55LC
63 140
185
116 95
235
70 M14 12.5
129
10.5 18
179.2
53
16
10 9.8 5.2
PT1/8
10
SRN 65LC
65
14
16
PT1/8 11.5
13 5.2
SRN45 C 2 KK C0 +1160L P T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-436
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRN
C2
C
E
d2
LM Guide
6-S
( H through)
L
L1
4- D0
e0
f0
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
34
33
30
40
91412
3000
10.1
17
1.66
3.13
10.1
17
2.39
3.31
1.6
2
6.9
45
37.5
36
52.5
142017
3090
20
32.2
3.49
6.13
20
32.2
4.98
6.64
3
3.6
11.3
53
43.5
43
60
162320
3060
33
57
5.82
10.8
33
57
8.19
11.2
4.9
6.4
15.8
63
53.5
49
75
182622
3000
120
22.7
120
22.1
12.7
21.3
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Note) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the block.
See A1-441 for details.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-440.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-437
506E
T
K
H3
W1
W2
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
M
SRN 35R
SRN 35LR
44
70
125
155
50
50
72
M89
SRN 45R
SRN 45LR
52
86
155
190
60
60
80
M1011
SRN 55R
SRN 55LR
63
100
185
235
SRN 65LR
75
126 303
L1
e0
f0
D0
82.2
7.5
112.2
38
6.5
12
5.2
B-M6F
107
142
45
12
8.5
7.6
5.2
B-M6F
75
129
75
M1213
10.5 53
179.2
95
16
10
9.8
5.2
PT1/8
10
76
14
16
13
5.2
PT1/8
11.5
7.5
H3
SRN45 LR 2 KK C0 +1200L P T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
Contamination
protection
accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same
rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-77. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
A1-438
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRN
E
d2
LM Guide
6-S
L
L1
4- D0
e0
f0
h
M1
d1
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Height Pitch
Width
MA
Length
C0
kN
kN
MB
MC
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
W1
0
-0.05
W2
M1
d1d2h
Max
34
18
30
40
91412
3000
10.1
17
1.66
3.13
10.1
17
2.39
3.31
1.1
1.4
6.9
45
20.5
36
52.5
142017
3090
20
32.2
3.49
6.13
20
32.2
4.98
6.64
1.9
2.5
11.3
53
23.5
43
60
162320
3060
33
57
5.82
10.8
33
57
8.19
11.2
3.2
4.5
15.8
63
31.5
49
75
182622
3000
120
22.7
120
22.1
9.4
21.3
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Note) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the block.
See A1-441 for details.
The maximum length under Length indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See A1-440.)
Static permissible moment: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
OptionsA1-473
A1-439
506E
L0
Table4 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRN
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (LO)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SRN 35
SRN 45
SRN 55
SRN 65
280
360
440
520
600
680
760
840
920
1000
1080
1160
1240
1320
1400
1480
1560
1640
1720
1800
1880
1960
2040
2200
2360
2520
2680
2840
3000
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
40
20
3000
52.5
22.5
3090
60
30
3060
75
35
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-440
506E
SRN
Greasing Hole
[Greasing Hole for Model SRN]
Model SRN allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
standard types is not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the LM block.
When using the greasing hole, contact THK.
D2 depth 1
D0
(M6 pilot hole)
e1
Side nipple
e0
f0
Unit: mm
Model No.
35C
35LC
35R
35LR
45C
45LC
45R
SRN 45LR
55C
55LC
55R
55LR
65LC
65LR
e0
f0
D0
Applicable
nipple
7.0
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
7.0
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
8.5
7.6
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
8.5
7.6
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
10
9.8
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
11
10
9.8
5.2
M6F
10.2
(P7)
0.4
11
9
9
13
13
5.2
5.2
M6F
M6F
10.2
10.2
(P7)
(P7)
0.4
0.4
10
10
D2
(O-ring)
e1
Note) The greasing interval is longer than that of full-roller types because of the roller cage effect. However, the actual greasing interval may vary depending on the service environment, such as a high load and high speed. Contact THK for details.
A1-441
LM Guide
506E
SRW
Caged Roller LM Guide Ultra-high Rigidity Type (Wide) Model SRW
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Pipe
45
45
Retainer plate
Caged roller
Roller
45
45
Cross section
Point of Selection
Point of Design
A1-10
A1-450
Options
A1-473
Model No.
A1-537
Precautions on Use
A1-543
A24-1
B1-89
A1-43
A1-58
A1-60
Radial Clearance
A1-72
Accuracy Standards
A1-85
A1-462
A1-445
A1-484
A1-442
506E
SRW
Structure and Features
Based on Caged Roller LM Guide model SRG, this model has a wider rail and two rows of LM rail
mounting holes to achieve high mounting strength and mounting stability. SRW is an ultra-high rigidity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion and achieve long-term
maintenance-free operation.
Slant tan
0.0015
0.001
SRG45LR
0.0005
SRW70LR
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
Applied moment M (kNm)
Fig.1 Result of Comparison between Models SRW and SRG in Moment Rigidity in the Rolling Direction (Mc Moment)
A1-443
LM Guide
[Ultra-high Rigidity]
Since it has a wide rail and can be secured on the table using two rows of mounting bolts, the
mounting strength is significantly increased. In addition, since the crosswise raceway distance (L) is
large, model SRW is structurally strong against a moment load (Mc moment) in the rolling direction.
Furthermore, model SRW uses rollers that show little elastic deformation as its rolling elements, and
the overall length of each roller is 1.5 times greater than the diameter, thus to increase the rigidity.
506E
Grease pocket
Fig.3
Model SRW-LR
The LM block has tapped holes.
A1-444
Specification TableA1-446
506E
SRW
Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface
The Caged Roller LM Guide Model SRW features high rigidity since the raceway is made up of rollers,
preventing roller skew due to the roller cage. However, high machining accuracy is required in the mounting surface. If the error on the mounting surface is large, it will affect the rolling resistance and the service
life. The following shows the maximum permissible value (limit value) according to the radial clearance.
Model No.
Normal
C1
C0
SRW 70
0.013
0.009
0.007
SRW 85
0.016
0.011
0.008
SRW 100
0.020
0.014
0.011
SRW 130
0.026
0.018
0.014
SRW 150
0.030
0.021
0.016
Tolerance
for parallelism P
Radial clearance
Fig.4
Table3 Error in Level (Y) in the Axial Direction
Unit: mm
Radial clearance
Normal
C1
Accuracy of the
mounting surface
C0
0.000036b
Accuracy of the
0.00020a 0.00014a 0.000072a
mounting surface X
X=X1+X2
X1: Level difference on the rail mounting surface
X2: Level difference on the block mounting surface
Example of calculation
When the rail span :
a=500mm
Accuracy of the mounting surface
X=0.0002500
=0.1
X2
X1
a
Fig.5
b
Fig.6
A1-445
LM Guide
506E
Model SRW-LR
W3
B1 B
8-S
(E)
L
L1
d2
M1
H3
d1
W1
W2
4- D0
f0
e0
Outer dimensions
LM block dimensions
Grease
nipple
M
B1
L1
e0
f0
D0
H3
19
5.2 B-PT1/8
SRW 70LR
70
34
80 M1020 142 20
62
20
16
SRW 85LR
80
95 M1219 179.2 28
70
22
16
SRW 100LR
16
26
SRW 130LR
16
15
42
8.2 B-PT1/8 16
SRW 150LR
15
53
8.2 B-PT1/4 16
114
25
Model number
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-72. (*3) See A1-85. (*4) See A1-13.
A1-446
https://tech.thk.com
506E
SRW
d2
T
K
H3
W3
W1
e0
4- D0
f0
M1
W2
L
L1
C
12-S
d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions
Width
Height Pitch
W1
W2
0
-0.05
W3
M1
d1d2h
MA
Length
C0
Max
kN
kN
MB
MC
1 Double 1 Double 1
block blocks block blocks block
Mass
LM
block
LM
rail
kg
kg/m
70 32.5 28
37 52.5 1117.514
3090
115
256
6.13
32.2
6.13
32.2
10.2
6.3
18.6
85
40
32
43
60
142017
3060
167
366
10.8
57
10.8
57
17.5
11.0
26.7
100
50
38
54
75
162320
3000
278
599
22.7
120
22.7
120
33.9
21.6
35.9
239
74.2
41.7
61.0
319 101.6
65.1
74.4
130
65
52
71
90
182622
3000
497
990
45.3
239
45.3
150
75
60
77
105 243528
3000
601
1170
60
319
60
OptionsA1-473
A1-447
LM Guide
W
B
B1
506E
G
L0
Table4 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRW
Model No.
LM rail standard
length (L0)
Standard pitch F
G
Max length
Unit: mm
SRW 70
SRW 85
SRW 100
SRW 130
SRW 150
570
675
780
885
990
1095
1200
1305
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2040
2145
2250
2355
2460
2565
2670
2775
2880
2985
52.5
22.5
3090
780
900
1020
1140
1260
1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
2220
2340
2460
2580
2700
2820
2940
3060
1270
1570
2020
2620
1530
1890
2250
2610
1340
1760
2180
2600
60
30
3060
75
35
3000
90
45
3000
105
40
3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
A1-448
506E
SRW
Greasing Hole
[Greasing Hole for Model SRW]
Model SRW allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole
of standard types is not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the LM
block. When using the greasing hole, contact THK.
LM Guide
D2 depth 2
e1
4- D0
Side nipple
e0
V
f0
Unit: mm
Model No.
70
85
SRW 100
130
150
Applicable
nipple
M6F
M6F
M6F
PT1/8
PT1/8
D2
13
13
13
13
13
e1
2.7
9.9
10.1
10
10
Note) The greasing interval is longer than that of full-roller types because of the roller cage effect. However, the actual greasing interval may vary depending on the service environment, such as a high load and high speed. Contact THK for details.
A1-449
506E
Point of Design
LM Guide
A1-450
506E
Point of Design
Designing the Guide System
Lateral load
LM Guide
Load direction
Model SHS
Model SSR
When high rigidity is required in all directions and the installation space is limited in height
Load direction
Lateral load
A1-451
506E
Single-rail configuration
Load direction
Lateral load
Radial load
Model SHW
When the minimum possible height of the equipment is allowed (Adjustable preload type)
Load direction
Lateral load
Model HR
Radial load
When a medium load is applied and the mounting surface is rough (Preload, self-adjusting type)
Load direction
Lateral load
Radial load
A1-452
506E
Point of Design
Designing the Guide System
Single-rail configuration
Triple-rail configuration
LM block reference surface
Double-rail configuration
Model HSR-R
Model HSR-YR
LM rail reference surface
Model HSR-YR
Model HSR-R
Model HR
Model CF
(Cam follower)
Model HSR-R
Model HSR-YR
A1-453
LM Guide
506E
Multi-rail configuration
A1-454
506E
Point of Design
Designing the Guide System
A1-455
LM Guide
LM Guides are categorized into groups of types by mounting space and structure: a group of types
to be mounted with bolts from the top, and another of types to be mounted from the bottom. LM rails
are also divided into types secured with bolts and those secured with clamps (model JR). This wide
array of types allows you to make a choice according to the application.
There are several ways of mounting the LM Guide as shown in Table1. When the machine is subject to vibrations that may cause the LM rail(s) or LM blocks to loosen, we recommend the securing
method indicated by Fig.1 on A1-456 . (If 2 or more rails are used in parallel, only the LM
block on the master rail should be secured in the crosswise direction.) If this method is not applicable for a structural reason, hammer in knock pins to secure the LM block(s) as shown in Table2 on
A1-456 When using knock pins, machine the top/bottom surfaces of the LM rail by 2 to 3 mm
using a carbide end mill before drilling the holes since the surfaces are hardened.
506E
(a) Secured only with the side reference surface of the rail
(b) Secured only with the side reference surface of the block
Table
Base
LM rail set screw
Master rail side
A1-456
Subsidiary-rail side
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
[Corner Shape]
If the corner on the surface on which the LM rail
or LM block is to be mounted is machined to
be shaped R, which is greater than the chamfer dimension of the LM rail or LM block, then
the rail or the block may not closely contact its
reference surface. Therefore, when designing
a mounting surface, it is important to carefully
read the description on the corner shape of
the subject model . (Fig.2)
r
r
r
B
Fig.2
A
Fig.3
A1-457
LM Guide
If particularly high accuracy is required for the machine to which an LM Guide is to be mounted, it is
necessary to mount the LM rail with high accuracy. To achieve the desired accuracy, be sure to design the mounting surface while taking the following points into account.
506E
W2
W1
H1
H2
B
Fig.4
[Dimensional Tolerance between the Reference Surface and the Mounting Hole]
If the dimensional tolerance between the reference surface of the LM rail or the LM block and
W3
the mounting hole is too large, the rail or the
block may not closely contact the reference surD
face when mounted on the base.
Normally, the tolerance should be within 0.1
mm depending on the model. (Fig.5)
C
Fig.5
W3
D
A1-458
C
Fig.6
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
r
r
H2
r
H 1 H3
r
Shoulder for the LM Block (LM casing)
Fig.7
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
[Model SR-MS]
Model
No.
15
20
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
0.5
Unit: mm
Shoulder
Maximum
height for shoulder height
the LM rail for the LM block
H2
H3
H1
3.8
4
5.8
5
5
6
5.5
5
7
8
6
9.5
9
6
11.5
10
8
12.5
11
8
13.5
12
10
15
8
12
18.5
10
15
19
12
20
15
12
20
22
Unit: mm
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for the
the LM rail LM block
H2
H1
3.8
4
5
5
[Model JR]
Model
No.
Unit: mm
Corner radius
r(max)
1
1
1
1.5
25
35
45
55
Shoulder height
for the LM block
H2
5
6
8
10
[Model CSR]
Model
No.
15
20
25
30
35
45
Unit: mm
Shoulder height
Corner radius
for the LM rail
r(max)
H1
0.5
3
0.5
3.5
1
5
1
5
1
6
1
8
[Model NSR-TBC]
H3
4.5
6
Model
No.
20
25
30
40
50
70
Corner
radius
r(max)
1
1
1
1
1
1
H3
3.5
4
5.5
7
7.5
10
Unit: mm
Shoulder
Shoulder
height for the height for the
LM rail
LM block
H1
H2
5
5
6
6
7
6
7
8
7
8
7
10
H3
5.5
6.5
9
10.5
8
9.5
A1-459
LM Guide
Normally, the mounting base for the LM rail and the LM block has a reference-surface on the side
face of the shoulder of the base in order to allow easy installation and highly accurate positioning.
The height of the datum shoulder varies with model numbers. See A1-459 to A1-465 for
details.
The corner of the mounting shoulder must be machined to have a recess, or machined to be smaller
than the corner radius r, to prevent interference with the chamfer of the LM rail or the LM block.
The corner radius varies with model numbers. See A1-459 to A1-465 for details.
506E
r
r
H2
H3
H1
r
r
Shoulder for the LM Rail
Fig.8
[Model SHS]
Model
No.
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
65
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
Unit: mm
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H2
H1
2.5
4
3.5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
7.5
8
10
10
15
10
[Models SVR/SVS]
Model
No.
25
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Model
No.
H3
3
4.6
5.8
7
7.5
8.9
12.7
19
Unit: mm
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H2
H1
4
5
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
10
10
10
12
12
14
14
[Model SCR]
r(max)
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1.5
[Models NR/NRS]
25X
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
5
7W
H3
3
4.6
5.8
7
7.5
8.9
19
Unit: mm
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H2
H1
4
5
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
10
10
10
12
12
14
14
16
16
[Model MX]
Model
No.
A1-460
Corner radius
15
20
25
30
35
45
65
Model
No.
H3
5.5
7
9
11.6
14
15
15
17
Unit: mm
Shoulder
height for the
LM rail
H1
2.5
3.5
5
5
6
7.5
15
H3
5.5
7
9
11.5
14
15
15
17
20
Unit: mm
Corner radius
for the LM rail
r(max)
0.1
0.1
Shoulder
height for the
LM rail
H1
1.2
1.7
H3
1.5
2
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
r2
r
r2
H2
H2
r1
LM Guide
H3 H 1
r
r
r1
H1
H3
Fig.9
[Model HCR]
Corner
Corner Shoulder Maximum
Model radius for radius for height for shoulder height
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail for the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
12
0.8
0.5
2.6
6
15
0.5
0.5
3
4
25
1
1
5
5
35
1
1
6
6
45
1
1
8
8
65
1.5
1.5
10
10
[Model HMG]
Corner
Corner Shoulder Maximum
Model radius for radius for height for shoulder height
the
LM
rail
the LM block the LM rail for the LM block
No.
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
15
0.5
0.5
3
4
25
1
1
5
5
35
1
1
6
6
45
1
1
8
8
65
1.5
1.5
10
10
Fig.10
Unit: mm
H3
2.1
2.2
3.1
4.7
4
5.5
7
7.5
10
13
14
16
20.5
20
22.5
Unit: mm
[Model EPF]
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Maximum
Model radius for radius for height for shoulder height
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail for the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
7M
0.2
0.4
1
3
9M
0.2
0.6
1
5
12M
0.5
0.6
1.5
6
15M
0.5
0.8
2.5
6.8
[Model HSR-YR]
Model
No.
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
65
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
Unit: mm
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H1
H2
3
4
3.5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
8
8
10
10
10
10
[Model HSR-M1VV]
H3
3.1
4.8
7
8.5
11.5
15
H3
1.5
1.5
2
3
H3
3.5
4
5.5
7
7.5
10
13
14
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Maximum
Model radius for radius for height for shoulder height
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail for the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
15
0.5
0.5
3
4
H3
4.3
Unit: mm
H3
3.5
5.5
7.5
11
16
A1-461
506E
r2
r2
H3
H2
H 1 r1
r1
Shoulder for the LM Rail
[Model SRG]
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
Model radius for radius for height for height for
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
65
85
100
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
2
1.5
2
2.5
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
8
9
12
12
4
5
5
5
6
8
10
10
14
16
[Model SRW]
H3
4
4.6
4.5
5
6
8
10
11.5
16
16
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
Model radius for radius for height for height for
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail the LM block
70
85
100
130
150
r1(max)
r2(max)
H1
H2
H3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
1.5
1.5
2
1.5
2
6
8
9
12
12
8
10
10
14
16
8
10
11.5
16
16
A1-462
[Model SRN]
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
Model radius for radius for height for height for
No. the LM rail the LM block the LM rail the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
35
45
55
65
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
1.5
1.5
2
5
6
8
8
6
8
10
10
H3
6
7
10
10
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
r
r
r
H2
H3 H1 r
Fig.13
Fig.12
[Model SSR]
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
Model
No.
Shoulder Maximum
Corner
height for shoulder height
radius
the LM rail for the LM block
r(max)
H1
H2
15 X
0.5
3.8
5.5
Model
No.
H3
4.5
0.3
20 X
0.5
7.5
0.3
25 X
5.5
6.8
0.4
30 X
11.5
9.5
0.4
35 X
16
11.5
0.4
12
14
17
21
27
35
50
60
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.8
0.8
1
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H2
H1
1.5
4
1.5
5
2
4
2.5
5
2.5
5
3.5
5
3
6
5
8
H3
2
2
2.5
3
3
4
3.4
6.5
Note) When closely contacting the LM block with the datum shoulder, the resin layer may stick out from the overall width of the
LM block by the dimension D. To avoid this, machine the datum shoulder to have a recess or limit the datum shoulders
height below the dimension H2.
A1-463
LM Guide
r H1 H3
r H2
506E
r
H2
H2
r
r
H1
H3 H 1
r
r
Fig.14
Fig.15
[Model HR]
[Model GSR]
Unit: mm
Model
No.
918
1123
1530
2042
2555
3065
3575
4085
50105
60125
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
Shoulder
height for
the LM rail
H1
5
6
8
11
13
16
18
21
26
31
Shoulder
height for
the LM block
H2
6
7
10
15
18
20
26
30
32
40
Unit: mm
Model
No.
15
20
25
30
35
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.6
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
Shoulder Shoulder
height for height for
the LM rail the LM block
H2
H1
7
7
9
8
11
11
11
13
13
14
H3
8
10.4
13.2
15
17.5
H3 H r
r
Fig.16
[Model GSR-R]
Unit: mm
Model
No.
25
30
35
A1-464
Corner
radius
r(max)
0.8
1.2
1.2
Shoulder
height for
the LM rail
H
4
4
4.5
H3
4.5
4.5
5.5
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
r2
r2
H3
LM Guide
H2
r1
H1
r1
Shoulder for the LM Rail
[Model SRS]
Model
No.
5M
5WM
7M
7WM
9X
9 WM/WN
12 M/N
12 WM/WN
15 M/N
15 WM/WN
20 M
25 M
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
radius for radius for height for height for
the LM rail the LM block the LM rail the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
0.1
0.3
1.2
2
0.1
0.2
1.2
2.5
0.1
0.2
0.9
3.3
0.1
0.1
1.4
3.8
0.1
0.3
1.1
4.5
0.1
0.5
2.5
4.9
0.3
0.2
1.5
5.7
0.3
0.3
2.5
5.7
0.3
0.4
2.2
6.5
0.3
0.3
2.2
6.5
0.3
0.5
3
8.7
0.5
0.5
4.5
10.5
Unit: mm
Model
No.
H3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.8
1.5
2.9
2
3
2.7
2.7
3.4
5
[Model RSR-Z]
3
5
7
9
12
15
20
3W
5W
7W
9W
12 W
14 W
15 W
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
radius for radius for height for height for
the LM rail the LM block the LM rail the LM block
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
0.1
0.3
0.8
1.2
0.1
0.3
1.2
2
0.1
0.5
1.2
3
0.3
0.5
1.9
3
0.3
0.3
1.4
4
0.3
0.3
2.3
5
0.5
0.5
5.5
5
0.1
0.3
0.7
2
0.1
0.3
1.2
2
0.1
0.1
1.7
3
0.1
0.1
3.9
3
0.3
0.3
3.7
4
0.3
0.3
3.2
5
0.3
0.3
3.7
5
H3
1
1.5
1.5
2.2
3
4
7.5
1
1.5
2
4.2
4
3.5
4
Unit: mm
Corner
Corner Shoulder Shoulder
Model radius for radius for height for height for
the
LM
rail
the LM block the LM rail the LM block
No.
r1(max) r2(max)
H1
H2
7Z
0.1
0.5
1.2
3
9Z
0.3
0.5
1.9
3
12 Z
0.3
0.3
2.1
4
15 Z
0.3
0.3
2.5
5
7 WZ
0.1
0.1
1.7
3
9 WZ
0.1
0.1
2.5
3
12 WZ
0.3
0.3
3
4
15 WZ
0.3
0.3
3
5
H3
1.5
2.2
2.4
3.4
2
2.9
3.4
3.4
A1-465
506E
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
8
10
12
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
65
85
100
120
150
18
20
27
30
35
45
55
70
85
100
115
10
12
15
18
20
22
30
35
40
50
60
75
90
110
130
13
16
20
25
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
140
[Model JR]
Unit: m
Model No.
25
35
45
55
100
200
300
400
A1-466
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
70
85
100
120
150
25
30
35
45
55
65
65
80
90
100
110
25
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
35
40
50
60
70
80
100
110
120
130
140
150
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
25
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
14
19
21
25
32
39
44
49
60
15
21
25
28
35
42
47
53
63
21
28
35
42
49
56
60
63
70
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
25
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
10
14
15
18
23
28
31
35
43
11
15
18
20
25
30
34
38
45
15
20
25
30
35
40
43
45
50
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
12
14
17
21
27
35
50
60
20
27
30
10
12
15
18
20
22
30
35
13
16
20
25
25
30
40
50
Unit: m
Model No.
3
5
7
9
12
14
15
20
25
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
Normal
clearance
3
5
6
6
8
10
2
2
3
4
9
10
10
13
15
11
15
18
25
30
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
918
1123
1530
2042
2555
3065
3575
4085
50105
60125
14
20
22
24
30
38
50
7
8
12
15
24
26
28
35
42
55
10
14
18
20
35
38
42
50
55
65
Unit: m
Model No.
15
20
25
30
35
30
40
50
60
70
Unit: m
Gothic-arch groove
Clearance CS
8
8
[Model HR]
Unit: m
Model No.
15
20
[Model NSR-TBC]
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance C1
Normal
clearance
20
25
30
40
50
70
40
50
60
70
80
90
50
70
80
90
110
130
A1-467
LM Guide
Model No.
Clearance
C0
[Model SR-MS]
506E
Unit: mm
Model No.
Flatness error
Model No.
Flatness error
5
7
9
12
15
20
25
0.015/200
0.025/200
0.035/200
0.050/200
0.060/200
0.070/200
0.070/200
3
5
7
9
12
14
15
20
7A
9A
12 A
15 A
20 A
0.012/200
0.015/200
0.025/200
0.035/200
0.050/200
0.060/200
0.060/200
0.110/200
0.100/200
0.160/200
0.200/200
0.250/200
0.300/200
[Model SR-MS]
Unit: mm
Model No.
Flatness error
15
20
0.020/200
0.020/200
A1-468
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
LM Guide
500
Fig.19 Error Allowance in Vertical Level (S) between Two Rails
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
8
10
12
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
65
85
100
120
150
50
70
90
120
140
170
200
240
280
320
360
11
16
20
85
85
85
110
150
170
210
250
290
330
370
410
40
50
65
130
130
130
170
210
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
25
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
35
45
60
70
85
100
110
120
140
43
55
75
85
105
125
135
145
165
65
85
105
125
150
175
188
200
225
[Model JR]
Unit: m
Model No.
25
35
45
55
400
500
800
1000
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
15
20
25
30
35
45
55
70
85
100
120
150
80
100
120
170
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
100
100
120
150
210
240
300
350
420
480
540
600
180
180
200
240
300
360
420
480
540
600
720
780
A1-469
506E
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
25
30
35
45
55
65
75
85
100
49
63
84
98
119
140
154
168
196
60
77
105
119
147
175
189
203
231
91
119
147
175
210
245
263
280
315
Gothic-arch groove
Model No.
Circular-arc
groove
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
Normal
clearance
6
12
20
20
30
40
15
20
25
35
50
60
60
70
80
160
200
250
300
350
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
12
14
17
21
27
35
50
60
70
90
120
11
16
20
85
85
85
110
150
40
50
65
130
130
130
170
210
3
5
7
9
12
14
15
20
25
A1-470
Unit: m
[Model HR]
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance
C0
Clearance
C1
Normal
clearance
918
1123
1530
2042
2555
3065
3575
4085
50105
60125
50
85
95
100
120
140
170
15
20
60
60
100
110
120
150
175
200
45
50
90
90
150
165
175
210
245
280
Unit: m
Model No.
15
20
25
30
35
240
300
360
420
480
[Model NSR-TBC]
Unit: m
Model No.
Clearance C1
Normal
clearance
20
25
30
40
50
70
210
240
270
360
420
480
300
360
420
540
600
660
[Model SR-MS]
Unit: mm
Model No.
Clearance CS
15
20
0.020/200
0.020/200
506E
Point of Design
Designing a Mounting Surface
LM Guide
Master LM Guide
Subsidiary LM Guide
Y2F123 KB
Master mark
Serial number
Fig.20 Master LM Guide and Subsidiary LM Guide
Reference surface
THK logo
Reference surface
Line marking
Master LM Guide
THK logo
Reference surface
Line marking
Subsidiary LM Guide
Fig.21 Markings on the Reference Surface
A1-471
506E
Fig.22 Serial Number Marking and Combined Use of an LM Rail and LM Blocks
Reference surface
A1
A2
B
B
A1-472
506E
LM Guide
Options
A1-473
506E
End
seal
Side
seal
Inner
seal
Caged Ball
Model No.
LaCS
Symbol
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
HH
YY
JJ
TT
SHS
15 to 65
SSR
15 to 35
SVR
25 to 65
SVS
25 to 65
SHW
12,14
17
21 to 50
5
7
9 to 25
SCR
15 to 65
EPS
7 to 15
SRS
*6
* 6
15 to 25
30 to 70
85 to 150
* 7
*7
25 to 65,100
*8
*8
*8
*8
75,85
25 to 65,100
*9
*9
*9
*9
75,85
12,14
17,21
27 to 60
8,10,12
15,20,25
30,35
45,55,65
85
100,120,150
HSR
Full-ball
End seal
Double seals
End seal Double seals
+ Side seal
+ Side seal
+ Side seal + Side seal (+ Inner seal) (+ Inner seal)
(+ Inner seal) (+ Inner seal) + Metal scraper + Metal scraper
SR
NR
NRS
HRW
*1 Model SHS
*2 Model SSR
*3 Model SHW
*4 Model SRS
*5 Model SCR
*6 Model HSR
*7 Model SR
*8 Model NR
A1-474
506E
Options
Table of Supported Options by Models
Corrosion Prevention
LiCS
End plate AP-HC, Stainless
Dedi- Dedicat- TappedQZ
Plate Cover Steel tape Dedicated Dedicated
+ Side seal
cated
ed LM hole LM Lubrica- with/without AP-C,
Steel
SV
SP
cap C
cap GC
(+ Inner seal)
side nipple AP-CF LM Guide
bellows Cover Rail Type
tor
LL
RR
GG
PP
TPH (dedicated
for HSR)
QZ
* 1
*2
*2
*3
*3
* 3
*4
*5
*6
*6
* 6
*6
*6
* 6
*6
*6
* 7
* 7
*7
*7
*8
*8
*8
*8
*9
*9
*9
*9
*10
*10
*10
*10
*9 Model NRS : DD,ZZ,KK and HH --- side nipple required for model NRS100, Plate cover SV --- applicable to models NRS35 to 75,
Dedicated cap C and GC --- not applicable to only model NRS75
*10 Model HRW: Dedicated cap C --- applicable to models HRW14 to 60, Dedicated cap GC --- applicable to models HRW35, 50, 60,
Dedicated bellows --- applicable to models HRW17 to 50, Stainless steel LM Guides --- applicable to models HRW12 to 35
A1-475
LM Guide (Options)
506E
Contamination Protection
End
seal
Side
seal
Inner
seal
Symbol
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
HH
YY
JJ
TT
2,3
3W,5,7,14,20
9,9W,12,12W,15,15W
7
9
9W,12,12W,15,15W
918 to 2555
Model No.
RSR
RSR-Z
HR
Full-ball
LaCS
3065 to 60125
GSR
15 to 35
GSR-R
25 to 35
15 to 25
*16
*16
CSR
30 to 45
MX
5,7
JR
25 to 55
12
15 to 65
*17
*17
HCR
HMG
15 to 65
20TBC to 30TBC
NSR
HSR-M1
SR-M1
40TBC to 70TBC
15M1
20M1 to 30M1
35M1
15 to 35
9,12W,15W
9W,12,15,20
HSR-M2
15 to 25
SRG
15
20,25,35
30,45,55,65
85,100
*19
35 to 65
70 to 100
130,150
RSR-M1
Caged Roller
End seal
Double seals
End seal Double seals
+ Side seal
+ Side seal
+ Side seal + Side seal (+ Inner seal) (+ Inner seal)
(+ Inner seal) (+ Inner seal) + Metal scraper + Metal scraper
Type
SRN
SRW
A1-476
506E
Options
Table of Supported Options by Models
Corrosion Prevention
LiCS
End plate AP-HC, Stainless
Dedi- Dedicat- TappedQZ
Plate Cover Steel tape Dedicated Dedicated
+ Side seal
cated
ed LM hole LM Lubrica- with/without AP-C,
Steel
SV
SP
cap C
cap GC
(+ Inner seal)
side nipple AP-CF LM Guide
bellows Cover Rail Type
tor
LL
RR
GG
PP
TPH (dedicated
for HSR)
QZ
*11
*11
*12
*13
*13
*13
*13
*14
*15
*16
*18
A1-477
LM Guide (Options)
506E
Item name
Purpose/location of use
End seal
End seal
End Seal
Side Seal
Side seal
Side seal
Inner seal
Inner seal
Used in locations severely exposed to dust or cutting chips
Inner Seal
End seal
End seal
Spacer
Double Seals
End seal
Hexagon socket
button bolt
Metal scraper
End seal
Metal scraper
Metal Scraper
(Non-contact)
Hexagon socket
button bolt
Symbol
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
A1-478
506E
Options
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
LM block
Mounting bolt
Ball cage
Ball
Contact scraper
Metal scraper
End seal
Liquid
LM rail
QZ Lubricator
Large amount
of foreign material
Structural Drawing
[Features]
Since the 3 layers of scrapers fully contact the LM rail, LaCS is highly capable of removing minute
foreign material.
Since it uses oil-impregnated, foam synthetic rubber with a self-lubricating function, low friction
resistance is achieved.
Symbol
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
KKHH
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
JJHH*
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
TTHH*
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
A1-479
LM Guide (Options)
For locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS is available.
LaCS removes minute foreign material adhering to the LM rail in multiple stages and prevents it
from entering the LM block with laminated contact structure (3-layer scraper).
506E
Description
200m/min
Environmental
conditions
[Test result]
No.1
without
LaCS
No.2
with
LaCS
5000
Description
No.1
No.2
Max speed/
60m/min, 1G
acceleration
External load 9.6kN
Foreign
material
conditions
Seal configuration
Tested model 1
Double-seal
configuration
Tested model 2
(2 end seals superposed
with each other)
Tested model 3
0.3
0.3
0.3
No foreign matter entering the raceway observed
LaCS
A1-480
Tested model 1
Tested model 2
Tested model 3
506E
Options
Side Scraper
Side Scraper
For the supported models: models SVR/SVS
For the resistance of side scraper, see A1-501.
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with side scraper attached, see A1-484.
For notes regarding how to handle the side scraper, see A1-546.
Side scraper
LM Guide (Options)
Foreign
material
Foreign material
Foreign material
Inverted mount
End plate
Wall mount
QZ Lubricator
End seal
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
Protector
Outline view
(Ex: in case of QZTTHHYY type)
[Features]
Minimizes foreign material entering from the side of the LM Guide in a harsh environment.
Demonstrates a dust protection effect in inverted or wall mount.
The shoulder height of the mounting surface and the corner
radius after the side scraper is mounted
Unit: mm
H3
H1
r
Model No.
Corner
radius
r(max)
25
30
35
45
55
65
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
Shoulder height
of the LM rail
H1
2
3.5
5.5
8
10.5
11
H3
2.7
4.2
6.2
8.8
11.2
12.1
* The side scraper can accommodate various options of dust control accessories and lubrication accessories. For details,
contact THK.
A1-481
506E
Protector
For the supported models: models SVR/SVS
HH type (with LaCS) of models SVR/SVS is provided with the protector.
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with protector attached, see A1-484.
Coolant
QZ Lubricator
End seal
Laminated Contact
Scraper LaCS
Foreign matter
Protector
Protector
Side scraper
Cap GC
Outline view
(Ex: in case of QZTTHHYY type)
End plate
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
End seal
[Features]
The protector minimizes the entrance of foreign material even in harsh environments where foreign material such as fine particles and liquids are present.
The shoulder height of the mounting surface and the corner
radius after the protector is mounted
Unit: mm
H3
Model No.
Corner
radius
r(max)
Shoulder height
of the LM rail
H1
H3
25
30
35
45
55
65
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
4
5
6
8
10
10
5.5
7
9
11.6
14
15
H1
r
H1
Model No.
Corner
radius
r(max)
Shoulder height
of the LM rail
H1
H3
25
30
35
45
55
65
0.5
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
2
3.5
5.5
8
10.5
11
2.7
4.2
6.2
8.8
11.2
12.1
A1-482
506E
Options
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS
LiCS
[Features]
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS is a seal that uses a light-resistance material in its sealing element and contacts the LM rail raceway to achieve low drag resistance. It is optimal for applications
where low drag resistance is required, such as semiconductor-related devices, inspection devices
and OA equipment all of which are used in favorable environments.
Since the sealing element contacts the LM rail raceway, it is effective in removing dust on the
raceway.
Use of oil-impregnated, expanded synthetic rubber, which has excellent self-lubricating property,
achieves low drag resistance.
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L P -
LM Guide
model
number
Type of
LM block
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Symbol
LM rail length
(in mm)
GG
LiCS
PP
A1-483
LM Guide (Options)
LiCS is a light sliding resistance contact seal. It is effective in removing dust on the raceway and retaining a lubricant such as grease. It achieves extremely low drag and smooth, stable motion.
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
15C/V/R
15LC/LV
20C/V
20LC/LV
25C/V/R
25LC/LV/LR
30C/V/R
30LC/LV/LR
SHS
35C/V/R
35LC/LV/LR
45C/V/R
45LC/LV/LR
55C/V/R
55LC/LV/LR
65C/V
65LC/LV
15XVY
15XWY/XTBY
20XV
20XW/XTB
SSR
25XVY
25XWY/XTBY
30XW
35XW
12CAM/CRM
12HRM
14CAM/CRM
17CAM/CRM
SHW
21CA/CR
27CA/CR
35CA/CR
50CA/CR
Standard
UU
overall length
64.4
64.4
79.4
79.4
79
79
98
98
92
92
109
109
106
106
131
131
122
122
152
152
140
140
174
174
171
171
213
213
221
221
272
272
40.3
40.3
56.9
56.9
47.7
47.7
66.5
66.5
60
60
83
83
97
97
110.9 110.9
37
37
50.4
50.4
45.5
45.5
51
51
59
59
72.8
72.8
107
107
141
141
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
64.4
79.4
79
98
92
109
106
131
122
152
140
174
171
213
221
272
40.3
56.9
47.7
66.5
60
83
97
110.9
37
50.4
45.5
51
59
72.8
107
141
69.8
84.8
85.4
104.4
101.6
118.6
116
141
134.8
164.8
152.8
186.8
186.6
228.6
238.6
289.6
47.3
63.9
54.6
73.4
67.4
90.4
105.1
119.9
54
64
78.6
114.4
149.2
66.8
81.8
83
102
100.4
117.4
113.8
138.8
132.4
162.4
151.2
185.2
184.2
226.2
236.2
287.2
44.9
61.5
53.4
72.2
65.7
88.7
102.7
117.7
53.4
63.2
77.8
112
147.4
72.2
87.2
89.4
108.4
107.6
124.6
122.4
147.4
142.2
172.2
161
195
195.4
237.4
248.6
299.6
50.7
67.3
60.3
79.1
73.1
96.1
110.8
126.7
56.4
68.2
83.6
119.4
155.6
78.6
93.6
93.6
112.6
112
129
129.4
154.4
148
178
169
203
202
244
258
309
59.5
76.1
67.7
86.5
80
103
121
136.9
48
61.4
60.7
66.2
75.6
89.4
129
166
84
99
100
119
119.2
136.2
138
163
157.8
187.8
178.8
212.8
213.2
255.2
270.4
321.4
65.3
81.9
74.6
93.4
87.4
110.4
129.1
145.9
69.2
80.6
95.2
136.4
174.2
79.8
94.8
96
115
114.4
131.4
131.8
156.8
150.4
180.4
172.2
206.2
205.2
247.2
261.2
312.2
60.7
77.3
70.1
88.9
82.4
105.4
123.4
139.3
67.4
77.2
91.8
131.4
168.4
85.2
100.2
102.4
121.4
121.6
138.6
140.4
165.4
160.2
190.2
182
216
216.4
258.4
273.6
324.6
66.5
83.1
77
95.8
89.8
112.8
131.5
148.3
70.4
82.2
97.6
138.8
176.6
Note) The standard overall length may include the dimension of the end seal depending on the model. If you are considering
using a type without an end seal, contact THK for details.
A1-484
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
16.9
22.1
23.4
31
21.5
30.8
40.8
39
50.7
34.4
47.1
44.5
59.5
43
60.8
55.5
74.5
50
77
64.4
79
98
109
131
152
174
272
24
31
45
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
109.4
134.8
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
334
365
396
23.4
31
21.5
30.8
40.8
39
50.7
34.4
47.1
44.5
59.5
43
60.8
55.5
74.5
50
77
64.4
79
98
109
131
152
174
272
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
109.4
134.8
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
334
365
396
69.8
85.4
104.4
118.6
141
164.8
186.8
289.6
61.8
80.6
96.6
90.7
109.8
105.6
128.2
117
142.4
146.2
178
170.2
208.3
193.2
252.7
252.8
310.2
66.8
83
102
117.4
138.8
162.4
185.2
287.2
58.2
76.6
92.6
86.7
105.8
101.6
124.2
113
138.4
144.2
176
168.2
206.3
191.2
250.7
252.4
309.8
72.2
89.4
108.4
124.6
147.4
172.2
195
299.6
63.4
83.2
99.2
94.3
113.4
109.2
131.8
120.6
146
151.4
183.2
175.4
213.5
198.4
257.9
259.6
317
33.1
42.4
52.4
50.6
62.3
46
58.7
56.1
71.1
57.2
75
69.7
88.7
65.2
92.6
78.9
94
113
129
154.4
178
203
309
76
92
108
101
120.1
119.9
142.5
132.4
157.8
84.4
100
119
136.2
163
187.8
212.8
321.4
81.2
98.6
114.6
108.6
127.7
127.5
150.1
140
165.4
79.9
96
115
131.4
156.8
180.4
206.2
312.2
77.2
95.2
111.2
105.3
124.4
124.2
146.8
135.6
161
85.2
102.5
121.5
138.6
165.4
190.2
216
324.6
82.4
101.8
117.8
112.9
132
131.8
154.4
143.2
168.6
A1-485
LM Guide (Options)
5
5W
7
7W
9XS
9XM
9XN
9W
9WN
SRS 12
12N
12W
12WN
15
15N
15W
15WN
20
25
15S
20S
20
25
SCR
30
35
45
65
8RM
10RM
12RM
15A/B/R/YR
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
30A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
35A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
HSR 35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
45A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
45LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
55A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
55LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
65A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
65LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
85A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
85LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
100HA/HB/HR
120HA/HB/HR
150HA/HB/HR
Standard
overall length
16.9
22.1
23.4
31
21.5
30.8
40.8
39
50.7
34.4
47.1
44.5
59.5
43
60.8
55.5
74.5
50
77
64.4
79
98
109
131
152
174
272
24
31
45
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
109.4
134.8
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
245.6
303
334
365
396
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
15W/TB
15V/SB
20W/TB
20V/SB
25WY/TBY
25VY/SBY
30W/TB
30V/SB
SR 35W/TB
35V/SB
45W/TB
55W/TB
70T
85T
100T
120T
150T
25XR/XA/XB
25XLR/XLA/XLB
30R/A/B
30LR/LA/LB
35R/A/B
35LR/LA/LB
45R/A/B
45LR/LA/LB
NR/ 55R/A/B
NRS 55LR/LA/LB
65R/A/B
65LR/LA/LB
75R/A/B
75LR/LA/LB
85R/A/B
85LR/LA/LB
100R/A/B
100LR/LA/LB
12LRM
14LRM
17CA/CR
21CA/CR
HRW
27CA/CR
35CA/CR
50CA/CR
60CA
Standard
overall length
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
96.8
67.9
111
77.6
126
156
194.6
180
200
235
280
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
37
45.5
50.8
58.8
72.8
106.6
140.5
158.9
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
96.8
67.9
111
77.6
126
156
194.6
180
200
235
280
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
37
45.5
50.8
58.8
72.8
106.6
140.5
158.9
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
96.8
67.9
111
77.6
126
156
194.6
180
200
235
280
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
218
274
246.7
302.8
286.2
326.2
37
45.5
72.8
106.6
140.5
158.9
62.2
45.6
72.8
53.9
90.6
66.8
104.4
75.5
118.6
85.2
134.6
164.6
201.8
90.4
109.6
107
129.5
119.7
145.2
149.2
181.2
173
210.2
196.2
256.2
229
285
257.7
313.8
297.8
337.8
54
64.2
79
113.8
147.7
169.7
58.4
41.8
70.6
51.7
87.4
63.6
99.4
70.5
113.6
80.2
129.4
159.4
200.8
89.2
108.4
104.4
126.9
117.1
142.6
147.4
179.4
171.4
208.6
194.2
254.2
226.6
282.6
256.1
312.2
295.6
335.6
53.6
62.8
75.6
112
143.3
165.1
63.6
47
77.2
58.3
95
71.2
107
78.1
121.2
87.8
138
168
208
96.8
116
113.4
135.9
127.3
152.8
157.6
189.6
181.6
218.8
204.8
264.8
237.6
293.6
267.1
323.2
307.2
347.2
58.6
69
81.8
119.2
150.5
175.9
100.1
119.3
119.3
141.8
131.1
156.6
164.4
196.4
188.1
225.3
214.9
274.9
107.7
126.9
128.3
150.8
141.3
166.8
174.6
206.6
198.3
235.5
225.5
285.5
102.5
121.7
121.7
144.2
133.5
159
167.6
199.6
191.3
228.5
218.1
278.1
110.1
129.3
130.7
153.2
143.7
169.2
177.8
209.8
201.5
238.7
228.7
288.7
A1-486
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
14.9
19.9
16.9
20.1
22.1
28.1
23.4
33
31
40.9
30.8
40.8
39
39
50.7
35
47.7
44.5
44.5
59.5
50
42.9
60.7
55.5
55.5
74.5
66.5
86.3
23.4
30.8
35
43
31.5
39
44.5
55.5
35
43
39
44.5
55.5
Note) The standard overall length may include the dimension of the end seal depending on the model. If you are considering
using a type without an end seal, contact THK for details.
A1-487
LM Guide (Options)
3M
3N
3WM
3WN
5M
5N/TN
5WM/WTM
5WN/WTN
7M
7N
7WM/WTM
7WN/WTN
9KM
9N
RSR/ 9WV
RSR-W 9WVM
9WN
12VM
12N
12WV
12WVM
12WN
14WV
15VM
15N
15WV
15WVM
15WN
20VN
20N
7ZM
9ZM
12ZM
RSR-Z/ 15ZM
WZ 7WZM
9WZM
12WZM
15WZM
Standard
overall length
14.9
19.9
16.9
20.1
22.1
28.1
23.4
33
31
40.9
30.8
40.8
39
39
50.7
35
47.7
44.5
44.5
59.5
50
42.9
60.7
55.5
55.5
74.5
66.5
86.3
23.4
30.8
35
43
31.5
39
44.5
55.5
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
HR
GSR
GSR-R
CSR
MX
JR
918
1123
1530
2042
2042T
2555
2555T
3065
3065T
3575
3575T
4085
4085T
50105
50105T
60125
15T
15V
20T
20V
25T
25V
30T
35T
25T-R
25V-R
30T-R
35T-R
15
20S
20
25S
25
30S
30
35
45
5M
7WM
25A/B/R
35A/B/R
45A/B/R
55A/B/R
Standard
overall length
45
52
69
91.6
110.7
121
146.4
145
173.5
154.8
182.5
177.8
215.9
227
274.5
329
59.8
47.1
74
58.1
88
69
103
117
88
69
103
117
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
134.8
170.8
23.3
40.8
83.1
113.6
145
165
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
45
52
69
91.6
110.7
121
146.4
145
173.5
154.8
182.5
177.8
215.9
227
274.5
329
59.8
47.1
74
58.1
88
69
103
117
88
69
103
117
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
134.8
170.8
23.3
40.8
83.1
113.6
145
165
59.8
47.1
74
58.1
88
69
103
117
88
69
103
117
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
134.8
170.8
83.1
113.6
145
165
65
52.3
80.6
64.7
95
76
110.6
124.6
95
76
110.6
124.6
61.8
80.6
96.6
90.7
109.8
105.6
128.2
142.4
178
90.7
125.6
159
175.4
65.8
53.1
77.6
61.7
91.6
72.6
107.2
121.2
91.6
72.6
107.2
121.2
58.2
76.6
92.6
86.7
105.8
101.6
124.2
138.4
176
89.4
122
150.8
170.4
71
58.3
84.2
68.3
98.6
79.6
114.8
128.8
98.6
79.6
114.8
128.8
63.4
83.2
99.2
94.3
113.4
109.2
131.8
146
183.2
97
134
164.8
180.8
A1-488
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
44.6
54.5
55.5
55.8
81.6
82.3
82.5
107.2
107.5
108.2
108.5
136.7
137.3
137.3
138
193.8
195.4
195.9
196.5
196.5
48
62.2
80.6
107.6
144.4
67
78
90
110
123
150
59.6
76
92
83.9
103
98.8
121.4
112
137.4
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
54.5
55.5
55.8
81.6
82.3
82.5
107.2
107.5
108.2
108.5
136.7
137.3
137.3
138
193.8
195.4
195.9
196.5
196.5
110
123
150
59.6
76
92
83.9
103
98.8
121.4
112
137.4
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
59.7
60.7
61
89.2
89.9
90.1
114.8
115.1
115.8
116.1
143.9
144.5
144.5
145.2
201
202.6
203.1
203.7
203.7
57.1
57.3
85.5
86
86.2
111.2
111.5
112
112.3
142.1
142.7
142.7
143.3
199.4
200.8
201.3
201.8
201.8
62.3
62.5
93.1
93.6
93.8
118.8
119.1
119.6
119.8
149.2
149.9
149.9
150.5
206.6
208
208.5
209
209
A1-489
LM Guide (Options)
12A+60/100R
15A+60/150R
15A+60/300R
15A+60/400R
25A+60/500R
25A+60/750R
25A+60/1000R
35A+60/600R
35A+60/800R
35A+60/1000R
HCR
35A+60/1300R
45A+60/800R
45A+60/1000R
45A+60/1200R
45A+60/1600R
65A+60/1000R
65A+60/1500R
65A+60/2000R
65A+60/2500R
65A+60/3000R
15A
25A
HMG 35A
45A
65A
20TBC
25TBC
NSR- 30TBC
TBC 40TBC
50TBC
70TBC
15M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR
20M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR
20M1LA/M1LB/M1LR
25M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR
HSR- M1 25M1LA/M1LB/M1LR
30M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR
30M1LA/M1LB/M1LR
35M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR
35M1LA/M1LB/M1LR
15M1W/M1TB
15M1V/M1SB
20M1W/M1TB
SR- M1
20M1V/M1SB
25M1W/M1TB
25M1V/M1SB
Standard
overall length
44.6
54.5
55.5
55.8
81.6
82.3
82.5
107.2
107.5
108.2
108.5
136.7
137.3
137.3
138
193.8
195.4
195.9
196.5
196.5
48
62.2
80.6
107.6
144.4
67
78
90
110
123
150
59.6
76
92
83.9
103
98.8
121.4
112
137.4
57
40.4
66.2
47.3
83
59.2
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
30M1W/M1TB
30M1V/M1SB
SR-M1
35M1W/M1TB
35M1V/M1SB
9M1K
9M1N
9M1WV
9M1WN
12M1V
12M1N
12M1WV
RSR- M1
12M1WN
15M1V
15M1N
15M1WV
15M1WN
20M1V
20M1N
15M2A
HSR- M2 20M2A
25M2A
15A/V
20A/V
20LA/LV
25C/R
25LC/LR
30C/R
30LC/LR
35C/R
SRG
35LC/LR
45C/R
45LC/LR
55C/R
55LC/LR
65LC/LV
85LC
100LC
35C/R
35LC/LR
45C/R
SRN 45LC/LR
55C/R
55LC/LR
65LC/LR
70LR
85LR
SRW 100LR
130LR
150LR
Standard
UU
overall length
96.8
96.8
67.9
67.9
111
111
77.6
77.6
30.8
30.8
41
41
39
39
50.7
50.7
35
35
47.7
47.7
44.5
44.5
59.5
59.5
43
43
61
61
55.5
55.5
74.5
74.5
66.5
66.5
86.3
86.3
56.6
56.6
74
74
83.1
83.1
69.2
69.2
86.2
86.2
106.2 106.2
95.5
95.5
115.1 115.1
111
111
135
135
125
125
155
155
155
155
190
190
185
185
235
235
303
303
350
350
395
395
125
125
155
155
155
155
190
190
185
185
235
235
303
303
190
190
235
235
303
303
350
350
395
395
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
KKHH
96.8
67.9
111
77.6
56.6
74
83.1
69.2
86.2
106.2
95.5
115.1
111
135
125
155
155
190
185
235
303
350
395
125
155
155
190
185
235
303
190
235
303
350
395
71.2
88.2
108.2
100.5
120.1
118
142
132.8
162.8
164.2
199.2
194.2
244.2
314.2
361.2
406.2
132.8
162.8
164.2
199.2
194.2
244.2
314.2
199.2
244.2
314.2
361.2
406.2
89.6
109.6
100.5
120.1
116
140
131.4
161.4
162.2
197.2
192.2
242.2
311.4
361
411
131.4
161.4
162.2
197.2
192.2
242.2
311.4
197.2
242.2
311.4
361
411
91.6
111.6
105.5
125.1
123
147
139.2
169.2
171.4
206.4
201.4
251.4
322.6
372.2
422.2
139.2
169.2
171.4
206.4
201.4
251.4
322.6
206.4
251.4
322.6
372.2
422.2
105.2
125.2
115.3
134.9
130.8
154.8
148.6
178.6
182
217
212
262
335.4
148.6
178.6
182
217
212
262
335.4
217
262
335.4
107.2
127.2
120.3
139.9
137.8
161.8
156.4
186.4
191.2
226.2
221.2
271.2
346.6
156.4
186.4
191.2
226.2
221.2
271.2
346.6
226.2
271.2
346.6
107.6
127.6
117.7
137.3
133.2
157.2
151
181
185.2
220.2
215.2
265.2
338.6
151
181
185.2
220.2
215.2
265.2
338.6
220.2
265.2
338.6
109.6
129.6
122.7
142.3
140.2
164.2
158.8
188.8
194.4
229.4
224.4
274.4
349.8
158.8
188.8
194.4
229.4
224.4
274.4
349.8
229.4
274.4
349.8
Note) The standard overall length may include the dimension of the end seal depending on the model. If you are considering
using a type without an end seal, contact THK for details.
A1-490
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
SSHH
DDHH
JJHH
TTHH
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
138.2
171
163.3
200.5
186
246
88
107.2
104.6
127.1
116.5
142
145.2
178
168.4
205.6
191.8
251.8
88.5
107.7
103.7
126.2
116.3
141.8
145.8
178.6
169.0
206.2
193.1
253.1
93.7
112.9
110.3
132.8
123.3
148.8
152.8
185.6
176.0
213.2
200.5
260.5
96.8
116.0
115.2
137.7
126.7
152.2
158.2
191.0
182.4
219.6
208.8
268.8
102.0
121.2
121.8
144.3
133.7
159.2
165.2
198.0
189.4
226.6
216.2
276.2
102.5
121.7
120.9
143.4
133.5
159.0
165.8
198.6
191.1
228.3
217.5
277.5
107.7
126.9
127.5
150.0
140.5
166.0
172.8
205.6
198.1
235.3
224.9
284.9
The overall LM block length (L) of YY type (with side scraper) is also the same.
Note1) The standard overall length may include the dimension of the end seal depending on the model. If you are considering using
a type without an end seal, contact THK for details.
Note2) For models SVR/SVS, we recommend attaching a protector. For the dimensions of ZZHH and KKHH, contact THK.
For details of the symbols of options, see A1-510.
Model number coding
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
With
steel
tape
(*1) See A1-502. (*2) See A1-510. (*3) See A1-70. (*4) See A1-76. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-491
LM Guide (Options)
Standard
overall length
25R/C
82.8
25LR/LC
102
30R/C
98
30LR/LC
120.5
35R/C/RH/CH
109.5
SVR/ 35LR/LC/LRH/LCH 135
SVS 45R/C/RH/CH
138.2
45LR/LC/LRH/LCH 171
55R/C/RH/CH
163.3
55LR/LC/LRH/LCH 200.5
65R/C
186
65LR/LC
246
506E
Grease nipple
K : Reference surface
LaCS
Endplate
LaCS
Endplate
Grease nipple mounting location
for models SHW, SRS and HSR
Unit: mm
Model No.
15C/LC
15R/V/LV
20C/LC
20V/LV
25C/LC
25R/LR/V/LV
30C/LC
30R/LR/V/LV
SHS
35C/LC
35R/LR/V/LV
45C/LC
45R/LR/V/LV
55C/LC
55R/LR/V/LV
65C/LC
65V/LV
15XVY/XWY
15XTBY
20XV/XW
20XTB
SSR
25XVY/XWY
25XTBY
30XW
35XW
25R/LR
30R/LR
35R/LR/RH/LRH
SVR/SVS*
45R/LR/RH/LRH
55R/LR/RH/LRH
65R/LR
A1-492
4.7
4.5
4.7
7.4
7.4
7.7
7.4
6.9
4.4
4.6
4.5
5
5
5.5
5.5
9
9
9
12
Nipple type
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB107
PB1021B
PB1021B
PB1021B
PB1021B
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-PT1/8
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: mm
Model No.
SRG
Nipple type
PB1021B
PB1021B
PB1021B
PB1021B
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-PT1/8
A-PT1/8
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
A-M6F
The incremental dimension of the grease nipple when the side scraper and the protector are attached (SVR/SVS only) is
also the same.
A1-493
LM Guide (Options)
NR/NRS
25A/B/LA/LB
25R/LR
30A/B/LA/LB
30R/LR
35A/B/LA/LB
35R/LR
45A/B/LA/LB
45R/LR
55A/B/LA/LB
55R/LR
65A/B/LA/LB
65R/LR
35LC
35LR
45LC
45LR
55LC
55LR
65LC
65LR
4.8
4.5
7.4
7.4
6.9
15.3
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.2
506E
Unit: mm
Model No.
SHW
SRS
HSR
21CA/CR
27CA/CR
35CA/CR
50CA/CR
25
15A/B/R/YR
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
30A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
35A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
Nipple type
PB1021B
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-PT1/8
PB1021B
PB1021B
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
Note1) When desiring the mounting location for the grease nipple other than the above, contact THK.
Note2) Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple. When desiring both QZ Lubricator and a
grease nipple, contact THK.
Note3) When desiring a grease nipple for model SHW or SRS without QZ Lubricator, indicate with grease nipple when placing an order. (If not, a grease nipple will not be attached.)
Note4) Model HSR15 attached with ZZ or KK cannot have a grease nipple. Contact THK for details.
A1-494
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Model No.
Standard overall length
GG
PP
15XVY
40.3
48.7
48.7
15XWY/XTBY
56.9
65.3
65.3
20XV
47.7
55.8
55.8
20XW/XTB
66.5
74.6
74.6
25XVY
60
67.6
67.6
25XWY/XTBY
83
90.6
90.6
30XW
97
106.7
106.7
35XW
110.9
121.7
121.7
15A
67
77
77
15V
67
77
77
SSR
SRG
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L P T -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With LiCS
(*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Symbol
Symbol for No. of rails used on
for LM rail the same plane (*4)
jointed use
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P) /Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See A1-483 (*2) See A1-70 (*3) See A1-76 (*4) SeeA1-13
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-495
LM Guide (Options)
Unit: mm
506E
Grease nipple
Grease nipple
E
LiCS
LiCS
Endplate
Model SSR
Location for mounting the grease nipple
Endplate
K : Reference
surface
Model SRG
Location for mounting the grease nipple
Unit: mm
2.9
4.5
Model No.
SSR
SRG
15XVY
15XWY/XTBY
20XV
20XW/XTB
25XVY
25XWY/XTBY
30XW
35XW
15A
15V
Nipple type
PB1021B
PB1021B
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
B-M6F
PB107
PB107
* Because this model features a flange, it projects beyond the block end surface.
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L H -
Model
number
Type of
LM block
With LiCS
(*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
(*1) See A1-483 (*2) See A1-70 (*3) See A1-76 (*4) SeeA1-13
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-496
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Model No.
SHS
SSR
SVR/SVS
Model No.
5M
20
7.0
25
10.5
7M
0.16
30
17.0
7WM
0.52
20.5
9XS
0.15
45
30.0
9XM
0.2
55
31.5
9XN
0.3
65
43.0
9WM
1.0
15X
2.0
9WN
1.0
20X
2.6
35
25X
SS
5WM
SRS
12M
0.6
3.5
12N
30X
4.9
12WM
1.3
35X
6.3
12WN
1.4
25
10
15M
1.0
30
14
15N
1.1
35
18
15WM
1.6
22
15WN
1.6
55
26
20M
1.3
65
31
25M
1.6
12CA/CR
1.0
15
2.5
12HR
1.0
20
14
1.2
25
17
1.4
45
21
SHW
Unit: N
UU
SS
UU
SCR
30
SS
0.6
5
UU
10
4.9
35
12
27
4.9
45
20
35
9.8
65
30
50
14.7
12CA/CR
1.4
12HR
1.8
14
1.8
17
21
SS
2.2
6.9
27
8.9
35
15.8
50
22.7
A1-497
LM Guide (Options)
15
506E
Unit: N
Unit: N
Model No.
8
HSR
SR
NR/NRS
HRW
A1-498
Model No.
5
10
0.8
0.08
12
1.2
0.1
15
2.0
12
0.4
20
2.5
15
0.8
25
3.9
20
1.0
7.8
3W
0.2
35
11.8
5W
0.3
45
19.6
7W
0.4
55
19.6
9W
65
34.3
85
34.3
14W
15
2.5
15W
1.3
20
3.4
7Z
0.08
25
4.4
9Z
0.1
30
8.8
12Z
0.4
11.8
15Z
0.8
45
12.7
7WZ
0.4
55
15.7
9WZ
0.8
70
19.6
12WZ
1.1
25X
15
15WZ
1.3
30
17
918
0.5
35
23
1123
0.7
45
24
1530
1.0
29
2042
2.0
65
42
2555
75
42
85
42
3575
3.9
100
51
4085
4.4
12
0.2
50105
5.9
14
0.3
60125
9.8
17
2.9
30
35
55
21
27
UU
UU
UU
UU
4.9
4.9
35
9.8
50
14.7
60
19.6
RSR
HR
12W
3065
0.8
UU
1.1
1.2
UU
2.9
3.4
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Unit: N
Model No.
15
CSR
MX
JR
HCR
HMG
20M1
3.4
3.1
25
4.4
30
6.3
30M1
8.8
7.6
35M1
11.8
35
UU
SR
25M1
UU
4.4
25-R
4.4
9M1
0.1
30-R
6.3
12M1
0.4
35-R
7.6
15M1
15
2.0
20
2.5
9M1W
0.8
25
3.9
12M1W
1.1
7.8
15M1W
1.3
35
11.8
15M2
45
19.6
0.06
25M2
3.9
0.4
15
13
25
3.9
20
18
35
11.8
25
19
19.6
30
22
55
19.6
35
12
1.2
15
2.0
55
34
25
3.9
65
40
11.8
85
47
45
19.6
100
53
65
34.3
35
30
15
25
30
7W
45
35
35
UU
UU
UU
UU
UU
RSR
HSR
SRG
SRN
20M1
20M2
45
45
55
0.8
UU
1.0
2.0
UU
SS
SS
2.5
30
30
30
35
65
40
12
70
32
65
40
20TBC
4.9
25TBC
4.9
130
50
30TBC
6.9
150
57
40TBC
UU
14.7
70TBC
24.5
15M1
2.0
25M1
85
SRW
100
37
SS
43
9.8
50TBC
20M1
HSR
15M1
20
45
NSR
Model No.
2.5
UU
3.9
30M1
7.8
35M1
11.8
A1-499
LM Guide (Options)
GSR
Unit: N
506E
Model No.
SHS
SSR
SVR/SVS
NR/NRS
SHW
SRS
Unit: N
Model No.
15
5.2
15M
5.1
20
6.5
15WM
7.5
25
11.7
20M
5.2
30
18.2
25M
7.8
35
20.8
15
5.2
45
26.0
20
6.5
55
32.5
25
11.7
SRS
65
39.0
30
18.2
15
5.9
35
20.8
20
6.9
45
26.0
25
8.1
65
39.0
30
12.8
15
3.8
35
15.1
20
5.6
25
8.1
30
SCR
25
7.5
13.4
30
14.9
35
15.5
35
22.4
45
23.3
20
6.1
55
28.6
25
6.9
65
39.6
30
8.2
85
52.7
12
HSR
35
9.1
2.6
45
14.3
14
3.9
55
18.2
17
3.9
65
26.0
21
3.9
35
9.1
27
6.5
45
14.3
35
13.0
55
18.2
50
19.5
65
22.1
9XS
2.3
70
32.8
9XM
2.3
85
39.7
9XN
2.3
100
58.3
9WM
3.3
12M
3.5
12WM
4.2
SRG
SRN
SRW
Note1) Each resistance value in the table only consists of that of LaCS, and does not include sliding resistances of seals and
other accessories.
Note2) For the maximum service speed of LaCS, contact THK.
Note3) HH type (with LaCS) of models SVR/SVS is provided with the protector (see A1-482).
Contact THK if you want to use the Protector with other options.
A1-500
506E
Options
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
Model No.
20X
1.1
25X
1.6
30X
1.6
35X
15
0.7
SRG
LM Guide (Options)
SSR
15X
Model No.
SVR/
SVS
25
4.4
25L
5.2
30
4.7
30L
5.5
35
4.6
35L
5.5
45
5.1
45L
6.1
55
5.3
55L
6.3
65
5.4
65L
6.9
A1-501
506E
QZ Lubricator
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the LM block dimension with QZ attached, see A1-505 to A1-508.
For notes regarding how to handle the QZ, see A1-546.
QZ Lubricator feeds the right amount of lubricant to the raceway on the LM rail. This allows an oil
film to continuously be formed between the rolling element and the raceway, and drastically extends
the lubrication and maintenance intervals.
The structure of QZ Lubricator consists of three major components: (1) a heavy oil-impregnated fiber
net (function to store lubricant), (2) a high-density fiber net (function to apply lubricant to the raceway) and (3) an oil-control plate (function to adjust oil flow). The lubricant contained in QZ Lubricator
is fed by the capillary phenomenon, which is used also in felt pens and many other products, as the
fundamental principle.
Case
(End seal)
Ball
QZ Lubricator
Ball cage
Structural Drawing
[Features]
Since it supplements an oil loss, the lubrication maintenance interval can be significantly extended.
Eco-friendly lubrication system that does not contaminate the surrounding area since it feeds the
right amount of lubricant to the ball raceway.
Symbol
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
QZKK
QZGG
With LiCS + QZ
QZPP
QZSSHH
QZDDHH
QZZZHH
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZKKHH
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZJJHH*
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
QZTTHH*
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
A1-502
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
962km
Light Medium
load
load
Grease + QZ Lubricator
3500km
Grease + QZ Lubricator
30000km
Grease + QZ Lubricator
0
500
1000
1500
Distance traveled (km)
3500
30000
Comparison of
lubricant
consumption
after traveling
5,000 km
0.332
SHW21QZ
83.3
Forced lubrication
20
40
60
80
100
Forced lubrication
Compared
0.03cm3/6min 16667min
83.3cm3
A1-503
LM Guide (Options)
Heavy load
LM Guide: HSR35R1SS
Condition Heavy load Medium load Light load
18.6kN 9.3kN
1.4kN
Load
Speed
50m/min 50m/min 300m/min
Calculated service life 400km 3200km
506E
Caged Ball LM
Guide #45
Full-ball LM
Guide #45
Load
8kN
6kN
Speed
60m/min
Coolant
Foreign
material
Lubrication
AFA Grease + QZ
Super Multi 68
Oiling cycle:
0.1cc/shot
Periodically
lubricated every
16 min
QZ+LaCS
No
breakage
Standard
model
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
* When using the LM system under severe environment, use QZ Lubricator and Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS (see
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS on A1-479) in combination.
A1-504
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
Model No.
15C/V/R
15LC/LV
20C/V
20LC/LV
25C/V/R
25LC/LV/LR
30C/V/R
30LC/LV/LR
SHS
35C/V/R
35LC/LV/LR
45C/V/R
45LC/LV/LR
55C/V/R
55LC/LV/LR
65C/V
65LC/LV
15XVY
15XWY/XTBY
20XV
20XW/XTB
SSR
25XVY
25XWY/XTBY
30XW
35XW
12CAM/CRM
12HRM
14CAM/CRM
17CAM/CRM
SHW
21CA/CR
27CA/CR
35CA/CR
50CA/CR
Standard
overall length
64.4
79.4
79
98
92
109
106
131
122
152
140
174
171
213
221
272
40.3
56.9
47.7
66.5
60
83
97
110.9
37
50.4
45.5
51
59
72.8
107
141
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
84.4
99.4
99
118
114.4
131.4
127.4
152.4
145
175
173
207
205.4
247.4
256.2
307.2
59.3
75.9
66.2
85
82.6
105.6
119.7
134.3
47
60.4
55.5
63
75
92.8
127
161
84.4
99.4
99
118
114.4
131.4
127.4
152.4
145
175
173
207
205.4
247.4
256.2
307.2
59.3
75.9
66.2
85
82.6
105.6
119.7
134.3
47
60.4
55.5
63
75
92.8
127
161
89.8
104.8
105.4
124.4
121.6
138.6
136
161
154.8
184.8
182.8
216.8
216.6
258.6
268.6
319.6
65.1
81.7
73.1
91.9
90
113
127.8
143.3
66
80
98.6
134.4
169.2
86.8
101.8
103
122
120.4
137.4
133.8
158.8
152.4
182.4
181.2
215.2
214.2
256.2
266.2
317.2
62.7
79.3
72.1
90.9
88.4
111.4
125.4
141.3
65.4
78.6
97.2
132
167.4
92.2
107.2
109.4
128.4
127.6
144.6
142.4
167.4
162.2
192.2
191
225
225.4
267.4
278.6
329.6
68.5
85.1
79
97.8
95.8
118.8
133.5
150.3
68.4
83.6
103
139.4
175.6
100
115
115.4
134.4
132
149
149.4
174.4
168
198
199
233
232
274
288
339
75.5
92.1
83.7
102.5
100
123
141
156.9
58
71.4
70.7
78.2
91.6
109.4
149
186
105.4
120.4
121.8
140.8
139.2
156.2
158
183
177.8
207.8
208.8
242.8
243.2
285.2
300.4
351.4
81.3
97.9
90.6
109.4
107.4
130.4
149.1
165.9
81.2
96.6
115.2
156.4
194.2
101.2
116.2
117.8
136.8
134.4
151.4
151.8
176.8
170.4
200.4
202.2
236.2
235.2
277.2
291.2
342.2
76.7
93.3
86.1
104.9
102.4
125.4
143.4
159.3
79.4
93.2
111.8
151.4
188.4
106.6
121.6
124.2
143.2
141.6
158.6
160.4
185.4
180.2
210.2
212
246
246.4
288.4
303.6
354.6
82.5
99.1
93
111.8
109.8
132.8
151.5
168.3
82.4
98.2
117.6
158.8
196.6
A1-505
LM Guide (Options)
Unit: mm
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
SRS
SCR
HSR
NR/
NRS
7
7W
9XS
9XM
9XN
9W
9WN
12
12N
12W
12WN
15
15N
15W
15WN
20
25
15S
20S
20
25
30
35
45
65
15A/B/R/YR
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
30A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
35A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
45A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
45LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
55A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
55LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
65A/B/R/CA/CB/YR
65LA/LB/LR/HA/HB
25XR/XA/XB
25XLR/XLA/XLB
30R/A/B
30LR/LA/LB
35R/A/B
35LR/LA/LB
45R/A/B
45LR/LA/LB
55R/A/B
55LR/LA/LB
65R/A/B
65LR/LA/LB
A1-506
Standard
overall length
23.4
31
21.5
30.8
40.8
39
50.7
34.4
47.1
44.5
59.5
43
60.8
55.5
74.5
50
77
64.4
79
98
109
131
152
174
272
56.6
74
90
83.1
102.2
98
120.6
109.4
134.8
139
170.8
163
201.1
186
245.5
82.8
102
98
120.5
109.5
135
139
171
162.8
200
185.6
245.6
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
33.4
41
31.5
40.8
50.8
49
60.7
44.4
57.1
54.5
69.5
55
72.8
67.5
86.5
66
97
84.4
99
118
131.4
152.4
175
207
307.2
79.6
96.2
112.2
104.1
123.2
119
141.6
132.2
157.6
174.8
206.6
197.2
235.3
221.4
280.9
105.2
124.4
120.4
142.9
142.7
168.2
172.2
204.2
204.8
242
227.6
287.6
33.4
41
31.5
40.8
50.8
49
60.7
44.4
57.1
54.5
69.5
55
72.8
67.5
86.5
66
97
84.4
99
118
131.4
152.4
175
207
307.2
79.6
96.2
112.2
104.1
123.2
119
141.6
132.2
157.6
174.8
206.6
197.2
235.3
221.4
280.9
105.2
124.4
120.4
142.9
142.7
168.2
172.2
204.2
204.8
242
227.6
287.6
89.8
105.4
124.4
138.6
161
184.8
216.8
319.6
87.6
104.4
120.4
112.1
131.2
127
149.6
142
167.4
181.6
213.4
208.4
246.5
233.8
293.3
112.8
132
129.4
151.9
152.9
178.4
182.4
214.4
215
252.2
238.2
298.2
86.8
103
122
137.4
158.8
182.4
215.2
317.2
84.2
102
118
109.8
128.9
124.7
147.3
139
164.4
176.6
208.4
202
240.1
226.6
286.1
110.9
130.1
126.1
148.6
149.5
175
179.8
211.8
213.5
250.7
236.3
296.3
92.2
109.4
128.4
144.6
167.4
192.2
225
329.6
92.2
110.2
126.2
117.8
136.9
132.7
155.3
148.8
174.2
186.4
218.2
213.2
251.3
239
298.5
118.5
137.7
135.1
157.6
159.7
185.2
190
222
223.7
260.9
246.9
306.9
43.1
52.4
62.4
60.6
72.3
56
69.1
66.1
81.1
69.2
87
81.7
100.9
81.2
112.6
100.4
115.5
134.5
149
174.4
198
233
339
98.8
113.6
129.6
121.4
140.5
140.3
162.9
154.6
180
122.5
141.7
141.7
164.2
164.3
189.8
197.6
229.6
231.3
268.5
258.1
318.1
105.4
122
141
156.2
183
207.8
242.8
351.4
106.8
121.8
137.8
129.4
148.5
148.3
170.9
164.4
189.8
130.1
149.3
150.7
173.2
174.5
200
207.8
239.8
241.5
278.7
268.7
328.7
101.4
118
137
151.4
176.8
200.4
236.2
342.2
100
116
132
123.8
142.9
142.7
165.3
157
182.4
124.9
144.1
144.1
166.6
166.7
192.2
200.8
232.8
234.5
271.7
261.3
321.3
106.9
124.5
143.5
158.6
185.4
210.2
246
354.6
108
124.2
140.2
131.8
150.9
150.7
173.3
166.8
192.2
132.5
151.7
153.1
175.6
176.9
202.4
211
243
244.7
281.9
271.9
331.9
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
SRG
SRN
SRW
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
40.8
50.8
49
60.7
45
57.7
54.5
69.5
54.9
72.7
67.5
86.5
90.6
107.6
127.6
125.5
145.1
141
165
155
185
185
220
225
275
343
155
185
185
220
225
275
343
220
275
343
90.6
107.6
127.6
125.5
145.1
141
165
155
185
185
220
225
275
343
155
185
185
220
225
275
343
220
275
343
92.6
109.6
129.6
130.5
150.1
148
172
162.8
192.8
194.2
229.2
234.2
284.2
354.2
162.8
192.8
194.2
229.2
234.2
284.2
354.2
229.2
284.2
354.2
111
131
130.5
150.1
146
170
163.4
193.4
194.2
229.2
234.2
284.2
354.2
163.4
193.4
194.2
229.2
234.2
284.2
354.2
229.2
284.2
354.2
113
133
135.5
155.1
153
177
171.2
201.2
203.4
238.4
243.4
293.4
370.4
171.2
201.2
203.4
238.4
243.4
293.4
370.4
238.4
293.4
370.4
125.2
145.2
145.3
164.9
160.8
184.8
178.6
208.6
212
247
252
302
380.4
178.6
208.6
212
247
252
302
380.4
247
302
380.4
127.2
147.2
151.7
171.3
169.2
193.2
186.4
216.4
221.2
256.2
261.2
311.2
391.6
186.4
216.4
221.2
256.2
261.2
311.2
391.6
256.2
311.2
391.6
127.6
147.6
147.7
167.3
164.6
188.6
181
211
215.2
250.2
255.2
305.2
378.6
181
211
215.2
250.2
255.2
305.2
378.6
250.2
305.2
378.6
129.6
149.6
154.1
173.7
171.6
195.6
188.8
218.8
224.4
259.4
264.4
314.4
389.8
188.8
218.8
224.5
259.4
264.4
314.4
389.8
259.4
314.4
389.8
A1-507
LM Guide (Options)
RSR
9KM
9N
9WVM
9WN
12VM
12N
12WV/WVM
12WN
15VM
15N
15WV/VM
15WN
15A/V
20A/V
20LA/LV
25C/R
25LC/LR
30C/R
30LC/LR
35C/R
35LC/LR
45C/R
45LC/LR
55C/R
55LC/LR
65LC/LV
35C/R
35LC/LR
45C/R
45LC/LR
55C/R
55LC/LR
65LC/LR
70
85
100
Standard
overall length
30.8
40.8
39
50.7
35
47.7
44.5
59.5
42.9
60.7
55.5
74.5
69.2
86.2
106.2
95.5
115.1
111
135
125
155
155
190
185
235
303
125
155
155
190
185
235
303
190
235
303
506E
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
Standard
overall length
25R/C
82.8
25LR/LC
102
30R/C
98
30LR/LC
120.5
35R/C/RH/CH
109.5
SVR/ 35LR/LC/LRH/LCH 135
SVS 45R/C/RH/CH
138.2
45LR/LC/LRH/LCH 171
55R/C/RH/CH
163.3
55LR/LC/LRH/LCH 200.5
65R/C
186
65LR/LC
246
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
102.8
122
118
140.5
139.5
165
168.2
201
201.4
238.6
224.4
284.4
102.8
122
118
140.5
139.5
165
168.2
201
201.4
238.6
224.4
284.4
108
127.2
124.6
147.1
146.5
172
175.2
208
208.4
245.6
231.8
291.8
108.5
127.7
123.7
146.2
146.3
171.8
175.8
208.6
209.0
246.2
233.1
293.1
113.7
132.9
130.3
152.8
153.3
178.8
182.8
215.6
216.0
253.2
240.5
300.5
116.8
136.0
135.2
157.7
156.7
182.2
188.2
221.0
222.4
259.6
248.8
308.8
122.0
141.2
141.8
164.3
163.7
189.2
195.2
228.0
229.4
266.6
256.2
316.2
122.5
141.7
140.9
163.4
163.5
189.0
195.8
228.6
231.1
268.3
257.5
317.5
127.7
146.9
147.5
170.0
170.5
196.0
202.8
235.6
238.1
275.3
264.9
324.9
The overall LM block length (L) of YY type (with side scraper) is also the same.
Note) For models SVR/SVS, we recommend attaching a protector. For the dimensions of QZZZHH and QZKKHH, contact
THK. For details of the symbols of options, see A1-510.
Model number coding
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
With
steel
tape
(*1) See A1-502. (*2) See A1-510. (*3) See A1-70. (*4) See A1-76. (*5) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
A1-508
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
LM Guide (Options)
A1-509
506E
UU
End seal
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
Configuration of options
(Seal and metal scraper) + LaCS
(Seal and metal scraper) + LaCS + side scraper
With QZ + (seal and metal scraper)
With QZ + (seal and metal scraper) + LaCS
With QZ + (seal and metal scraper) + LaCS + side scraper
Example
UUHH
DDHHYY
QZZZ
QZZZHH
QZKKHHYY
Note) in the table represents the symbol for a seal and metal scraper.
Configuration of options
GG
LiCS
PP
QZGG
With QZ + LiCS
QZPP
Symbol
Configuration of options
JJHH
With End seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function)
TTHH
With Double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function)
JJHHYY
With End seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function) + side scraper
TTHHYY
With Double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function) + side scraper
QZJJHH
With QZ + end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function)
QZTTHH
With QZ + double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function)
QZJJHHYY
With QZ + end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function) + side scraper
QZTTHHYY
With QZ + double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (also has a metal scraper function) + side scraper
Note) HH type (with LaCS) of models SVR/SVS is provided with the protector (see A1-482).Protector also serves as metal scraper.
Contact THK if you want to use the Protector with other options.
A1-510
506E
Options
List of Parts Symbols
QZZZHH
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
(see A1-479 )
LM Guide (Options)
Metal scraper
(see A1-478 )
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
QZPP
QZTTHHYY
Side scraper
See A1-481
Protector
See A1-482
SVR/SVS with the protector
With QZ
Symbol for
Lubricator dust-proof accessory
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
A1-511
506E
Dedicated Bellows
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the dedicated bellows dimensions, see A1-513 to A1-524.
Item name
Purpose/location of use
Bellows
Dedicated
Bellows
A1-512
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
Bellows
[Dedicated Bellows JSH for Model SHS]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSH for model SHS. Specify the corresponding model number of the desired bellows from the table.
b
H
b1
a
t1
H1
S1
H1
t4
t3
t2
S1
b2
Models SHS35 to 65
Models SHS15 to 30
Unit: mm
H1
15
53
26
26
15
Main dimensions
t1
b1
C
V
R
22.4
4
4
8
20
60
30
30
17
27.6
7.5
7.5
20
25
75
36
36
20
38
9.1
9.1
13.1
25
30
80
38
38
20
44
11
11
14
11
35
86
40.5
40.5
20
50
11
11
18
20
21.5
45
97
46
46
20
64.6
13.5
13.5
23.5
26
26.5
45
55
105
48
48
20
68
13
13
23
30
31.5
55
65
126
63
63
25
80
18
18
34
45
65
Model No.
JSH
b2
t2
t3
t4
Supported
model
numbers
15
SHS
30
35
Unit: mm
Supported
model
numbers
SHS
Other dimensions
Mounting bolt
A
Lmax
Lmin
S1
15
*M28
M48
9.5
9.5
20
M2.68
M36
1.5
25
M38
M36
2.5
13.5
13.5
30
M310
M36
10
10
35
M410
M48
45
M412
M48
15
11.7
5.5
5.5
55
M512
M510
19
17.5
2.5
2.5
65
M614
M612
22
* Use self-tapping screws as the mounting screws on the LM block side of the JSH15.
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JSH35 - 60/420
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SHS35 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-513
LM Guide (Options)
Lmax
Lmin
Rubber seat Intermediate plate
506E
W
b1
Lmax
Lmin
a
t1
H1
S
H1
t4
t3
t2
b2
Main dimensions
A
Lmax
Lmin
Supported
model
numbers
H1
b2
t2
t3
15X 51
24
26
15 20.5 4.7
Mounting
bolt
t4
S
M35
15X
20X 58
26
30
15
25 4.2
M35
0.5
20X
JSSR 25X 71
33
38
Model No.
b1
t1
b
a
XW/XV
XTB
8.5
0.5
20
29
M35
11.5
SSR 25X
35
12
17
M46
30X
35X 84
44
14
20
M510
35X
39
39
20
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JSSR35X - 60/420
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SSR35X (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
S
Lmin S: Stroke length (mm)
A 1
Lmax LminAA: Extension rate
A1-514
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
P1
H1
t1
t2
P2
b2
S1
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model No.
JSHW
b1
t1
b2
t2
Supported
model
numbers
15.4
39
2.6
18
17
17
35.8
2.9
22
21
20
20
25
3.5
20
10
SHW 27
35
20
20
75
7.5
40
13
35
42
20
20
89.4
14
50
16
50
H1
P1
P2
17
68
22
21
75
25
23
15
26
17
27
85
33.5
33.5
35
50
120
35
164
42
Unit: mm
Other dimensions
Mounting bolt
Model No.
JSHW
b
Model
CA
Model
CR
A
Lmax
Lmin
S1
17
M24
M36
21
M25
M36
3.5
10.5
27
M2.66
M36
10
2.5
11.5
35
M38
M36
10
50
M412
M48
17
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) For the mounting bolts marked with , use tapping screws.
Note4) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JSHW21 - 60/360
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SHW21 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-515
LM Guide (Options)
Lmax
Lmin
W
b1
506E
W
b1
Lmax
Lmin
a
t1
H1
H1
t4
t3
t2
b2
Main dimensions
Model
No.
t1
W
H1
b1 A/B R
b2
t2
t3
t4
15 55 27 30 15 25 2.5 6.5 10
20 66 32 35 17 34
JH
Mounting
a
b
bolt
A/B
R
A/B
R
S
M36
25 78 38 38 20 30
11 10
M36
30 84 42 42 20 40
11 11 10
M48
35 88 43 43 20 40
A
Lmax
Lmin
7 1.5 11
8.5 4.5 4
7
Supported
model
numbers
15
20
15
25
12
30
16 14 23
M48
HSR 35
45 100 51 51 20 58 10 20 20 29
M510
10
45
55 108 54 54 20 66 11 21 26 35
M510
16
55
65 132 68 68 20 80 19 19 32 42
M612
19
65
85 170 88 88 30 105 23 23 44 50
M612
22.5 7
10
85
Note1) For model JH15s location marked with , mounting bolts are used only on the LM rail side while the LM block side
uses M2 x 5 (nominal) tapping screws.
Note2) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note3) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note4) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JH25 - 60/420
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for HSR25 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-516
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
Features
W
b1
max
min
Velcro
d
Velcro
t1
t4
t3
Intermediate plate
Main dimensions
Model
No.
15
DH 20
25
W H P b1 A/B R
t3
35 19.5 8.5 25 2.5 6.5 10
45
25
ExtenSupported
Factor model
sion
rate
numbers
t4
d
s A/B R A/B R max min A E
k
2.5 5 0
4
6 0.5 10 2.5 4
2 1.2
15
a
t1
10
34
52 29.5 12
30
11
10
3.5 3.5
0.5 13 2.5
2
15
1.3 HSR 20
1.3
25
Note1) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note2) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
DH20 - 50/250
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for HSR20 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
s
530
Lmin 132.5 135
4
A 1
Lmax ALmin5 135 675
Number of required crests n
Lmax
675
n 51.9 52 crests
101.3
Pk
Lmin nminE522.52 132
(E indicates the plate thickness of 2)
Therefore, the model number of the required
bellows is DH20-132/675.
A1-517
LM Guide (Options)
(1) Has a width and height smaller than the conventional product so that any part of the bellows
does not stick out of the top face of the LM block. The extension rate is equal to or greater than
that of the conventional type.
(2) Has an intermediate plate for each crest so that it will not easily lift and the bellows can be used
with vertical mount, wall mount and slant mount.
(3) Operable at high speed, at up to 120 m/min.
(4) Since a Velcro tape can be used to install the bellows, a regular-size model can be cut to the desired length, or two or more regular-size bellows can be taped together.
(5) Can be installed using screws just as bellows JH.
In this case, a plate (thickness: 1.6 mm) must be placed between the bellows and the LM bock.
Contact THK for details.
506E
b
S
b1
t1
t4
t3
H1
H1
t2
S
S
Models SR15 to 25
b2
Models SR30 to 70
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
JS
A
Lmax
Lmin
Supported
model
numbers
H1
b1
b2
t2
t3
t4
Mounting
bolt
a
S
15
51
24
26
15
22 3.4
M36
8.5
0.5
15
20
58
26
30
15
25 4.2
M36
0.5
20
33
38
25
Model No.
t1
b
W/V TB/SB
25
71
20
29
M36
11.5
30
76 37.5 37.5 20
42
12
17
M48
35
84
44 6.5 14
20
M510 1.5
45
95 47.5 47.5 20
60
22
27
M510 1.5
12.5
45
55
70
10
24
28
M612 0.5
16
55
70
144 67
90
13
34
35
M612 3
10
70
39
39
67
20
30
SR
30
35
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JS55 - 60/540
Model number of
bellows for SR55
A1-518
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
Features
W
b1
b
H
max Velcro
min
Velcro
d a
t1
P
t4
t3
Intermediate plate
Main dimensions
Model
No.
Extension
rate
b
t3
t4
min
15
38 19 10 22 3.4
3.5
13
2.5
1.3
DS 20
49 22 10 25 4.2
3.5
13
2.5
1.3
56 26 12 29
8.5
15
1.3
25
b1
t1
Factor
Supported
model
numbers
15
SR
20
25
Note1) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note2) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
DS20 - 50/250
Model number of
bellows for SR20
A1-519
LM Guide (Options)
(1) Has a width and height smaller than the conventional product so that any part of the bellows
does not stick out of the top face of the LM block. The extension rate is equal to or greater than
that of the conventional type.
(2) Has an intermediate plate for each crest so that it will not easily lift and the bellows can be used
with vertical mount, wall mount and slant mount.
(3) Operable at high speed, at up to 120 m/min.
(4) Since a Velcro tape can be used to install the bellows, a regular-size model can be cut to the desired length, or two or more regular-size bellows can be taped together.
(5) Can be installed using screws just as the conventional type.
In this case, a plate (thickness: 1.6 mm) must be placed between the bellows and the LM bock.
Contact THK for details.
506E
W
b1
t1
Lmax
Lmin
W
t3
H1
H1
t2
P
t2
S1
S1
Main dimensions
Model
No.
Mounting bolt
W
JN
25
48
30
60
31
35
70
35
45
86
55
100
65
126
75
145
85
156
100
200
49
b1
t1
t2
t3
26.6
4.6
13
M35 M44
11
1.5
25X
31
14
34
5.5
17
M48 M44
15
1.5
30
35
15
36
20.5
M48 M54
15
10
35
17
47
6.5
24
M510 M54
17
10
45
20
54
10
29.5
18
M510 M54
20
13
22
3.2
13
NR/
55
NRS
65
25
3.2
20
75
49
57.5 57.5
64
64
70.5 70.5
82
40.5 40.5
82
S1
A
Supported
Lmax
model
Lmin numbers
10
H1
25.5 25.5
b
A,LA
B,LB
20
64
13.5 36.2
20
M612 M65
30
80
10.5 34.2
26
M612 M65
30
110
15.5 39.5
28
3.2
20
85
30
140
34
M816 M65
3.2
20
100
15
40
30
Note1) When desiring to use the bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure
to indicate that the bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JN25 - 60/420
S
Lmin S: Stroke length (mm)
A 1
Lmax LminAA: Extension rate
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for NR/NRS25X (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
Table
Telescopic cover
Base
Fig.1 Example of Mounting the Bellows
A1-520
Bellows
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
b1
t1
H1
t2
S
b2
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model No.
W
JHRW
H1
b1
t1
b2
t2
Mounting
bolt
S
b
Model Model
CA
CR
4
9
A
Lmax
Lmin
Supported
model
numbers
17
68
22
23
15
43
18
M36
17
21
75
25
26
17
48
22
M36
3.5
10.5
21
HRW 27
27
85
33.5 33.5
20
48
20
10
M36
10
2.5
11.5
35
120
35
35
20
75
3.5
40
13
M36
10
35
50
164
42
42
20
100
50
16
M48
17
50
Note1) For model JHRW17s location marked with , mounting bolts are used only on the LM rail side while the LM block
side uses M2.5 x 8 (nominal) tapping screws.
Note2) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note3) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note4) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
JHRW21 - 60/360
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for HRW21 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-521
LM Guide (Options)
Lmax
Lmin
506E
W
b1
S
a
t1
b2
H1
H1
t2
t4
t3
Models NSR30
to 70TBC
Models NSR20
and 25TBC
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model
No.
H1
b1
t1
b2
t2
t3
t4
Mounting
bolt
S
A
Lmax
Lmin
Supported
model
numbers
20
65
39
43
20
26
M48
20TBC
25
75
43
45
20
40
11
12
M48
25TBC
30
85
46
46
20
50
12
12
25
M48
40
115
59
59
25
60
13
16
32
M510
50
115
66
66
25
75
11
20
32
M510
50TBC
70
124
84
78
25
96
16
36
40
M612
70TBC
NSR
30TBC
40TBC
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding
J50 - 60/540
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for NSR50TBC (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-522
506E
Options
Dedicated Bellows
W
b1
Lmax
Lmin
t1
H1
t4
t3
P
H1
t2
S1
b2
S1
Main dimensions
Model
No.
t1
W
JSRG
H1
b1 A/C R/V b2
t2
t3
t4
A
Supported
Screw Mounting
Lmax
a
b
model
size
bolt
Lmin numbers
S1 A/C R/V A/C R/V
S
M2
M4
M2
M3
4 10.5
15
20
M2
15
25
M3
M48 5 2
12
30
35 88 42 42 22 15 35
12 13 23
M3
M44
45 100 51 51 20 20 32
17 15 29
M3
M54
10 10 7
55 108 57 57 20 20 36 10 20 25 35
M3
M54
13 16 4
28 42
M4
M65
19 3
65
M6
M68
23.5
85
M6
M68
26
100
SRG
35
45
55
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Note4) In case of oil lubrication, be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block
where the piping joint should be attached.
For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see A1-12 and A24-2, respectively.
Model number coding
JSRG35 - 60/420
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SRG35 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-523
LM Guide (Options)
506E
W
b1
Lmax
Lmin
a t1
W
H1
t2
P
b2
S1
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Supported
model
numbers
70 125 51 51 20 20 57 17 35 32
M3
M54L
10
85 138 57 57 20 20 68 20 42 36
M3
M54L
13 13.5
85
M4
M65L
13 15.5
SRW 100
M6
M68L
18 20
130
M6
M68L
20 20
150
Screw size
W
JSRW
A
Lmax
Lmin
Mounting
bolt
S1
Model No.
H
H1
b1
t1
b2
t2
70
Note1) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note2) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Model number coding
JSRW70 - 60/420
Model number of
Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SRW70 (length when compressed
/ length when extended)
A1-524
506E
Options
Dedicated LM Cover
Dedicated LM Cover
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the dedicated LM cover dimensions, see A1-526.
Purpose/location of use
LM cover
Dedicated
LM Cover
A1-525
LM Guide (Options)
Item name
506E
LM Cover
[Dedicated LM Cover TPH for Model HSR]
The tables below show the dimensions of dedicated LM cover TPH for model HSR. Specify the corresponding model number of the desired bellows from the table.
W
D
b1
Lmax
Lmin
t1
H
t4
t3
t2
S
b2
Main dimensions
Model No.
TPH
t4
Mounting
bolt S
10
M36
11
10
M48
30
23
M48
HSR 35
45
D
(max)
b1
t1
b2
t2
t3
25
55
42
28
30
30
60
48
34
40
35
70
55
38
40
14
45
90
75
48
58
10
20
29
M510
55
100
88
55
66
11
26
35
M510
Stage
25
TPH
30
35
Stroke
min
max
200
530
330
150
380
230
100
230
130
250
680
430
200
530
330
150
380
230
300
830
530
250
680
430
200
530
330
150
380
230
TPH55 - 400/1460
Model number of
LM cover for HSR55
Lmax
(cover length when extended)
A1-526
25
55
Unit: mm
Unit: mm
Model No.
Supported
model
numbers
Model No.
45
TPH
55
Stage
Stroke
min
max
350
980
630
300
830
530
250
680
430
200
530
330
400
1460
1060
350
1330
980
300
1060
760
250
860
610
506E
Options
Cap C
Cap C
Plastic hammer
H
Fig.1 Cap C
Table1 List of Model Numbers Supported for the Dedicated Cap C for LM Rail Mounting Holes
SSR
SR
SHS
HSR
SVR NR SCR HMG SHW SRG SRW GSR
SVS NRS CSR
HRW SRN
HCR
C3
M3
6.3
1.2
15
12
C4
M4
7.8
1.0
15Y
15
15
20
20
25Y 25Y
30
30
C5
M5
9.8
2.4
C6
M6
11.4
2.7
C8
M8
14.4
3.7
35
3.7
4.7
5.7
5.7
5.7
5.7
7.7
25
25X
20
12, 14,
17, 21,
27
30
30
25
25
35
35
35
35
35
50
45
55
70
85
45
55
45
55
30
35
45
55
45
65
65
65
75
85
100
85
100
HR
1123
1530
12
15
15
15
14
20
25
30
20
20
2042
20
25
25
25
40
50
70
30
60
30
35
45
55
70
85
100
35
2555
3065
3575
4085
65
65
130
50105
85
100
150
Note) The dedicated cap for the LM rail mounting hole can be made of other materials (e.g., metal). Contact THK for details.
A1-527
LM Guide (Options)
If any of the LM rail mounting holes of an LM Guide is filled with cutting chips or foreign material, they
may enter the LM block structure. Entrance of such foreign material can be prevented by covering each
LM rail mounting hole with the dedicated cap.
Since the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes uses a special synthetic resin with high oil resistance and high wear resistance, it is highly durable.
To attach the dedicated cap to the mounting hole, place a flat metal piece like one shown in Fig.1 on
the cap and gradually hammer in the cap until it is on the same level as the top face of the LM rail.
When attaching the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes, do not remove any of the LM blocks
from the LM rail.
506E
Cap GC
For notes regarding how to handle the GC cap, see A1-547.
LM rail
Cap GC
Cap GC
LM rail
mounting bolt
LM rail
GC caps are metal caps designed to cover the mounting holes in LM rails (in compliance with RoHS
directives).
In harsh environments, preventing any influx of coolant or foreign material from the top face of the
LM rail, coupled with the use of seals, will dramatically improve the contamination protection performance for the LM guide.
[Features]
Eliminates gaps
Seals
Foreign material
Not pushed in
LM Guide
Standard C cap fitted GC cap fitted
A1-528
506E
Options
Cap GC
Specification Table
Unit: mm
Outer diameter D
9.86
11.36
14.36
17.86
20.36
23.36
26.36
35.36
39.36
Thickness H
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
4.6
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
Model
No.
LM rail
mounting
bolt
GC5
M5
GC6
M6
GC8
GC10
GC12
GC14
SVR
SVS
NR
NRS
SSR
SR
20
25Y
30
20
25Y
30
25
25X
20
20
30
30
25
25
35
M8
35
35
35
35
M10
M12
M14
45
55
70
85
120
45
55
45
55
30
35
45
55
30
35
45
GC16
M16
GC22
GC24
M22
M24
50
60
SRW
GSR
HR
20
20
2042
25
25
30
70
85
100
35
2555
3065
3575
4085
30
35
45
55
NSRTBC
20
25
30
40
50
70
65
65
65
65
65
130
50105
85
100
85
100
85
100
150
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
With GC cap
Symbol for No. of rails used on the same plane
Accuracy symbol
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(Example) SVR45LR2QZTTHHC0+1200LPGC
With GC cap
* Add the symbol (GC) to the end of the model number.
A1-529
LM Guide (Options)
Model No.
GC5
GC6
GC8
GC10
GC12
GC14
GC16
GC22
GC24
506E
Mounting method
The procedure for inserting a GC cap into a
mounting hole consists of using a flat aligning
fitting to gradually punch the cap into the hole
until it is level with the upper surface of the LM
rail, as shown in the figure. Fit GC caps without
removing the LM rail from the LM block.
A1-530
Plastic hammer
Metal piece
506E
Options
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP
LM rail
Plate cover: SV
Fixing-jig: NT
Plate Cover SV
Slide piece
Tension screw
Purpose/location of use
Steel tape: SP
Setscrew
End piece: EP
Tap for attaching bellows
Steel Tape SP
LM block
LM block mounting/
removing jig
A1-531
LM Guide (Options)
Item name
506E
A1-532
Plate cover
Chamfer
Slide piece
Mounting
hole
Fixing plate
Fig.1
LM rail
Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig.4
Fig.5
506E
Options
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP
Note1) The setscrew on the side face is used to lightly secure the bent steel tape. Be sure to stop fastening
the screw as soon as it hits the end face, and do not
force the screw further.
Note2) Since the steel tape is a thin steel plate, mishandling
it may cause an accident such as cutting your finger.
When handling it, take an effective safety measure
such as wearing rubber gloves.
End piece: EP
Steel tape: SP
Fig.6
LM block
LM block mounting/removing jig
Fig.7
Mounting surface
Fig.8
Steel tape
Release paper
Fig.9
Steel tape
Do not make an acute angle
LM block
LM block mounting/removing jig
Fig.10
Steel tape: SP
Setscrew
End piece: EP
Tap for attaching a bellows
Fig.11
A1-533
LM Guide (Options)
506E
Lubrication Adapter
Lubrication plate
To lubrication
pump
Lubrication plate
Constant quantity
distributor
To lubrication pump
[Specifications]
Viscosity range
32 to 64 mm2/s recommended
of lubricant used
Discharge
W
B
2-M11
T
T1
0.034, 0.064cc/1shot
M1 E
Diameter of pipe
4, 6
connected
Material
Aluminum alloy
W1
Fig.2
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model No. Width Height
W
M
A30N
56
29
W1
M1
T1
M M11
25
29
14.5
46
14
5.3
3.5
M88 M88
A35N
66
33
25
35
17
54
16.5
5.3
4.5
M88 M88
A45N
81
38
25
48
20
67
16.5
7.8
6.6
M88 M88
A55N
94
45.5
25
56
22
76
20.5
7.8
6.6
M88 M88
A65N
119
55.5
25
67
26.3
92
25.5
11.5
7.8
M88 M88
A85N
147
68.5
25
92
34
114
32
15.5
7.8
M88 M88
A1-534
Quantity
per shot
(cc/shot)
0.034
0.064
506E
Options
Removing/mounting Jig
Removing/mounting Jig
LM rail
LM block
Removing/mounting Jig
Removing/mounting Jig
(Material: ABS resin)
A1-535
LM Guide (Options)
When assembling the guide, do not remove the LM block from the LM rail whenever possible. If it is
inevitable to remove the LM block due to the plate cover type or the assembly procedure, be sure to
use the removing/mounting jig.
Mounting the LM block without using the removing/mounting jig may cause rolling elements to fall
from the LM block due to contamination by foreign material, damage to internal components or slight
inclination. Mounting the LM block with some of the rolling elements missing may also cause damage to the LM block at an early stage.
When using the removing/mounting jig, do not incline the jig and match the ends of both LM rails.
The removing/mounting jig may not be available, depending on model. If this is the case, use a
spare LM rail. Contact THK for details.
If any of the rolling elements falls from the LM block, contact THK instead of using the product.
Note that the removing/mounting jig is not included in the LM Guide package as standard. When
desiring to use it, contact THK.
506E
End Piece EP
For those models whose balls may fall if the LM rail is pulled out of the LM block, an end piece is attached to the product to prevent the LM block from being removed from the LM rail.
For models that can use the end piece, see the table below.
If removing the end piece when using the LM Guide, be sure that the LM block will not overshoot.
The end piece can also be used as a fixing jig for a steel tape, and is available also for the LM rail of
models SSR, SR and HSR.
Table1 Dimension Table for End Piece EP for Models NR/NRS
Unit: mm
C
T
A1-536
Model No.
NR/NRS 25X
26
14
25
1.5
NR/NRS 30
31
14
31
1.5
NR/NRS 35
38
16
32.5
NR/NRS 45
49
18
41
NR/NRS 55
57
20
46.5
NR/NRS 65
69.4
22
59
3.2
NR/NRS 75
81.7
28
56
3.2
NR/NRS 85
91.4
22
68
3.2
NR/NRS 100
106.4
25
73
3.2
506E
Model No.
LM Guide
[LM Guide]
Models SHS, SSR, SVR/SVS, SHW, HSR, SR, NR/NRS, HRW, JR, NSR-TBC, HSR-M1,
SR-M1 and HSR-M2.
Type of
With QZ Contamination protection
LM block Lubricator accessory symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Model EPF
EPF7M 16 +55L P M
Model No.
LM rail length
(in mm)
Guaranteed stroke
(in mm)
Rail material:
Stainless steel (standard)
A1-537
LM Guide
Model number configurations differ depending on the model features. Refer to the corresponding
sample model number configuration.
506E
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
2 SRS20M QZ UU C1 +220L P M -
Model No.
With QZ Contamination
Lubricator protection accessory
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
[Cross LM Guide]
Total No. of
LM blocks
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76.
A1-538
506E
Model No.
[Separate LM Guides]
Model HR
2 HR2555 UU M +1000L P T M
Stainless steel
LM block
Model GSR
LM block
LM rail
GSR25 -1060L H K
GSR25 T UU
Model
number
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Type of LM block
Model
number
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
tapped-hole
LM rail type
GSR25 T 2 UU +1060L H T K
Model No. Type of
LM block
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory symbol (*1)
[R Guide]
Model HCR
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail radius
R-Guide
center angle (in mm)
(*1) See A1-510 (contamination protection accessories). (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76.
(*4) Number of LM rails used on one arc. For details, contact THK.
A1-539
LM Guide
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
506E
[Straight-Curved Guide]
Model HMG
When 2 rails are used
Contamination Overall linear LM rail Center angle of one No. of inner curved Radius of outer Symbol for No. of
protection
rails used on the
accessory
length per rail
inner curved rail
LM rails jointed
curved rail
symbol (*1)
same plane (*2)
Radius of inner
curved rail
Model HSR-M1VV
HSR15M1R 1 VV C1 +400L P -
Symbol for No. of rails used
Radial clearance
on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Labyrinth seal
Accuracy symbol (*3)
symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks used
LM rail length (in mm)
on one rail
Model No.
(*1) See A1-70 (*2) See A1-397(*3) See A1-76 (*4) See A1-13.
Note1) The radial clearance, maximum LM rail length and accuracy class are equal to that of model HSR.
Note2) With this model, a single-rail unit constitutes one set (i.e., the required number of sets when 2 rails are used in parallel
is 2).
Model SR-MS
SR15MSV 1 CS +340L P -
Model No.
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on one rail
Note) With this model, a single-rail unit constitutes one set (i.e., the required number of sets when 2 rails are used in parallel
is 2).
A1-540
506E
Model No.
Notes on Ordering
[Order units]
Note that the number of items that constitute one set differs depending on the type of LM guide.
Check the sample model number configurations and the accompanying notes.
SHS25C2SSC1+640L 1 set
HR2555UU+600L 1 set
SCR25UU+1200/1000LP 1 set
LM Guide
SHS25C2SSC1+640L-2 sets
GSR25TUU+1060L 2 sets
A1-541
506E
A1-542
506E
Precautions on Use
LM Guide
[Precautions on Use]
(1) Prevent foreign material, such as cutting chips or coolant, from entering the product. Failure to
do so may cause damage.
(2) If the product is used in an environment where cutting chips, coolant, corrosive solvents, water,
etc., may enter the product, use bellows, covers, etc., to prevent them from entering the product.
(3) Do not use this product if the external temperature exceeds 80. Unless the unit is specially designed to be heat-resistant, exposure to such temperatures may deform or damage plastic and
rubber parts.
(4) If foreign material such as cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant after
cleaning the product.
(5) Micro-strokes tend to obstruct oil film to form on the raceway in contact with the rolling element,
and may lead to fretting corrosion. Take consideration using grease offering excellent fretting prevention. It is also recommended that a stroke movement corresponding to the length of the LM
block be made on a regular basis to make sure oil film is formed between the raceway and rolling
element.
(6) Do not use undue force when fitting parts (pin, key, etc.) to the product. This may generate permanent deformation on the raceway, leading to loss of functionality.
(7) If, for operational reasons, it becomes absolutely necessary to remove the LM block from the LM
rail and reattach it, a special mounting jig must be used for this purpose. (The mounting jig is not
included with standard versions of the product. To obtain one, please contact THK.)
(8) Position the mounting jig so that one end abuts the end of the LM rail. When the rail and the jig
are exactly aligned, the LM block can be loaded onto the rail.
(9) Take care to keep the LM block straight. Loading the block at an angle can introduce foreign
matter, damage internal components, or cause balls to fall out.
(10) The LM block must contain all its internal rolling elements (balls) when mounted on the LM rail.
Using a block with any balls removed may result in premature damage.
(11) Please contact THK if any balls fall out of the LM block; do not use the block if any balls are
missing.
A1-543
LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) This product consists mostly of heavy items (20 kg or more). When moving heavy items, use 2
or more people or moving equipment. Doing so may cause injury or damage.
(2) Do not disassemble the parts. This will result in loss of functionality.
(3) Tilting an LM block or LM rail may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(4) Take care not to drop or strike the LM Guide. Doing so may cause injury or damage. Giving an
impact to it could also cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
(5) Do not remove the LM block from the LM rail during setup.
(6) Do not insert hands or fingers into the mounting holes on the LM rail, as they could get caught
between the rail and the LM block, resulting in injury.
(7) To ensure personal safety, wear gloves and protective footwear when handling this product.
506E
(12) If the end plate is damaged due to an accident, etc., balls may fall out or the LM block may
become detached from the LM rail and drop. If the LM Guide will be used hanging upside
down, take preventive measures such as adding a safety mechanism to prevent falls.
(13) Insufficient rigidity or accuracy of mounting members causes the bearing load to concentrate on
one point and the bearing performance will drop significantly. Accordingly, give sufficient consideration to the rigidity/accuracy of the housing and base and strength of the fixing bolts.
(14) When removing the LM block from the LM rail and then replacing the block, an LM block mounting/removing jig that facilitates such installation is available. Contact THK for details.
[Lubrication]
(1) Thoroughly remove anti-rust oil and feed lubricant before using the product.
(2) Do not mix different lubricants. Mixing greases using the same type of thickening agent may still
cause adverse interaction between the two greases if they use different additives, etc.
(3) When using the product in locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environments such
as clean rooms, vacuum and low/high temperature, use the grease appropriate for the specification/
environment.
(4) When lubricating the product having no grease nipple or oil hole, apply grease directly on the
raceway and stroke the product several times to let the grease spread inside.
(5) The consistency of grease changes according to the temperature. Take note that the slide resistance
of the LM Guide also changes as the consistency of grease changes.
(6) After lubrication, the slide resistance of the LM Guide may increase due to the agitation resistance of
grease. Be sure to perform a break-in to let the grease spread fully, before operating the machine.
(7) Excess grease may scatter immediately after lubrication, so wipe off scattered grease as necessary.
(8) The properties of grease deteriorate and its lubrication performance drops over time, so grease must
be checked and added properly according to the use frequency of the machine.
(9) Although the lubrication interval may vary according to use conditions and the service environment,
lubrication should be performed approximately every 100 km in travel distance (three to six months).
Set the final lubrication interval/amount based on the actual machine.
(10)If the mounting orientation is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach the raceway completely. For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see B1-28 and
B24-2, respectively.
(11)When adopting oil lubrication, the lubricant may not be distributed throughout the LM block depending
on the mounting orientation of the block. Contact THK in advance for details.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Guide, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a room in a
horizontal orientation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
After the product has been in storage for an extended period of time, lubricant inside may have deteriorated, so add new lubricant before use.
[Disposal]
Dispose of the product properly as industrial waste.
A1-544
506E
Precautions on Use
Precautions on Handling the LM Guide for Special Environment
Oil-Free LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) The Oil-Free LM Guide is suitable for use at high temperatures, under atmospheric pressure or
in a high-vacuum environment of 10-6 Pa, and is designed for ultra-low dust emission. It is not
intended for use in locations requiring rigidity. Because a preload would affect the strength of its
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film, it does not support preloads.
(2) The product can be used in temperatures ranging from 20 to 150.
(3) To ensure proper function of the Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film, use this product in an environment free from condensation, at a humidity level of 40% or less.
(4) This product is not intended for joint use.
(5) Great care must be taken in the installation of the Oil-Free LM Guide, which requires greater
precision compared to standard LM Guides.
(6) If the LM block is removed from the LM rail, balls may fall out, and the Dry Lubrication S-Com-
pound Film can be damaged when the block is remounted. If it becomes necessary to remove
the LM block from the LM rail, please contact THK.
(7) This product should be stored in a horizontal position, in its original wrapping and package, in
a controlled, stable environment free from abnormal high or low temperatures or high humidity.
THK recommends storing it at room temperature (255), with a humidity level of 40% RH or
lower and an air-purity level of 10,000 or lower.
(8) This product has been thoroughly cleaned and degreased and then sealed in moisture-proof
packaging. If possible, open the package immediately prior to using the product.
(9) Once the packaging has been opened, store the product inside a clean, dry receptacle accompanied by silica gel or another drying agent. Do not use anti-rust oil or corrosion- or tarnishpreventive paper or fluid with this product.
(10)Wear protective rubber or vinyl gloves while handling this product and make sure the surrounding environment is relatively clean.
A1-545
LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) This product has been thoroughly cleaned and degreased and then sealed in moisture-proof
packaging. If possible, open the package immediately prior to using the product.
(2) Once the packaging has been opened, store the product inside a clean, dry receptacle accompanied by silica gel or another drying agent. Do not use anti-rust oil or corrosion- or tarnishpreventive paper or fluid with this product.
(3) Wear protective rubber or vinyl gloves while handling this product and make sure the surrounding environment is relatively clean.
506E
A1-546
506E
Precautions on Use
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide
Cap GC
For details regarding the GC cap, see A1-528.
[Handling]
If GC caps are specified for the product, the edges of the LM rail mounting hole openings will be
sharp. Take great care not to injure your fingers or hands while working.
When fitting GC caps, use a flat aligning tool to gradually punch the cap into the hole until it is level
with the upper surface of the LM rail. Then run an oil stone over the rail until the upper surface of the
rail and the GC caps are completely flat.
A1-547
LM Guide
[Service environment]
Be sure the service temperature of this product is between -20 to +80, and do not clean the product by immersing it in an organic solvent or white kerosene, or leave it unpacked.
It contacts only with the LM rail raceway. Do not use it in harsh environments.
506E
A1-548
506E
LM Guide
General Catalog
B1-1
506E
LM Guide
General Catalog
B Support Book
Features and Types ............................. B1-8
Features of the LM Guide ...................... B1-8
Large Permissible Load and High Rigidity .. B1-9
High Precision of Motion ....................... B1-11
Accuracy Averaging Effect by Absorbing Mounting Surface Error .. B1-14
Easy Maintenance ............................... B1-16
Substantial Energy Savings ................... B1-17
Low Total Cost ..................................... B1-18
Ideal Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove, Two-Point Contact Structure .. B1-19
Superb Error-Absorbing Capability with the DF Design .. B1-23
Classification Table of the LM Guides ... B1-24
Point of Selection ................................ B1-26
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide .... B1-26
Setting Conditions ................................. B1-28
Conditions of the LM Guide ................... B1-28
Selecting a Type .................................... B1-44
Types of LM Guides ............................. B1-44
Calculating the Applied Load ................. B1-56
Calculating an Applied Load .................. B1-56
Example of calculation .......................... B1-59
Calculating the Equivalent Load ............ B1-66
Rated Load of an LM Guide in Each Direction .. B1-66
Calculating the Static Safety Factor ...... B1-68
Calculating the Average Load................ B1-69
Example of Calculating the Average Load (1)
- with Horizontal Mount and Acceleration/Deceleration Considered - .. B1-71
Example of Calculating the Average Load (2)
- When the Rails are Movable................... B1-72
B1-2
506E
B1-3
506E
B1-4
506E
B1-5
506E
B1-6
506E
QZ Lubricator......................................... A1-502
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with QZ Attached .. A1-505
List of Parts Symbols ............................. A1-510
Dedicated Bellows ................................. A1-512
Bellows .............................................. A1-513
Dedicated LM Cover .............................. A1-525
LM Cover............................................ A1-526
Cap C .................................................... A1-527
Cap GC.................................................. A1-528
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP ............. A1-531
Lubrication Adapter................................ A1-534
Removing/mounting Jig ......................... A1-535
End Piece EP ........................................ A1-536
Model No. ............................................. A1-537
Model Number Coding .......................... A1-537
Notes on Ordering................................ A1-541
Precautions on Use ............................. A1-543
Precautions on Using the LM Guide ...... A1-543
Precautions on Handling the LM Guide for Special Environment .. A1-545
LM Guide for Medium-to-Low Vacuum .... A1-545
Oil-Free LM Guide ............................... A1-545
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. A1-546
QZ Lubricator for the LM Guide .............. A1-546
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper for LM Guides .. A1-546
Light Contact Seal LiCS for LM Guides ... A1-547
Cap GC .............................................. A1-547
B1-7
506E
LM Guide
Easy maintenance
Easy maintenance
Improved productivity of the machine
Substantial energy savings
Low total cost
Higher accuracy of the machine
Higher efficiency in machine design
B1-8
506E
170
Housing
Shaft
Linear bushing
Mounting base
165
LM block
34
LM rail
24
3.175 (1/8)
0.90 kN
0.07 kN
13
4.763 (3/16)
2.03 kN
0.16 kN
13
6.350 (1/4)
3.61 kN
0.28 kN
13
7.938 (5/16)
5.64 kN
0.44 kN
13
12.68 kN
0.98 kN
13
11.906 (15/32)
P1
P/P1
R-groove
Flat surface
B1-9
LM Guide
506E
[High Rigidity]
The LM Guide is capable of bearing vertical and horizontal loads. Additionally, due to the circular-arc
groove design, it is capable of carrying a preload as necessary to increase its rigidity.
When compared with a feed screw shaft system and a spindle in rigidity, the guide surface using an
LM Guide has higher rigidity.
Example of comparing static rigidity between the LM Guide, a feed screw shaft system and a spindle
(vertical machining center with the main shaft motor of 7.5 kW)
Table2 Comparison of Static Rigidity
Unit: N/m
[Components]
LM Guide: SVR45LC/C0
(C0 clearance: preload = 11.11kN)
Ball Screw: BNFN4010-5/G0
(G0 clearance: preload = 2.64kN)
Spindle: general-purpose cutting spindle
X-axis
Components
direction
Y-axis
direction
Z-axis direction
2400
9400 (radial)
7400 (reverse radial)
LM Guide
Ball screw
330
Spindle
250
250
280
Spindle
X
LM Guide
Ball Screw
Fig.3
B1-10
Z
Y
506E
-20
Position
20
14m
-10
30
20
10
10
1m
-30
30
LM Guide
Position
10
20
30
Number of commands (pulse)
-30
-20
-10
10
10
20
20
30
30
10
20
30
Number of commands (pulse)
(Measurements are taken with the single-axis table loaded with a 500-kg weight)
Fig.4 Comparison of Lost Motion between the LM Guide and a Slide Guide
Unit: m
Test method
Type
Clearance
LM Guide
(HSR45)
Square slide
+
turcite
2.3
3.6
0.02mm
10.7
0.005mm
8.7
500mm/min
5.3
4.4
4000mm/min
3.9
Based on minimum
unit feeding
0
3.1
15
14.1
14
13.1
12.1
13
Unit: m
Symbol
C1
C0
Radial clearance
25 to 10
40 to 25
B1-11
506E
200
150st
SHS25LC
m
200
250
640
Pitching accuracy
m
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80
100
Yawing accuracy
m
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0
120
140
B1-12
160
mm
KR4610A
506E
1000
LM Guide
1000
W
[Conditions]
Model No. : HSR65LA3SSC0 + 2565LP-
Radial clearance
: C0 (preload: 15.7 kN)
Stroke
: 1,050mm
Speed
: 15 m/min (stops 5 sec at both ends)
Acceleration/decelelation time in rapid motion
: 300 ms (acceleration: = 0.833 m/s2)
Mass
: 6000kg
Drive
: Ball Screws
Lubrication : Lithium soap-based grease No. 2
(greased every 100 km)
Fig.6 Condition
100
91.5
50
500
1000 1500
Distance traveled (km)
2000
B1-13
506E
Electric micrometer
Table
Base
265
200
Straight-edge
200
310
Single-axis actuator
293
303
685
Fig.8
0.01
0
0
0.01
0.02
Misalignment (mm)
0.02
Rail 2
0.002
0.001
0.368 m
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
0.001
0.002
Stroke (mm)
Displacement of the table (vertical)
Fig.9
B1-14
Rail 2
0.01
0
0
0.01
Rail 1
0.02
Misalignment (mm)
0.02
0.002
0.001
0.601 m
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
0.001
0.002
Stroke (mm)
Displacement of the table (horizontal)
506E
Even on a roughly milled mounting surface, the LM Guide drastically increases running accuracy of
the top face of the table.
[Example of Installation]
When comparing the mounting surface accuracy (a) and the table running accuracy (b), the
results are :
Horizontal
92.5m
28m
15m
1/6
1/7
4m
Mounting
surface
Direction
Vertical
Horizontal
Bottom
surface
Side surface
Straightness
A
80
105
40
16
Average
(a)
92.5
28
16m
40m
105 m
Bottom surface B
80m
Side surface D
Side surface C
Bottom surface A
Fig.10 Surface Accuracy of the LM Guide Mounting Base (Milled Surface Only)
Direction
Measurement point
1
Vertical
+2
+8
+13
+15
+9
+5
Straightness (b)
15
Horizontal
+1
+2
+3
+2
+2
B1-15
LM Guide
Vertical
506E
Easy Maintenance
Unlike with sliding guides, the LM Guide does not incur abnormal wear. As a result, sliding surfaces
do not need to be reconditioned, and precision needs not be altered. Regarding lubrication, sliding
guides require forced circulation of a large amount of lubricant so as to maintain an oil film on the
sliding surfaces, whereas the LM Guide only needs periodical replenishing of a small amount of
grease or lubricant. Maintenance is that simple. This also helps keep the work environment clean.
B1-16
506E
Machine Specifications
Single-axis surface grinding machine
(sliding guide)
Overall length
overall width
13m3.2m
12.6m2.6m
Total mass
17000kg
16000kg
Table mass
5000kg
5000kg
Grinding area
0.7m5m
0.7m5m
Table guide
Ratio
Motor used
38.05kW
3.7kW
10.3
Thrust
23600N
2270N
10.4
Electric Power
consumption
38kWH
3.7kWH
10.3
400/year
250/year
1.6
Lubricant consumption
60 /year (oil)
16.7
B1-17
LM Guide
Type of machine
506E
Machining
Accuracy (straightness
and torsion) measurement
with a LM Guide temporarily
mounted
Machining
Degreasing machined
surfaces
Coating surfaces
with special resin
Drying in thermally
controlled chamber
Accuracy measurement
Accuracy measurement
Corrective scraping
B1-18
506E
d2
Contact width
Rotation axis
Rotation axis
Rotation axis
Contact width
d1
d2
on
A
B
d2 d1
d2 d1
R: Radius of
curvature
Contact
angle
Contac
Differential slip
t angle
ta
ct
id
th
Contact width
R: Radius of
curvature
Differential slip
B
B
B
d1
d1
d1
A
d2
d2
Fig.12
d1
A
d2
d2
Fig.13
As indicated in Fig.12 and Fig.13, when the ball rotates one revolution, the ball slips by the difference between the circumference of the diameter of inner surface (d1) and that of the outer contact
diameter (d2). (This slip is called differential slip.) If the difference is large, the ball rotates while
slipping, the friction coefficient increases more than 10 times and the friction resistance steeply increases.
B1-19
LM Guide
506E
Smooth Motion
Since the ball contacts the groove at two points in
the load direction as shown in Fig.12 and Fig.13 on
B1-19 even under a preload or a normal load,
the difference between d1 and d2 is small and the differential slip is minimized to allow smooth rolling motion.
With the Gothic-arch groove product, each ball contacts the groove at four points, preventing itself from
being elastically deformed and the contact points from
moving (i.e., no self-adjusting capability). Therefore,
even a slight distortion of the mounting surface or an
accuracy error of the rail bed cannot be absorbed and
smooth motion cannot be achieved. Accordingly, it is
necessary to machine a highly rigid mounting base
with high precision and mount a high precision rail.
Rigidity
With the two-point contact, even if a relatively large Since differential slip occurs due to the four-point conpreload is applied, the rolling resistance does not ab- tact, a sufficient preload cannot be applied and high
normally increase and high rigidity is obtained.
rigidity cannot be obtained.
Load Rating
Since the curvature radius of the ball raceway is 51 Since the curvature radius of the gothic arch groove
to 52% of the ball diameter, a large rated load can be has to be 55 to 60% of the ball diameter, the rated
obtained.
load is reduced to approx. 50% of that of the circular
arc groove.
Difference in Rigidity
As shown in Fig.14, the rigidity widely varies according to the difference in curvature radius or difference in preload.
a
a
2D
0.5
R=
.6Da
5D
0.5
R=0
R=
4
2
0
2 4 6 8 10 12
Rigidity (N/m)
Deflection (Rigidity) ( m)
Fig.14
B1-20
506E
[Accuracy Error of the Mounting Surface and Test Data on Rolling Resistance]
The difference between the contact structures translates into a rolling resistance.
In the gothic arch groove contact structure, each ball contacts at four points and differential slip or spinning
occurs if a preload is applied to increase rigidity or an error in the mounting precision is large. This sharply increases the rolling resistance and causes abnormal wear in an early stage.
The following are test data obtained by comparing an LM Guide having the four raceway, circular-arc groove
two-point contact structure and a product having the two-row, Gothic-arch, four-point contact structure.
[Conditions]
(1) LM Guide
SR30W (radial type)
2 sets
2 sets
HSR35A (4-way equal-load type)
(2) Two-row Gothic-arch groove product
Type with dimensions similar to HSR30 2 sets
Radial clearance: 0m
Without seal
Without lubrication
Load: table mass of 30 kg
LM Guide
[Sample]
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
HSR35
0
ASR3
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
B1-21
506E
60
50
40
30
5A
HSR3
W
0
3
R
S
20
10
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
Parallel displacement: P (mm)
0.12
(Parallelistic error)
Fig.15
Data 3: Difference between the levels of the top and bottom rails and rolling resistance
Displace the bottom of either rail vertically by S and create the height difference between the two axes. Then,
measure the rolling resistance. If there is a height difference between the rails, moment will act on the LM
block. If the LM Guides groove is the Gothic-arc groove, this will cause spinning. The LM Guide with the circular-arc groove is capable of absorbing the error caused by the height difference between rails as great as 0.3/200
mm, where its rolling resistance will not increase significantly.
S
200
60
50
40
30
HS
20
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Height displacement: S (mm)
(Level displacement)
B1-22
5A
SR30W
10
0
R3
0.5
506E
LM Guide
An LM ball guide mounted on a plane receives a moment (M) due to an error in flatness or in level
or a deflection of the table. Therefore, it is essential for the guide to have self-adjusting capability.
LM Guide Model HSR
Table
Mounting error
Distance from
the application
point
Mounting error
Deflection
Deflection
Distance from
the application
point
Distance from
the
application poi
nt
Deflection
Deflection
Distance from
the
application poi
nt
Since the distance from the application point of the bearing is large, the internal load generated from a mounting
error is large and the self-adjusting capability is small.
With an LM ball guide having angular ball bearings
mounted back-to-back, if there is an error in flatness or
a deflection in the table, the internal load applied to the
block is approx. 6 times greater than that of the frontto-front mount structure and the service life is much
shorter. In addition, the fluctuation in sliding resistance
is greater.
B1-23
506E
LM Guide
Ball Guide
Full-ball Type
Standard Type
Standard Type
Model SHS
Model SSR
Model HSR
Radial
Model SR
Radial
Model NSR-TBC
Self-aligning
Wide Type
Miniature Type
Model SHW
Low Center of Gravity
Model RSR
Ultra Compact
Model RSR-Z
Ultra Compact
High Corrosion Resistance
Miniature Type
Model SRS
Wide Type
Model EPF
Finite stroke
Model HRW
Wide Rail
4-way Equal Load
Cross Type
Model SCR
4-way Equal Load
B1-24
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ball cage
Ball cage
Radial
Caged roller
Caged roller
Radial
4-way
4-way
Wide Rail
506E
LM Guide
Roller Guide
Model SRG
Model SRN
Ultra-high Rigidity
Ultra-high Rigidity
Low Center of Gravity
Model MX
Miniature Cross
Wide Type
Model SRW
High Temperature
High Temperature
Ultra-high Rigidity
Radial
High Temperature
Separate Type
Model HR
Model HSR-M1VV Model SR-MS
Medium-to-Low Vacuum
Heavy Load
Oil-Free
R Guide Type
Model GSR
Model GSR-R
Interchangeable, Self-aligning
Interchangeable, Self-aligning
With Rack
Model HCR
Model JR Type
Straight-Curved Type
Model HMG
Model JR
Structural Member Rail
4-way Equal Load
B1-25
506E
Point of Selection
LM Guide
Selection Starts
1 Setting Conditions
Change span, number
of LM blocks and
number of LM rails
Mounting orientation
2 Selecting a Type
SHS, SSR, SVR, SVS, SHW, SRS, SCR, EPF, HSR, SR, NR, NRS, HRW, RSR,
RSR-Z, HR, GSR, GSR-R, CSR, MX, JR, HCR, HMG, NSR-TBC, HSR-M1,
SR-M1, RSR-M1, HSR-M2, HSR-M1VV, SR-MS, SRG, SRN, SRW
B1-44
to
B1-55
B1-56
B1-66
B1-66
B1-68
Judgment on the
static safety factor
NO
YES
B1-69
B1-73
NO
YES
B1-30
2 Corrosion Prevention
B1-30
3 Contamination Protection
Selection Completed
B1-26
B1-31
506E
Point of Selection
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide
LM Guide
B1-86
1 Accuracy Standards
B1-87
B1-88
A1-76
A1-450
B1-27
506E
Setting Conditions
Conditions of the LM Guide
[Mounting Orientation]
The LM Guide can be mounted in the following five orientations.
If the mounting orientation is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach the raceway
completely.
Be sure to let THK know the installation direction and the exact position in each LM block where the
grease nipple or the piping joint should be attached.
For the lubrication, see A24-2.
[Mounting Orientation]
Horizontal (symbol: H)
Inverted (symbol: R)
Up
Up
Up
Down
Down
Down
Vertical (symbol: V)
Up
Down
B1-28
Up
Down
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS25C2SSCO+1000LP -
Model number (details are given on the
corresponding page of the model)
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 2 axes.
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 2 axes.
Other
Required number of axes: 2
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 3 axes.
B1-29
LM Guide
506E
[Service environment]
Lubrication
When using an LM system, it is necessary to provide effective lubrication. Without lubrication, the
rolling elements or the raceway may be worn faster and the service life may be shortened.
A lubricant has effects such as the following.
(1) Minimizes friction in moving elements to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
(2) Forms an oil film on the raceway to decrease stress acting on the surface and extend rolling fatigue life.
(3) Covers the metal surface to prevent rust formation.
To fully bring out the LM Guides functions, it is necessary to provide lubrication according to the
conditions.
If the mounting orientation is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach the raceway
completely.
Be sure to let THK know the mounting orientation and the exact position in each LM block where the
grease nipple or the piping joint should be attached. For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see B1-28 and B24-2, respectively.
Even with an LM Guide with seals, the internal lubricant gradually seeps out during operation.
Therefore, the system needs to be lubricated at an appropriate interval according to the conditions.
Corrosion Prevention
Determining a Material
Any LM system requires a material that meets the environments. For use in environments where
corrosion resistance is required, some LM system models can use martensite stainless steel.
(Martensite stainless steel can be used for LM Guide models SSR, SHW, SRS, HSR, SR, HRW,
RSR, RSR-Z and HR.)
The HSR series includes HSR-M2, a highly corrosion resistant LM Guide using austenite stainless
steel, which has high anti-corrosive effect. For details, see A1-390.
Surface Treatment
The surfaces of the rails and shafts of LM systems can be treated for anti-corrosive or aesthetic purposes.
THK offers THK-AP treatment, which is the optimum surface treatment for LM systems.
There are roughly three types of THK-AP treatment: AP-HC, AP-C and AP-CF. (See B0-20.)
B1-30
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
Contamination Protection
B1-31
LM Guide
When foreign material enters an LM system, it will cause abnormal wear or shorten the service life,
and it is necessary to prevent foreign material from entering the system. When entrance of foreign
material is predicted, it is important to select an effective sealing device or dust-control device that
meets the environment conditions.
THK offers contamination protection accessories for LM Guides by model number, such as end
seals made of special synthetic rubber with high wear resistance, and side seals and inner seals for
further increasing dust-prevention effect.
In addition, for locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS and dedicated
bellows are available by model number. Also, THK offers dedicated caps for LM rail mounting holes,
designed to prevent cutting chips from entering the LM rail mounting holes.
When it is required to provide contamination protection for a Ball Screw in an environment exposed
to cutting chips and moisture, we recommend using a telescopic cover that protects the whole system or a large bellows.
For the options, see B1-103.
506E
[Special environments]
Clean Room
In a clean environment generation of dust
from the LM system has to be reduced
and anti-rust oil cannot be used.
Therefore, it is necessary to increase the
corrosion resistance of the LM system. In
addition, depending on the level of
cleanliness, a dust collector is required.
Corrosion Prevention
Material-based Measure
Stainless Steel LM Guide
This LM Guide uses martensite stainless
steel, which has corrosion resistant effect.
Surface Treatment
Grease
B1-32
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS
SVR/SVS
SSR
SRS
A1-118
A1-106
SCR
EPF
A1-162
A1-148
SRG
A1-170
SRN
SRW
A1-416
SSR
A1-432
SHW
SRS
A1-138
A1-106
SR
HRW
A1-208
A1-138
A1-442
HSR
A1-148
HR
A1-240
A1-178
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
SR-MS
HSR-M2
A1-390
A1-404
B0-20
A24-12
A24-14
B1-33
LM Guide
A1-94
SHW
506E
Vacuum
In a vacuum environment, measures are required
to prevent gas from being emitted from a resin
and the scattering of grease. Anti-rust oil cannot
be used, therefore, it is necessary to select a
product with high corrosion resistance.
High Temperature
LM Guide
Supported
models
HSR-M1 SR-M1
RSR-M1
Highly Corrosion
Resistant LM Guide
Corrosion Prevention
Stainless Steel LM Guide
In a vacuum environment, use a stainless
steel LM Guide, which is highly corrosion
resistant.
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Vacuum Grease
Oil-Free
In environments susceptible to liquid lubricants, a
lubrication method other than grease or oil is required.
Dry Lubricant
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film is a fully dry lubricant developed
for use under atmospheric to high-vacuum environments.
It has superior characteristics in load carrying capacity, wear
resistance and sealability to other lubrication systems.
B1-34
Oil-Free LM Guide
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1
SR-M1
HSR-M1VV
A1-370
A1-380
SR-MS
A1-396
A1-404
HSR-M2
A1-390
HSR
SR
A1-178
HR
HRW
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
SR-MS
A1-404
B1-35
LM Guide
A1-354
RSR-M1
506E
Corrosion
Prevention
As with clean room applications, it is
necessary to increase corrosion
resistance through material selection and
surface treatment.
Material-based Measure
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Highly Corrosion
Resistant LM Guide
Surface Treatment
B1-36
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHW
SSR
A1-138
SR
HSR
HRW
A1-178
HR
A1-148
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
HSR-M2
A1-390
THK AP-HC
Treatment
B0-20
THK AP-C
Treatment
B0-20
THK AP-CF
Treatment
B0-20
B1-37
LM Guide
A1-106
SRS
506E
High Speed
In a high speed environment, it is
necessary to apply an optimum
lubrication method that reduces
heat generation during high speed
operation and increases grease
retention.
QZ Lubricator
Grease
B1-38
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS
SRS
A1-106
SCR
A1-148
SRG
A1-118
A1-138
EPF
A1-162
A1-170
SRN
SRW
A1-416
A1-432
A1-442
QZ Lubricator
for the LM Guide
A1-502
A24-7
A24-20
B1-39
LM Guide
A1-94
SHW
SVR/SVS
SSR
506E
High Temperature
In a high temperature environment, dimensional
alterations caused by heat is problematic. Use a High
Temperature LM Guide, which is heat resistant and has
minimal dimensional alterations after being heated.
Also, use a high temperature grease.
Heat Resistance
High Temperature
LM Guide
Supported
models
Grease
High Temperature Grease
Use a high temperature grease with which the
rolling resistance of the LM system is
consistent even at high temperature.
Low Temperature
In a low temperature environment, use an LM system
with a minimal amount of resin components and a
grease that minimize fluctuations in rolling resistance,
even at low temperature.
High Temperature
Grease
Stainless Steel
LM Guide
Supported
models
Corrosion Prevention
Surface Treatment
Grease
Use THK AFC Grease, with which the rolling
resistance of the system little is consistent
even at low temperature.
Micro Motion
Low Temperature
Grease
Grease
THK AFC Grease
AFC Grease is a urea-based grease that excels
in oil film strength and wear resistance.
B1-40
Grease
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1
SR-M1
RSR-M1
SSR
A1-370
A1-380
SHW
SRS
A1-106
HSR
A1-138
SR
A1-148
HRW
A1-178
HR
A1-396
A1-208
A1-240
RSR
A1-276
A1-250
B0-20
A24-10
A24-10
B1-41
LM Guide
A1-354
HSR-M1VV
506E
Foreign Matter
If foreign matter enters the LM system, it will
cause abnormal wear and shorten the service
life. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent such
entrance of foreign matter.
Especially in an environment containing
small foreign matter or a water-soluble
coolant that a telescopic cover or a bellows
cannot remove, it is necessary to attach a
contamination protection accessory capable
of efficiently removing foreign matter.
LM Guide
+Metal scraper
+Contact scraper LaCS
+Cap GC, etc.
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
Metal Scraper
Metal Scraper
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator is a lubrication system that
feeds the right amount of lubricant by
closely contacting its highly oil-impregnated
fiber net to the ball raceway.
B1-103
Supported
models
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
Metal
Scraper
Protector
The protector minimizes the entrance of
foreign material even in harsh environments where foreign material such as fine
particles and liquids are present.
B1-42
B1-103
Supported
models
SRG
506E
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHW
SSR
LM Guide
A1-94
SRS
A1-106
A1-138
SVR/SVS
A1-118
NR/NRS
A1-178
A1-220
A1-416
B1-43
506E
Selecting a Type
Types of LM Guides
THK offers a wide array of types and dimensions with LM Guides as standard so that you can select
the optimal product for any application. With the unit structure of each model, you can easily obtain
high running accuracy with no clearance simply by mounting the product on a plane surface with
bolts. We have a proven track record and know-how in extensive applications with LM Guides.
Classification
Caged Ball
LM Guide
Radial type
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
Oil-Free LM Guide
for special environments
Caged Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Type
Specification
Table*
Basic static
load rating
SSR-XW
A1-110
SSR-XV
A1-112
9.1 to 21.7
SSR-XTB
A1-114
SR-W
A1-214
9.51 to 411
SR-M1W
A1-374
SR-V
A1-214
SR-M1V
A1-374
SR-TB
A1-216
SR-M1TB
A1-376
SR-SB
A1-216
SR- M1SB
A1-376
SR-MSV
A1-408
SR-MSW
A1-408
SVR-C
A1-128
48 to 260
68 to 328
SVR-LC
A1-128
57 to 340
86 to 481
SVR-R
A1-124
48 to 260
68 to 328
SVR-LR
A1-124
57 to 340
86 to 481
SVR-CH
A1-134
90 to 177
115 to 238
SVR-LCH
A1-134
108 to 214
159 to 312
SVR-RH
A1-132
90 to 177
115 to 238
SVR-LRH
A1-132
108 to 214
159 to 312
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-44
Load
capacity
diagram
9.7 to 22.5
19.3 to 537
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
Height
Width
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 33
34 to 48
24 to 33
52 to 73
24 to 135
34 to 250
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 48
34 to 70
24 to 68
52 to 140
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 48
52 to 100
24 to 28
34 to 42
24 to 28
34 to 42
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
50 to 126
31 to 75
50 to 126
48 to 70
100 to 140
48 to 70
55 to 80
55 to 80
Features
Long service life, long-term
maintenance-free operation
Low dust generation, low noise,
acceptable running sound
Superbly high speed
Smooth motion in all
mounting orientations
Major application
Photolithography machine
Organic EL display
manufacturing machine
Ion implantation equipment
orientations
70 to 100 mounting
Ultra-heavy load capacity
optimal for machine tools
70 to 100 Large radial load capacity
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
B1-45
LM Guide
506E
4-way type
Radial Type
Classification
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Caged Ball
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Type
Specification
Table*
Basic static
load rating
NR-A
A1-230
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LA
A1-230
44 to 599
113 to 1300
NR-B
A1-234
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LB
A1-234
44 to 599
113 to 1300
NR-R
A1-226
33 to 479
84.6 to 1040
NR-LR
A1-226
44 to 599
113 to 1300
SVS-C
A1-130
37 to 199
52 to 251
SVS-LC
A1-130
44 to 261
66 to 368
SVS-R
A1-126
37 to 199
52 to 251
SVS-LR
A1-126
44 to 261
66 to 368
SVS-CH
A1-134
69 to 136
88 to 182
SVS-LCH
A1-134
83 to 164
122 to 239
SVS-RH
A1-132
69 to 136
88 to 182
SVS-LRH
A1-132
83 to 164
122 to 239
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-46
Load
capacity
diagram
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
72 to 170
31 to 75
50 to 126
31 to 75
50 to 126
48 to 70
100 to 140
48 to 70
55 to 80
55 to 80
Features
4-way type
High vibration resistance
and impact resistance
due to improved damping
characteristics
Has dimensions almost the
same as that of the full-ball
type LM Guide model HSR,
which is practically a global
standard size
Major application
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
B1-47
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Caged Roller
LM Guide super ultra-heavyload, high rigidity
types
Full-Complement
LM Guides
for Machine Tools
high-rigidity model
for ultra-heavy loads
Caged Ball
LM Guide heavy-load, high
rigidity types
Type
Specification
Table*
Basic static
load rating
SRG-A, C
A1-422
11.3 to 131
25.8 to 266
SRG-LA, LC
A1-422
26.7 to 278
63.8 to 599
SRG-R, V
A1-426
11.3 to 131
25.8 to 266
SRG-LR, LV
A1-426
SRN-C
A1-436
59.1 to 131
119 to 266
SRN-LC
A1-436
76 to 278
165 to 599
SRN-R
A1-438
59.1 to 131
119 to 266
SRN-LR
A1-438
76 to 278
165 to 599
SRW-LR
A1-446
115 to 601
256 to 1170
NRS-A
A1-232
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LA
A1-232
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
NRS-B
A1-236
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LB
A1-236
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
NRS-R
A1-228
25.9 to 376
59.8 to 737
NRS-LR
A1-228
34.5 to 470
79.7 to 920
SHS-C
A1-98
14.2 to 205
24.2 to 320
SHS-LC
A1-98
17.2 to 253
31.9 to 408
SHS-V
A1-100
14.2 to 205
24.2 to 320
SHS-LV
A1-100
17.2 to 253
31.9 to 408
SHS-R
A1-102
14.2 to 128
24.2 to 197
SHS-LR
A1-102
36.8 to 161
64.7 to 259
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-48
Load
capacity
diagram
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
Major application
Width
24 to 70
47 to 140
30 to 120
63 to 250
24 to 80
34 to 100
30 to 90
44 to 126
44 to 63
100 to 140
44 to 75
44 to 63
70 to 100
44 to 75
70 to 126
70 to 150
135 to 300
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
72 to 260
31 to 105
50 to 200
31 to 105
50 to 200
24 to 90
47 to 170
24 to 90
47 to 170
24 to 90
34 to 126
24 to 90
34 to 126
28 to 80
34 to 100
28 to 80
34 to 100
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding machine
Five axis milling
machine
Jig borer
Drilling machine
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Mold processing
machine
Graphite working
machine
Electric discharge
machine
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Machining center
NC lathe
XYZ axes of heavy
cutting machine tools
Grinding head feeding
axis of grinding
machines
Components requiring a
heavy moment and high
accuracy
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling
machine
Gantry five axis milling
machine
Z axis of electric
discharge machines
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Car elevator
Food-related machine
Testing machine
Vehicle doors
Printed circuit board
drilling machine
ATC
Construction equipment
Shield machine
Semiconductor/liquid
crystal manufacturing
equipment
B1-49
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide heavy-load, high
rigidity types
LM Guide for
Medium-to-Low
Vacuum
Full-Complement
LM Guides special LM rail
types
Type
Specification
Table*
Basic static
load rating
13.5 to 310
HSR-A
A1-184
8.33 to 210
HSR-M1A
A1-360
HSR-LA
A1-184
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LA
A1-360
HSR-CA
A1-198
13.8 to 210
23.8 to 310
HSR-HA
A1-198
21.3 to 518
31.8 to 728
HSR-B
A1-186
8.33 to 210
13.5 to 310
HSR-M1B
A1-362
HSR-LB
A1-186
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LB
A1-362
HSR-CB
A1-200
13.8 to 210
23.8 to 310
HSR-HB
A1-200
21.3 to 518
31.8 to 728
HSR-R
A1-192
1.08 to 210
2.16 to 310
HSR-M1R
A1-364
HSR-LR
A1-192
21.3 to 282
HSR-M1LR
A1-364
HSR-HR
A1-202
351 to 518
506 to 728
HSR-M1VV
A1-400
8.33
13.5
HSR-YR
A1-196
8.33 to 141
13.5 to 215
HSR-M1YR
A1-366
JR-A
A1-328
JR-B
A1-328
JR-R
A1-328
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-50
Load
capacity
diagram
31.8 to 412
31.8 to 412
31.8 to 412
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
24 to 110
47 to 215
24 to 48
47 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 48
63 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 145
63 to 350
24 to 110
47 to 215
24 to 48
47 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 48
63 to 100
30 to 110
63 to 215
30 to 145
63 to 350
11 to 110
16 to 156
28 to 55
34 to 70
30 to 110
44 to 156
30 to 55
44 to 70
120 to 145
250 to 266
28
28 to 90
28 to 55
Features
34
61 to 114
70 to 140
61 to 114
70 to 140
65 to 124
48 to 100
Major application
Machining center
NC lathe
XYZ axes of heavy cutting machine tools
Grinding head feeding axis
of grinding machines
Components requiring a
heavy moment and high accuracy
NC milling machine
Horizontal milling machine
Gantry five axis milling machine
Z axis of electric discharge
machines
Wire-cut electric discharge
machine
Car elevator
Food-related machine
Testing machine
Vehicle doors
Printed circuit board drilling
machine
ATC
Construction equipment
Shield machine
Semiconductor/liquid crystal
manufacturing equipment
Medical equipment
Semiconductor/liquid crystal
manufacturing equipment
B1-51
LM Guide
Height
506E
Classification
Specification
Table*
Load
capacity
diagram
Basic static
load rating
64.7 to 408
SCR
A1-166
36.8 to 253
Full-Complement
LM Guide
orthogonal type
CSR
A1-314
Caged Ball
LM Guide wide, low center of
gravity types
SHW-CA
A1-142
SHW-CR, HR
A1-144
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guide wide, low center of
gravity types
HRW-CA
A1-244
HRW-CR, LRM
A1-246
HMG
A1-344
Straight section
4.23 to 66.7
2.56 to 66.2
Curved section
0.44 to 36.2
Caged Ball LM
Guides
Finite stroke
EPF
A1-174
HR, HR-T
A1-282
1.57 to 141
GSR-T
A1-294
GSR-V
A1-294
GSR-R
A1-302
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide separate types
Interchangeable
designs
Type
Full-Complement Ball
LM Guides LM rail-rack intergrated
type
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-52
3.04 to 206
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
47 to 118
12 to 50
12 to 50
17 to 60
60 to 200
12 to 50
30 to 130
24 to 90
47 to 170
8 to 16
17 to 32
8.5 to 60
20 to 38
20 to 30
30 to 38
Features
18 to 125
Major application
Z axis of IC printed
circuit board drilling
machine
Z axis of small electric
discharge machine
Loader
Machining center
4-way equal load, thin and highly NC lathe
rigid
Robot
Wide, low center of gravity, space Wire-cut electric
saving structure
discharge machine
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
Freedom of design
Cost reduction through simplified
structure
Caged ball effect using a cage
Smooth movement with minimal
rolling variation
4-groove construction in a
compact body
Low-Profile high rigidity, space
saving structure
Interchangeable with Cross-Roller Guide
Preload can be adjusted
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Hollow table
Printed circuit board
assembler
Machine tool table
Electric discharge
machine
XY axes of horizontal
machining center
APC
Semiconductor/liquid
crystal manufacturing
equipment
Measuring instrument
Wafer transfer
equipment
Construction equipment
Railroad vehicle
CT scanner
Medical equipment
Stage setting
Car elevator
Amusement machine
Turntable
Tool changer
Machining center
Wire-cut electric
discharge machine
Tool changer
Woodworking machine
32 to 68
Guide using an
aluminum mold base
Welding machine
Coating machine
Car washing machine
B1-53
LM Guide
70 to 180
Width
506E
Classification
Type
Specification
Table*
SRS-M
Caged Ball
LM Guides
SRS-N
A1-158
RSR-M/K/V/T
A1-256
RSR-M1V
A1-384
RSR-N
A1-256
0.3 to 14.2
0.44 to 20.6
RSR-M1N
A1-384
2.6 to 14.2
3.96 to 20.6
RSR-ZM
A1-270
RSR-WM/WV/WT
A1-260
0.25 to 6.66
0.47 to 9.8
RSR-M1WV
A1-386
2.45 to 6.66
3.92 to 9.8
RSR-WN
A1-260
RSR-M1WN
A1-386
RSR-WZM
A1-272
1.37 to 6.66
2.16 to 9.8
Full Complement
Ball LM Guide orthogonal type
MX
A1-320
0.59 to 2.04
1.1 to 3.21
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guides
HCR
A1-336
4.7 to 141
8.53 to 215
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guides
NSR-TBC
A1-350
Miniature types
Full-Complement
Ball
LM Guides
Full-Complement
Ball LM Guide wide types
Self-aligning
Circular arc types
types
A1-156
SRS-WM
SRS-WN
Load
capacity
diagram
* For specification tables for each model, please see A Product Descriptions.
B1-54
506E
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
8 to 25
17 to 48
10 to 16
20 to 32
9 to 16
25 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
4 to 25
8 to 46
10 to 25
20 to 46
4 to 25
8 to 46
10 to 25
20 to 46
8 to 16
17 to 32
4.5 to 16
12 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
4.5 to 16
12 to 60
12 to 16
30 to 60
9 to 16
25 to 60
10 to 14.5
18 to 90
40 to 105
Features
Long service life, long-term
maintenance-free operation
Low dust generation, low noise,
acceptable running sound
Superbly high speed
Smooth motion in all mounting orientations
Stainless steel type also available
as standard
Lightweight and compact
Major application
IC/LSI manufacturing
machine
Hard disc drive
Slide unit of OA
equipment
Wafer transfer
equipment
Printed circuit board
assembly table
Medical equipment
Electronic components
of electron microscope
Optical stage
Stepper
Plotting machine
Feed mechanism of IC
bonding machine
Inspection equipment
IC/LSI manufacturing
machine
A compact XY structure is allowed Inspection equipment
due to an XY orthogonal,
Slide unit of OA
single-piece LM block
15.2 to 30.2
equipment
Stainless steel type also available Wafer transfer
as standard
equipment
39 to 170
70 to 175
Feed mechanism of IC
bonding machine
Printed circuit board
assembly table
Medical equipment
Electronic components
of electron microscope
Optical stage
X-Ray machine
Large swivel base
CT scanner
Pendulum vehicle for
Medical equipment
railroad
Stage setting
Pantagraph
Car elevator
Control unit
Amusement machine
Optical measuring
Turntable
machine
Tool changer
Tool grinder
XY axes of ordinary industrial machinery
Various conveyance systems
Automated warehouse
Palette changer
Automatic coating machine
Various welding machines
B1-55
LM Guide
Height
506E
Radial load
Lateral
load
Lateral
load
MA
Moment
in the pitching
direction
MB
Moment
in the yawing
direction
MC
Moment
in the rolling
direction
Moment Equivalence
When the installation space for the LM Guide is limited, you may have to use only one LM block, or
double LM blocks closely contacting with each other. In such a setting, the load distribution is not
uniform and, as a result, an excessive load is applied in localized areas (i.e., both ends) as shown in
Fig.2. Continued use under such conditions may result in flaking in those areas, consequently shortening the service life. In such a case, calculate the actual load by multiplying the moment value by
any one of the equivalent-moment factors specified in Table1 to Table7 A1-43.
Moment load
Moment load
Rows of balls under a load
Rows of balls under a load
LM rail
Ball
displacement line
P = KM
P
K
M
B1-56
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Equivalent Factor
PR=KARMA
Equivalent in the radial direction
PL=KALMA
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.3 Equivalent Factors for the MA Moment
KAR=
C0
MA
KAL=
C0L
MA
C0
C0L
=
=1
KARMA KALMA
PT=KBMB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
PT=KBMB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
Fig.4 Equivalent Factors for the MB Moment
B1-57
LM Guide
Since the rated load is equivalent to the permissible moment, the equivalent factor to be multiplied
when equalizing the MA, MB and MC moments to the applied load per block is obtained by dividing
the rated loads in the corresponding directions.
With those models other than 4-way equal load types, however, the load ratings in the 4 directions
differ from each other. Therefore, the equivalent factor values for the MA and MC moments also differ
depending on whether the direction is radial or reverse radial.
506E
PR=KCRMC
Equivalent in the radial direction
PL=KCLMC
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.5 Equivalent Factors for the MC Moment
KCR=
C0
MC
KCL=
C0L
MC
C0
C0L
=
=1
KCRMC KCLMC
C0
C0L
C0T
PR
PL
PT
:
:
:
:
:
:
B1-58
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
(N)
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Example of calculation
When one LM block is used
Model No.: SSR20XV1
No.3
No.4
No.2
No.1
LM Guide
2
m
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
P1=mg+KAR1mg1+KCRmg2=98+0.27598200+0.12998100=6752 (N)
P2=mgKAL1mg1+KCRmg2=980.13798200+0.12998100=1323 (N)
P3=mgKAL1mg1KCLmg2=980.137982000.064498100=3218 (N)
P4=mg+KAR1mg1KCLmg2=98+0.275982000.064498100=4857 (N)
When two LM blocks are used in close contact with each other
Model No.: SVS25R2
Gravitational acceleration g=9.8 (m/s2)
Mass m=5 (kg)
1=200mm
2=150mm
No.3
No.4
No.2
No.1
2
m
Fig.7 When Two LM Blocks are Used in Close Contact with Each Other
No.1 P1=
mg
49150
mg2 49
+0.018849200+0.0814
=507.9 (N)
+KAR2mg1+KCR
=
2
2
2
2
No.2 P2=
mg
49150
mg2 49
KAL2mg1+KCR
=
0.015849200+0.0814
=168.8 (N)
2
2
2
2
No.3 P3=
49150
mg
mg2 49
KAL2mg1KCL
=
0.0158492000.0684
=381.7 (N)
2
2
2
2
No.4 P4=
49150
mg
mg2 49
+KAR2mg1KCL
=
+0.0188492000.0684
=42.6 (N)
2
2
2
2
Note1) Since an LM Guide used in vertical installation receives only a moment load, there is no need to apply a load force
(mg).
B1-59
506E
[Double-axis Use]
Setting Conditions
Set the conditions needed to calculate the LM systems applied load and service life in hours.
The conditions consist of the following items.
(1) Mass: m (kg)
(2) Direction of the working load
(3) Position of the working point (e.g., center of gravity): 2, 3, h1(mm)
(4) Thrust position: 4, h2(mm)
(5) LM system arrangement: 0, 1(mm)
(No. of units and axes)
(6) Velocity diagram
Speed: V (mm/s)
Time constant: tn (s)
Acceleration: n(mm/s2)
V
(n = tn
mg
h2
h 1 0
Duty cycle
Speed (mm/s)
tn
4
Fig.8 Condition
B1-60
t1
tn
S
Velocity diagram
s
mm
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
LM Guide
Calculate the load applied to the LM Guide in each of the examples 1 to 10 shown below.
m
: Mass
(kg)
n
: Distance
(mm)
: External force
(N)
Fn
: Applied load (radial/reverse radial direction) (N)
Pn
(N)
PnT : Applied load (lateral directions)
g
: Gravitational acceleration
(m/s2)
(g =9.8m/s2)
V
: Speed
(m/s)
: Time constant
(s)
tn
: Acceleration
(m/s2)
n
V
(n = tn
[Example]
Condition
Horizontal mount
(with the block traveling)
Uniform motion or dwell
mg
P2
P4
P1
P2 =
mg
mg2
mg3
20
21
4
P3 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
P4 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
+
20
21
4
P1 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
+
20
21
4
P2 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
P3 =
mg
mg2
mg3
20
21
4
P4 =
mg
mg2
mg3
+
20
21
4
mg
mg2
mg3
+
4
20
21
P3
P1 =
1
P2
P4
P1
0
3
mg
B1-61
506E
Condition
Vertical mount
Uniform motion or dwell
2
P4
P1T
P2 = P3 =
P1
mg2
20
P1 = P4 =
mg
mg2
20
mg3
20
P1T = P4T =
3
P2
P2T = P3T =
P2T
mg3
20
1
E.g.: Vertical axis of industrial
robot, automatic coating
machine, lifter
Wall mount
Uniform motion or dwell
0
P2T
2
P1T
P2
P1 = P2 =
P3 = P4 =
P1
mg3
21
P1T = P4T =
mg
mg2
+
4
20
P2T = P3T =
mg
mg2
20
4
P3
P3T
mg
P4
P4T
B1-62
mg3
21
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Condition
P3
P1
P4
P1 to P4 (max) =
mg
mg1
+
4
20
P1 to P4 (min) =
mg
LM Guide
1
1
P2
mg
mg1
20
E.g.: XY table
sliding fork
P1T=
mg
P1
P3
P2T=
P1T
P2
3
1
P2T
+
P3T=
+
P4T=
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
+
21
21
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
20
4
P4 = +
E.g.: NC lathe
Carriage
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgsin
mgsin 2
20
4
P3 = +
mgcos 3
mgsinh1
+
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
+
20
4
P2 = +
h1
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
21
21
mgsin
mgsin 2
+
20
4
B1-63
506E
Condition
P1 = +
P1T = +
P3
h1
P2 = +
P2
mg
P2T
P4
P1
7
P1T
3
1
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
+
21
20
mgsin 3
20
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
21
20
mgsin 3
20
P2T =
P3 = +
+
mgcos
mgcos 2
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
21
20
mgsin 3
20
P3T =
P4 = +
E.g.: NC lathe
Tool rest
+
P4T = +
mgcos
mgcos 2
+
20
4
mgcos 3
mgsin h1
+
21
20
mgsin 3
20
During acceleration
mg
P1 = P4 =
mg
m 12
20
P2 = P3 =
mg
+
4
m 12
20
P1T = P4T =
3
P1
P2T = P3T =
P3
P4
P3T
0
P4T
Speed V (m/s)
t2
t3 Time (s)
Velocity diagram
P1 to P4 =
P1 = P4 =
mg
+
4
m 32
20
P2 = P3 =
mg
m 32
20
P1T = P4T =
P2T = P3T =
Note) Load is positive in the direction of the arrow.
B1-64
mg
4
During deceleration
V
n =
tn
t1
m 13
20
8
F
m 13
20
m 33
20
m 33
20
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Applied Load
Condition
Vertical mount
with inertia
P4
mg
P1T
P1
F
3
P2
n =
P2T
V
tn
Speed V (m/s)
t1
t2
t3 Time (s)
Velocity diagram
E.g.: Conveyance lift
LM Guide
During acceleration
m (g+ 1) 2
P1 = P4 =
20
m (g+ 1) 2
P2 = P3 =
20
m (g+ 1) 3
P1T = P4T =
20
m (g+ 1) 3
P2T = P3T =
20
During deceleration
m (g 3) 2
20
m (g 3) 2
P2 = P3 =
20
m (g 3) 3
P1T = P4T =
20
m (g 3) 3
P2T = P3T =
20
P1 = P4 =
Under force F1
F15
20
F15
P2 = P3 =
20
F14
P1T = P4T =
20
F14
P2T = P3T =
20
P1 = P4 =
2
4
P3
F2
F1
10
F
F3
P3T
P4
P4T
3
Under force F2
F2
P1 = P4 =
+
4
F2
P2 = P3 =
4
F22
20
F22
20
Under force F3
F33
P1 = P2 =
21
F33
P3 = P4 =
21
F3
P1T = P4T =
4
P2T = P3T =
F3
+
4
F32
20
F32
20
B1-65
506E
1/2
1/2
Radial Type
1/2
1/2
B1-66
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Equivalent Load
When the LM block of the LM Guide receives loads simultaneously in the radial and lateral directions, or the reverse radial and lateral directions, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation
below.
PE
: Equivalent load
(N)
Radial direction
Reverse radial direction
: Reverse radial load
(N)
PL
: Lateral load
(N)
PT
X,Y : Equivalent factor
(see Table9 on A1-60)
PL
PR
PT
PT
B1-67
LM Guide
PEXPR(L)YPT
506E
Machine tool
Load conditions
Without vibration or impact
1.0 to 3.5
2.0 to 5.0
1.0 to 4.0
2.5 to 7.0
fHfTfCC0
fHfTfCC0L
fHfTfCC0T
fS
C0
C0L
C0T
PR
PL
PT
fH
fT
fC
PR
fS
PL
PT
fS
fS
B1-68
Lower limit of fS
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Average Load
Pm =
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
1
i
(Pn Ln)
L n=1
: Average Load
(N)
: Varying load
(N)
: Total travel distance
(mm)
: Distance traveled under load Pn
(mm)
: Constant determined by rolling element
Note) The above equation or the equation (1) below applies when the rolling elements are balls.
Pm =
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
:
:
:
:
1
3
3
3
(P1 L1 + P2 L2 +Pn Ln)
L
Average load
Varying load
Total travel distance
Distance traveled under Pn
(N)
(N)
(mm)
(mm)
10
LM Guide Using Rollers (i=3 )
10
Pm
Pn
L
Ln
:
:
:
:
10
10
10
1
3
3
3
(P1 L1 + P2 L2 +Pn Ln)
L
Average Load
Varying load
Total travel distance
Distance traveled under Pn
(N)
(N)
(mm)
(mm)
P1
Pm
Load (P)
Pm =
P2
Pn
L1
L2
Ln
B1-69
LM Guide
In cases where the load applied to each LM block fluctuates under different conditions, such as
an industrial robot holding a work with its arm as it advances and receding with its arm empty, and
a machine tool handling various workpieces, it is necessary to calculate the service life of the LM
Block while taking into account such fluctuating loading conditions.
The average load (Pm) is the load under which the service life of the LM Guide is equivalent to that
under varying loads applied to the LM blocks.
506E
Pm
1
3
Pmin
Pmax
: Minimum load
: Maximum load
(Pmin + 2Pmax)
(N)
(N)
Pmax
Load (P)
Pm
Pmin
Pm 0.65Pmax 4
(b)
Pm 0.75Pmax 5
Pmax
Pmax
B1-70
Pm
Load (P)
Load (P)
Pm
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Average Load
No.4
No.3
mg
No.1
v
2
1 =(m/s
)
t1
t1
t2
t1
S1
S2
S1
No.2
mg
S
mm
mm
Ball screw
P1 = +
P2 = +
P3 = +
P4 = +
During acceleration
m12
20
m12
Pa2 = P2
20
m12
Pa3 = P3
20
m12
Pa4 = P4 +
20
Pa1 = P1 +
During deceleration
m12
20
m12
Pd2 = P2 +
20
m12
Pd3 = P3 +
20
m12
Pd4 = P4
20
Pd1 = P1
[Average load]
3
1
3
3
3
(Pa1 s1 + P1 s2 + Pd1 s3)
S
1
3
3
3
(Pa2 s1 + P2 s2 + Pd2 s3)
S
1
3
3
3
(Pa3 s1 + P3 s2 + Pd3 s3)
S
1
3
3
3
(Pa4 s1 + P4 s2 + Pd4 s3)
S
Pm1 =
Pm2 =
Pm3 =
Pm4 =
B1-71
LM Guide
V
m/s
506E
Example of Calculating the Average Load (2) - When the Rails are Movable
[Conditions]
No.4
No.3
No.1
No.2
mg
mg
4
mg
4
mg
4
mg
4
mg1
20
mg1
20
mg1
20
mg1
20
4
mg
= +
+
4
mg
= +
+
4
mg
= +
Pr1 = +
Pr2
Pr3
Pr4
mg2
20
mg2
20
mg2
20
mg2
20
[Average load]
1
3
1
Pm2 =
3
1
Pm3 =
3
1
Pm4 =
3
Pm1 =
B1-72
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
L =
( f ff f
H
L
C
PC
fH
fT
fC
fW
C
PC
50
: Nominal life
(km)
: Basic dynamic load rating
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Hardness factor (see Fig.10 on B1-75)
: Temperature factor
(see Fig.11 on B1-75)
: Contact factor
(see Table2 on B1-75)
: Load factor
(see Table3 on B1-76)
L
F0
PC
fW
: Nominal life
(km)
: Permissible load
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Load factor
(see Table3 on B1-76)
F0
fW PC
1.57
L =
50
Note) The life here means the service of life of the S film based on wear.
Since the service life of the S film may vary according to the environment or the operating conditions, be sure to evaluate and validate the life under the service conditions and operating conditions at the customer.
B1-73
LM Guide
The service life of an LM Guide is subject to variations even under the same operational conditions.
Therefore, it is necessary to use the nominal life defined below as a reference value for obtaining
the service life of the LM Guide. The nominal life means the total travel distance that 90% of a group
of units of the same LM Guide model can achieve without flaking (scale-like pieces on the metal surface) after individually running under the same conditions.
506E
L =
C
f H fT fC
PC
fW
10
3
100
L
C
PC
fH
fT
: Nominal life
(km)
: Basic dynamic load rating
(N)
: Calculated load
(N)
: Hardness factor (see Fig.10 on B1-75)
: Temperature factor
(see Fig.11 on B1-75)
: Contact factor
(see Table2 on B1-75)
fC
: Load factor
(see Table3 on B1-76)
fW
Once the nominal life (L) has been obtained, the service life time can be obtained using the following equation if the stroke length and the number reciprocations are constant.
Lh =
Lh
s
n1
L
S
106
n1 60
B1-74
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
Hardness factor fH
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
LM Guide
60
50
40
30
20
Raceway hardness (HRC)
10
[fT:Temperature Factor]
If the temperature of the environment surrounding the operating LM Guide exceeds 100,
take into account the adverse effect of the high
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.11.
In addition, the selected LM Guide must also be
of a high temperature type.
Note) LM guides not designed to withstand high temperatures should be used at 80C or less.Please contact
THK if application requirements exceed 80C.
Temperature factor fT
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
100
150
Raceway temperature ()
200
Contact factor fC
0.81
0.72
0.66
0.61
6 or greater
0.6
Normal use
B1-75
506E
B1-76
Vibrations/
impact
Speed (V)
fW
Faint
Very low
V0.25m/s
1 to 1.2
Weak
Slow
0.25<V1m/s
1.2 to 1.5
Medium
Medium
1<V2m/s
1.5 to 2
Strong
High
V>2m/s
2 to 3.5
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (1) - with Horizontal Mount and
High-speed Acceleration
No.4
No.3
m2g
m1g
No.1
No.2
V
m/s
t1
t2
t3 s
s1
s2
s3 mm
mm
m1g
m2g
5
4
Ball screw
Fig.12 Condition
B1-77
LM Guide
[Conditions]
Model No. : HSR35LA2SS+2500LP-
(basic dynamic load rating: C =50.2 kN)
(basic static load rating: C0=81.5 kN)
Distance: 0=600 mm
Mass
: m1 =800 kg
1=400 mm
m2 =500 kg
2=120 mm
Speed
: V =0.5 m/s
3=50 mm
Time
: t1 =0.05 s
4=200 mm
t2 =2.8 s
5=350 mm
t3 =0.15 s
3 =3.333 m/s2
Stroke
: S =1450 mm
Gravitational acceleration g=9.8 (m/s2)
506E
m1g
4
m 1g
= +
4
m1 g
= +
4
m1 g
= +
4
= +
m1 g2
20
m1g2
+
20
m1g2
+
20
m1g2
20
m1 g3
21
m1 g3
+
21
m1g3
21
m1g3
21
+
m 2g
= +2891N
4
m2g
+
= +4459 N
4
m2g
+
= +3479N
4
m2g
+
= +1911N
4
20
m1 15
20
m1 15
Pa2 = P2 +
20
m1 15
Pa3 = P3 +
20
m1 15
Pa4 = P4
20
Pa1 = P1
= 275.6 N
= + 7625.6 N
= + 6645.6 N
= 1255.6 N
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
= 333.3 N
= + 333.3 N
= + 333.3 N
= 333.3 N
B1-78
m2 34
20
m2 34
20
m2 34
20
m2 34
+
20
+
= + 3946.6 N
= + 3403.4 N
= + 2423.4 N
= + 2966.6 N
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
Ptd4 = +
= + 111.1 N
= 111.1 N
= 111.1 N
LM Guide
Ptd3 =
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
= + 111.1 N
Pra1 = P1 +
Pra2 = P2
Pra3 = P3
Pra4 = P4 +
m2 14
20
m2 14
20
m2 14
20
m2 14
20
= + 6057.6 N
= + 1292.4 N
= + 312.4 N
= + 5077.6 N
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
m1 13
20
= + 333.3 N
= 333.3 N
= 333.3 N
= + 333.3 N
m1 35
20
m1 35
20
m1 35
20
m1 35
20
+
+
m2 34
20
m2 34
20
m2 34
20
m2 34
20
= + 1835.4 N
= + 5514.6 N
= + 4534.6 N
= + 855.4 N
B1-79
506E
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
m1 33
20
= 111.1 N
= + 111.1 N
= + 111.1 N
= 111.1 N
PE1 = P1 = 2891 N
PE2 = P2 = 4459 N
PE3 = P3 = 3479 N
PE4 = P4 = 1911 N
fS =
81.410
C0
=
= 10.2
PEa2
7958.9
B1-80
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
Pm1 =
3
= 2940.1N
3
Pm2 =
3
1
(PE a23S1 + PE23S2 + PE d23S3 + PEra23S1 + PE23S2 + PErd23S3)
2S
1
(7958.9312.5+445931400+3514.5337.5+1625.7312.5+445931400+5625.7337.5)
21450
= 4492.2N
3
Pm3 =
3
1
(PE a33S1 + PE33S2 + PE d33S3 + PEra33S1 + PE33S2 + PErd33S3)
2S
1
(6978.9312.5+347931400+2534.5337.5+645.7312.5+347931400+4645.7337.5)
21450
= 3520.4N
3
Pm4 =
3
1
(PE a43S1 + PE43S2 + PE d43S3 + PEra43S1 + PE43S2 + PErd43S3)
2S
1
(1588.9312.5+191131400+3077.7337.5+5410.9312.5+191131400+966.5337.5)
21450
= 1985.5N
) 50 = 73700 km
3
) 50 = 20600 km
3
) 50 = 43000 km
3
) 50 = 239000 km
(where f w = 1.5)
Therefore, the service life of the LM Guide used in a machine or equipment under the conditions
stated above is equivalent to the nominal life of the second LM block, which is 20,600 km.
B1-81
LM Guide
1
(PE a13S1 + PE13S2 + PE d13S3 + PEra13S1 + PE13S2 + PErd13S3)
2S
1
(608.9312.5+289131400+4057.7337.5+6390.9312.5+289131400+1946.5337.5)
21450
506E
m1 =200 kg
2=50 mm
m2 =100 kg
3=280 mm
Stroke
: S =1000 mm
4=150 mm
5=250 mm
The mass (m0) is loaded only during ascent; it is removed during descent.
Gravitational acceleration g=9.8 (m/s2)
1
Ball screw
No.3
No.2
m1g
m1g
m 0g
No.4
m2g
m2g
No.1
4
5
Fig.13 Condition
B1-82
m 0g
506E
Point of Selection
Calculating the Nominal Life
During Ascent
Load applied to each LM block in the radial direction Pun during ascent
Pu2
Pu3
Pu4
m2g5
20
m2g5
20
m2g5
20
m2g5
+
20
+
m0g3
20
m0g3
20
m0g3
20
m0g3
+
20
+
= + 1355.6 N
= 1355.6 N
LM Guide
m1g4
20
m1g4
=
20
m1g4
=
20
m1g4
= +
20
Pu1 = +
= 1355.6 N
= + 1355.6 N
Load applied to each LM block in the lateral direction Ptun during ascent
m1g2
20
m1g2
=
20
m1g2
=
20
m1g2
= +
20
Ptu1 = +
Ptu2
Ptu3
Ptu4
m2g2
20
m2g2
20
m2g2
20
m2g2
+
20
+
m0g1
20
m0g1
20
m0g1
20
m0g1
+
20
+
= + 375.7 N
= 375.7 N
= 375.7 N
= + 375.7 N
During Descent
Load applied to each LM block in the radial direction Pdn during descent
Pd1
Pd2
Pd3
Pd4
m1g4
20
m1g4
=
20
m1g4
=
20
m1g4
= +
20
= +
m2g5
20
m2g5
20
m2g5
20
m2g5
+
20
+
= + 898.3 N
= 898.3 N
= 898.3 N
= + 898.3 N
Load applied to each LM block in the lateral direction Ptdn during descent
m1g2
20
m1g2
= 20
m1g2
= 20
m1g2
= + 20
Ptd1 = +
Ptd2
Ptd3
Ptd4
m2g2
20
m2g2
20
m2g2
20
m2g2
+
20
+
= + 245 N
= 245 N
= 245 N
= + 245 N
B1-83
506E
During Ascent
During Descent
fS =
C0
34.410
=
= 19.9
PEu2
1731.3
Pm1 =
3
Pm2 =
3
Pm3 =
3
Pm4 =
1
2S
1
2S
1
2S
1
2S
50 = 68200 km
50 = 68200 km
50 = 68200 km
50 = 68200 km
(where f w = 1.2)
Therefore, the service life of the LM Guide used in a machine or equipment under the conditions
stated above is 68,200 km.
B1-84
506E
Point of Selection
Predicting the Rigidity
*Preload is an internal load applied to the rolling elements (balls, rollers, etc.) of an LM block in advance in order to increase
its rigidity.
Table4 Types of Radial Clearance
Examples of applications
Condition
Normal Clearance
The loading direction is fixed, An overhang load or moment High rigidity is required and
impact and vibrations are miniload is applied.
vibrations and impact are apmal and 2 rails are installed in LM Guide is used in a singleplied.
parallel.
rail configuration.
Heavy-cutting machine tool
Ve r y h i g h p r e c i s i o n i s n o t Light load and high accuracy
required, and the sliding resisare required.
tance must be as low as possible.
Beam-welding machine
Book-binding machin
Automatic packaging machine
XY axes of general industrial
machinery
Automatic sash-manufacturing
machine
Welding machine
Flame cutting machine
Tool changer
Various kinds of material feeder
Machining center
NC lathe
Grinding stone feed axis of
grinding machine
Milling machine
Vertical/horizontal boring machine
Tool rest guide
Vertical axis of machine tool
B1-85
LM Guide
Since the radial clearance of an LM Guide greatly affects the running accuracy, load carrying capacity and rigidity of the LM Guide, it is important to select an appropriate clearance according to the
application. In general, selecting a negative clearance (i.e., a preload* is applied) while taking into
account possible vibrations and impact generated from reciprocating motion favorably affects the
service life and the accuracy.
For specific radial clearances, contact THK. We will help you select the optimal clearance according
to the conditions.
The clearances of all LM Guide models (except model HR, GSR and GSR-R, which are separate
types) are adjusted as specified before shipment, and therefore they do not need further preload adjustment.
506E
Rigidity
When the LM Guide receives a load, its rolling element, LM blocks and LM rails are elastically deformed within a permissible load range. The ratio between the displacement and the load is called
rigidity value. (Rigidity values are obtained using the equation shown below.) The LM Guides rigidity
increases according to the magnitude of the preload. Fig.14 shows rigidity difference between normal, C1 and C0 clearances.
The effect of a preload for a 4-way equal load type is translated into the calculated load approx. 2.8
times greater than the magnitude of the preload.
Normal clearance
Deflection
2 0
Clearance C1
Clearance C0
P0
Load
P0 : Magnitude of clearance C0
Fig.14 Rigidity Data
K=
K
: Rigidity value
: Deflection
: Calculated load
B1-86
(N/m)
(m)
(N)
2.8P0
506E
Point of Selection
Determining the Accuracy
[Running of Parallelism]
It refers to the tolerance for parallelism between the LM block and the LM rail reference surface
when the LM block travels the whole length of the LM rail with the LM rail secured on the reference
reference surface using bolts.
[Difference in Height M]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of height (M) of each of the LM
blocks used on the same plane in combination.
[Difference in Width W2]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of the width (W2) between each
of the LM blocks, mounted on one LM rail in combination, and the LM rail.
Note1) When 2 or more rails are used on the same plane in parallel, only the width (W2) tolerance and the difference on the
master rail apply. The master LM rail is imprinted with KB (except for normal grade products) following the serial
number.
Serial number
Master side symbol
Fig.16 Master LM Rail
Note2) Accuracy measurements each represent the average value of the central point or the central area of the LM block.
Note3) The LM rail is smoothly curved so that the required accuracy is easily achieved by pressing the rail to the reference
surface of the machine.
If it is mounted on a less rigid base such as an aluminum base, the curve of the rail will affect the accuracy of the machine. Therefore, it is necessary to define straightness of the rail in advance.
B1-87
LM Guide
Accuracy of the LM Guide is specified in terms of running parallelism, dimensional tolerance for
height and width, and height and width difference between a pair when 2 or more LM blocks are
used on one rail or when 2 or more rails are mounted on the same plane.
For details, see Accuracy Standard for Each Model on A1-76 to A1-86.
506E
Type of machine
Accuracy grades
Ct7
Ct5
Normal
SP
Machining center
Lathe
Milling machine
Boring machine
Grinding machine
Machine tool
Punching press
NC drilling machine
Tapping center
ATC
Semiconductor
Industrial
manufacturing
robot
equipment
Dressing machine
Cylindrical coordinate
3D measuring instrument
Conveyance system
XY table
Welding machine
Inspection equipment
B1-88
Coating machine
Office equipment
: Grade Ct7
: Grade Ct5
: Normal grade
: High accuracy grade
Prober
Digitizer
Cartesian coordinate
Medical equipment
Other equipment
Jig borer
Palette changer
Ct7
Ct5
Normal
H
UP
P : Precision grade
SP : Super precision grade
UP : Ultra precision grade
506E
LM Guide
Master LM Guide
Subsidiary LM Guide
Y2F123 KB
Master mark
Serial number
Fig.1 Master LM Guide and Subsidiary LM Guide
Reference surface
THK logo
Reference surface
Line marking
Master LM Guide
THK logo
Reference surface
Line marking
Subsidiary LM Guide
Fig.2 Markings on the Reference Surface
B1-89
506E
Fig.3 Serial Number Marking and Combined Use of an LM Rail and LM Blocks
Reference surface
A1
A2
Subsidiary-rail side
B1-90
B
B
506E
Mounting Procedure
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When an Impact Load is Applied to the Machine and therefore
Rigidity and High Accuracy are Required]
LM block set screw
Base
Subsidiary-rail side
B1-91
LM Guide
Table
506E
(3) Fully fasten the mounting bolts on the master side and the subsidiary side to complete
the installation.
Note) To evenly secure the table, tighten the mounting
bolts in diagonal order as shown in Fig.11.
This method saves time in establishing straightness of the LM rail and eliminates the need to
machine securing dowel pins, thus to drastically
shorten the installation man-hours.
B1-92
506E
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When the Master LM Rail is not Provided with Set screws]
LM block set screw
Table
Base
LM Guide
Subsidiary-rail side
Fig.12 When the Master LM Rail is not Provided with Set screws
Fig.13
Using a Straight-edge
Place straight-edges between the two rails, and
arrange the straight-edges in parallel with the
side reference surface of the master LM rail
using a dial gauge. Then, secure the mounting
bolts in order while achieving straightness of
the subsidiary rail with the straight edge as the
reference by using the dial gauge. (Fig.14)
Fig.14
B1-93
506E
Fig.16
Using a Jig
Use a jig like the one shown in Fig.17 to achieve
parallelism of the reference surface on the subsidiary side against the side reference surface
of the master side from one end of the rail by
the mounting pitch, and at the same time, fully
fasten the mounting bolts in order. (Fig.17)
b
Fig.17
B1-94
506E
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When the Master LM Rail Does not Have a Reference Surface]
LM Guide
Base
Master rail side
Subsidiary-rail side
Fig.18
Fig.19
Using a Straight-edge
After temporarily fastening the mounting bolts,
use a dial gauge to check the straightness of
the side reference surface of the LM rail from
the rail end, and at the same time, fully fasten
the mounting bolts.(Fig.20)
To mount the subsidiary LM rail, follow the procedure described on B1-93.
Fig.20
B1-95
506E
Fig.21
Fig.22
Fig.23
(5) Secure each LM block by gradually tightening the two LM block mounting bolts, which
have temporarily been fastened, while sliding the table. (Fig.24)
Torque wrench
Tension gauge
Fig.24
B1-96
506E
LM Guide
B1-97
506E
Table
Reference surface
Straight-edge
LM rail A
Base
Fig.26
Reference surface
Fig.25
Table
Press the LM rail
Base
LM rail B
LM rail A
Fig.27
LM rail B
Torque
wrench
LM rail A
Fig.28
Mounting jig
Base
LM rail
Fig.29
B1-98
506E
LM Guide
Jointing LM Rails
When two or more LM rails are to be jointed, a
special metal fitting as shown in Fig.31 is available. For such applications, specify this fitting
when ordering the LM Guide (the rail will be
tapped for attaching a joint fitting).
Installation Procedure
(1) Temporarily fasten the rail presser bolt.
(2) Secure rail A and the joint fitting with bolts C
and D.
(3) Apply a dial gauge to side G of the joint between rails A and B. Adjust the left and right
level differences using bolt E and set screw
F on rail B.
If bolt E is tightened, rail B will move toward
b side.
If set screw F is tightened, rail B will move
toward a side.
(4) When the adjustment using set screw F is
finished, secure set screw F with the nut.
(5) Adjust and secure the vertical direction using the rail presser.
a side
b side
Dial gauge
Rail
G
Rail presser
Bolt
Rail B G
Rail A
a side
Bolt C
Rail presser
Bolt D
Joint fitting
b side
Nut
Setscrew F
Rail presser
Bolt E
Fig.31
B1-99
506E
Fig.32
Joint
B1-100
506E
Screw
model No.
M2
Tightening torque
Not hardened
17.6
Tightening torque
Hardened
Screw
model No.
Steel
Cast Iron
Aluminum
21.6
M2
58.8
39.2
29.4
M 2.3
78.4
53.9
39.2
M 2.6
118
78.4
58.8
M3
196
127
98
M4
412
274
206
M 2.3
29.4
35.3
M 2.6
44.1
52.9
M5
882
588
441
M6
1370
921
686
M8
3040
2010
1470
M 10
6760
4510
3330
M 12
11800
7840
5880
M 14
15700
10500
7840
M 16
19600
13100
9800
M 20
38200
25500
19100
M 22
51900
34800
26000
M 24
65700
44100
32800
M 30
130000
87200
65200
B1-101
LM Guide
506E
B1-102
506E
LM Guide
Options
Options ................................................. B1-103
Seal and Metal scraper.......................... B1-104
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS ......... B1-105
Side Scraper .......................................... B1-107
Protector ................................................ B1-108
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS ..... B1-109
Dedicated bellows ................................. B1-110
Dedicated LM Cover .............................. B1-110
Cap C .................................................... B1-111
Cap GC.................................................. B1-112
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP ............. B1-114
QZ Lubricator......................................... B1-117
Lubrication Adapter................................ B1-120
Removing/mounting Jig ......................... B1-121
End Piece EP ........................................ B1-122
Model No. ............................................. B1-123
Model Number Coding .......................... B1-123
Notes on Ordering................................ B1-127
Precautions on Use ............................. B1-129
Precautions on Using the LM Guide ...... B1-129
Precautions on Handling the LM Guide for Special Environment .. B1-131
LM Guide for Medium-to-Low Vacuum .... B1-131
Oil-free LM Guide ................................ B1-131
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. B1-132
QZ Lubricator for the LM Guide .............. B1-132
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper for LM Guides .. B1-132
Light Contact Seal LiCS for LM Guides ... B1-133
Cap GC .............................................. B1-133
B1-103
506E
Item name
Purpose/location of use
End seal
End seal
End Seal
Side Seal
Side seal
Side seal
Inner seal
Inner seal
Used in locations severely exposed to dust or cutting chips
Inner Seal
End seal
End seal
Spacer
Double Seals
End seal
Hexagon socket
button bolt
Metal scraper
End seal
Metal Scraper
(Non-contact)
Metal scraper
Symbol
UU
SS
DD
ZZ
KK
B1-104
506E
Options
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
LM block
Mounting bolt
Ball cage
Ball
Contact scraper
Metal scraper
End seal
Liquid
LM rail
QZ Lubricator
Large amount
of foreign material
Structural Drawing
[Features]
Since the 3 layers of scrapers fully contact the LM rail, LaCS is highly capable of removing minute
foreign material.
Since it uses oil-impregnated, foam synthetic rubber with a self-lubricating function, low friction
resistance is achieved.
Symbol
SSHH
DDHH
ZZHH
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
KKHH
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
JJHH*
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
TTHH*
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
B1-105
LM Guide (Options)
For locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS is available.
LaCS removes minute foreign material adhering to the LM rail in multiple stages and prevents it
from entering the LM block with laminated contact structure (3-layer scraper).
506E
Description
200m/min
Environmental
Coolant sprayed: 5 time per day
conditions
[Test result]
No.1
without
LaCS
No.2
with
LaCS
5000
Description
No.1
No.2
Max speed/
60m/min, 1G
acceleration
External load 9.6kN
Foreign
material
conditions
Seal configuration
Tested model 1
Double-seal
configuration
Tested model 2
(2 end seals superposed
with each other)
Tested model 3
LaCS
B1-106
0.3
0.3
0.3
Tested model 1
Tested model 2
Tested model 3
506E
Options
Side Scraper
Side Scraper
For the supported models: models SVR/SVS
For the resistance of side scraper, see A1-501.
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with side scraper attached, see A1-484.
For notes regarding how to handle the side scraper, see B1-132.
LM Guide (Options)
Foreign
material
Side scraper
Foreign material
Foreign material
End plate
QZ Lubricator
Inverted mount
Wall mount
End seal
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
Protector
Outline view
(Ex: in case of QZTTHHYY type)
[Features]
Minimizes foreign material entering from the side of the LM Guide in a harsh environment.
Demonstrates a dust protection effect in inverted or wall mount.
* The side scraper can accommodate various options of dust control accessories and lubrication accessories. For details,
contact THK.
B1-107
506E
Protector
For the supported models: models SVR/SVS
HH type (with LaCS) of models SVR/SVS is provided with the protector.
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with protector attached, see A1-484.
Coolant
QZ Lubricator
Foreign matter
End seal
Laminated Contact
Scraper LaCS
Protector
Protector
Outline view
(Ex: in case of QZTTHHYY type)
End plate
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
End seal
[Features]
The protector minimizes the entrance of foreign material even in harsh environments where foreign material such as fine particles and liquids are present.
Note) Contact THK if you want to use the protector with other options.
B1-108
506E
Options
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS
LiCS
[Features]
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS is a seal that uses a light-resistance material in its sealing element and contacts the LM rail raceway to achieve low drag resistance. It is optimal for applications
where low drag resistance is required, such as semiconductor-related devices, inspection devices
and OA equipment all of which are used in favorable environments.
Since the sealing element contacts the LM rail raceway, it is effective in removing dust on the
raceway.
Use of oil-impregnated, expanded synthetic rubber, which has excellent self-lubricating property,
achieves low drag resistance.
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L P -
LM Guide
model
number
Type of
LM block
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
Symbol
LM rail length
(in mm)
GG
LiCS
PP
B1-109
LM Guide (Options)
LiCS is a light sliding resistance contact seal. It is effective in removing dust on the raceway and retaining a lubricant such as grease. It achieves extremely low drag and smooth, stable motion.
506E
Dedicated bellows
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the dedicated bellows dimensions, see A1-513 to A1-524.
Item name
Purpose/location of use
Bellows
Dedicated
Bellows
Dedicated LM Cover
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the dedicated LM cover dimensions, see A1-526.
Item name
Purpose/location of use
LM cover
Dedicated
LM Cover
B1-110
506E
Options
Cap C
Cap C
Plastic hammer
H
Fig.1 Cap C
B1-111
LM Guide (Options)
If any of the LM rail mounting holes of an LM Guide is filled with cutting chips or foreign material, they
may enter the LM block structure. Entrance of such foreign material can be prevented by covering each
LM rail mounting hole with the dedicated cap.
Since the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes uses a special synthetic resin with high oil resistance and high wear resistance, it is highly durable.
To attach the dedicated cap to the mounting hole, place a flat metal piece like one shown in Fig.1 on
the cap and gradually hammer in the cap until it is on the same level as the top face of the LM rail.
When attaching the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes, do not remove any of the LM blocks
from the LM rail.
506E
Cap GC
For notes regarding how to handle the GC cap, see B1-133.
LM rail
Cap GC
Cap GC
LM rail
mounting bolt
LM rail
GC caps are metal caps designed to cover the mounting holes in LM rails (in compliance with RoHS directives).
In harsh environments, preventing any influx of coolant or foreign material from the top face of the
LM rail, coupled with the use of seals, will dramatically improve the contamination protection performance for the LM guide.
[Features]
Eliminates gaps
Seals
Foreign material
Not pushed in
LM Guide
Standard C cap fitted GC cap fitted
B1-112
Example of Using
the Spring Pad
Welding machines, robots
Woodworking machinery,
washers
Lathes, machining centers
Welding machines, robots
Woodworking machinery,
washers
Lathes, machining centers
506E
Options
Cap GC
With QZ
Lubricator
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
With GC cap
Symbol for No. of rails used on the same plane
Accuracy symbol
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(Example) SVR45LR2QZTTHHC0+1200LPGC
With GC cap
* Add the symbol (GC) to the end of the model number.
Mounting method
The procedure for inserting a GC cap into a
mounting hole consists of using a flat aligning
fitting to gradually punch the cap into the hole
until it is level with the upper surface of the LM
rail, as shown in the figure. Fit GC caps without
removing the LM rail from the LM block.
Plastic hammer
Metal piece
B1-113
LM Guide (Options)
506E
Item name
Purpose/location of use
LM rail
Plate cover: SV
Fixing-jig: NT
Plate Cover SV
Slide piece
Tension screw
Steel tape: SP
Setscrew
End piece: EP
Tap for attaching bellows
Steel Tape SP
LM block
LM block mounting/
removing jig
B1-114
506E
Options
Plate Cover SV Steel Tape SP
Plate cover
Chamfer
Slide piece
Mounting
hole
Fixing plate
LM Guide (Options)
Fig.1
LM rail
Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig.4
Fig.5
B1-115
506E
End piece: EP
Steel tape: SP
Fig.6
LM block
LM block mounting/removing jig
Fig.7
Mounting surface
Fig.8
Steel tape
Release paper
Fig.9
Steel tape
Do not make an acute angle
LM block
LM block mounting/removing jig
Fig.10
Steel tape: SP
Setscrew
End piece: EP
Tap for attaching a bellows
Fig.11
B1-116
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A1-474.
For the LM block dimension with QZ attached, see A1-505 to A1-508.
For notes regarding how to handle the QZ, see B1-132.
Case
(End seal)
Ball
QZ Lubricator
Ball cage
Structural Drawing
[Features]
Since it supplements an oil loss, the lubrication maintenance interval can be significantly extended.
Eco-friendly lubrication system that does not contaminate the surrounding area since it feeds the
right amount of lubricant to the ball raceway.
Symbol
QZUU
QZSS
QZDD
QZZZ
QZKK
QZGG
With LiCS + QZ
QZPP
QZSSHH
QZDDHH
QZZZHH
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZKKHH
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZJJHH*
With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
QZTTHH*
With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ + protector (serving also as metal scraper)
B1-117
LM Guide (Options)
QZ Lubricator feeds the right amount of lubricant to the raceway on the LM rail. This allows an oil
film to continuously be formed between the rolling element and the raceway, and drastically extends
the lubrication and maintenance intervals.
The structure of QZ Lubricator consists of three major components: (1) a heavy oil-impregnated fiber
net (function to store lubricant), (2) a high-density fiber net (function to apply lubricant to the raceway) and (3) an oil-control plate (function to adjust oil flow). The lubricant contained in QZ Lubricator
is fed by the capillary phenomenon, which is used also in felt pens and many other products, as the
fundamental principle.
506E
465km
962km
Light Medium
load
load
Grease + QZ Lubricator
LM Guide: HSR35R1SS
Condition Heavy load Medium load Light load
18.6kN 9.3kN
1.4kN
Load
Speed
50m/min 50m/min 300m/min
Calculated service life 400km 3200km
Grease: 2cc/1 LM block - initial lubrication only
QZ Lubricator: 5cc 2/1 LM block - initial lubrication only
3500km
Grease + QZ Lubricator
30000km
Grease + QZ Lubricator
0
500
1000
1500
Distance traveled (km)
3500
30000
Comparison of
lubricant
consumption
after traveling
5,000 km
0.332
SHW21QZ
83.3
Forced lubrication
20
40
60
80
100
Forced lubrication
Compared
B1-118
0.03cm3/6min 16667min
83.3cm3
506E
Options
QZ Lubricator
Full-ball LM
Guide #45
Load
8kN
6kN
Speed
60m/min
Coolant
Foreign
material
Lubrication
AFA Grease + QZ
Super Multi 68
Oiling cycle:
0.1cc/shot
Periodically
lubricated every
16 min
QZ+LaCS
No
breakage
Standard
model
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
* When using the LM system under severe environment, use QZ Lubricator and Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS (see Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS on B1-105) in combination.
B1-119
LM Guide (Options)
Model No.
506E
Lubrication Adapter
Lubrication plate
Lubrication plate
To lubrication
pump
Constant quantity
distributor
To lubrication pump
[Specifications]
Viscosity range
32 to 64 mm2/s recommended
of lubricant used
Discharge
0.034, 0.064cc/1shot
Diameter of pipe
4, 6
connected
Material
Aluminum alloy
W
B
2-M11
N
N
M1 E
M
W1
Fig.2
B1-120
T
T1
506E
Options
Removing/mounting Jig
Removing/mounting Jig
LM rail
LM block
Removing/mounting Jig
Removing/mounting Jig
(Material: ABS resin)
B1-121
LM Guide (Options)
When assembling the guide, do not remove the LM block from the LM rail whenever possible. If it is
inevitable to remove the LM block due to the plate cover type or the assembly procedure, be sure to
use the removing/mounting jig.
Mounting the LM block without using the removing/mounting jig may cause rolling elements to fall
from the LM block due to contamination by foreign material, damage to internal components or slight
inclination. Mounting the LM block with some of the rolling elements missing may also cause damage to the LM block at an early stage.
When using the removing/mounting jig, do not incline the jig and match the ends of both LM rails.
If any of the rolling elements falls from the LM block, contact THK instead of using the product.
Note that the removing/mounting jig is not included in the LM Guide package as standard. When
desiring to use it, contact THK.
506E
End Piece EP
For those models whose balls may fall if the LM rail is pulled out of the LM block, an end piece is attached to the product to prevent the LM block from being removed from the LM rail.
For models that can use the end piece, see the table below.
If removing the end piece when using the LM Guide, be sure that the LM block will not overshoot.
The end piece can also be used as a fixing jig for a steel tape, and is available also for the LM rail of
models SSR, SR and HSR.
C
T
B1-122
506E
Model No.
LM Guide
[LM Guide]
Models SHS, SSR, SVR/SVS, SHW, HSR, SR, NR/NRS, HRW, JR, NSR-TBC, HSR-M1, SRM1 and HSR-M2.
Model No.
Type of
With QZ Contamination protection
LM block Lubricator accessory symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Model EPF
EPF7M 16 +55L P M
Model No.
LM rail length
(in mm)
Guaranteed stroke
(in mm)
Rail material:
Stainless steel (standard)
B1-123
LM Guide
Model number configurations differ depending on the model features. Refer to the corresponding
sample model number configuration.
506E
Type of
LM block
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
2 SRS20M QZ UU C1 +220L P M -
Model No.
With QZ Contamination
Lubricator protection accessory
symbol (*1)
LM rail length
(in mm)
Stainless
steel
LM rail
No. of LM blocks
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
used on the same rail
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)/Precision grade (P)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76. (*4) See A1-13.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
[Cross LM Guide]
Total No. of
LM blocks
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
With QZ
Lubricator
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A1-510. (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76.
B1-124
506E
Model No.
[Separate LM Guides]
Model HR
2 HR2555 UU M +1000L P T M
Model No. Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Stainless steel
LM block
Model GSR
LM block
LM rail
GSR25 -1060L H K
GSR25 T UU
Model
number
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
Model
number
LM rail length
(in mm)
Symbol for
tapped-hole
LM rail type
Type of LM block
GSR25 T 2 UU +1060L H T K
Model No. Type of
LM block
Contamination
LM rail length
protection
(in mm)
accessory symbol (*1)
[R Guide]
Model HCR
Contamination protection
accessory symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail radius
R-Guide
center angle (in mm)
(*1) See A1-510 (contamination protection accessories). (*2) See A1-70. (*3) See A1-76.
(*4) Number of LM rails used on one arc. For details, contact THK.
B1-125
LM Guide
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail
LM rail length
(in mm)
506E
[Straight-Curved Guide]
Model HMG
Contamination Overall linear LM rail Center angle of one No. of inner curved Radius of outer Symbol for No. of
protection
rails used on the
accessory
length per rail
inner curved rail
LM rails jointed
curved rail
symbol (*1)
same plane (*2)
Radius of inner
curved rail
Model HSR-M1VV
HSR15M1R 1 VV C1 +400L P -
Symbol for No. of rails used
Radial clearance
on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
Labyrinth seal
Accuracy symbol (*3)
symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks used
LM rail length (in mm)
on one rail
Model No.
(*1) See A1-70 (*2) See A1-397 (*3) See A1-76 (*4) See A1-13.
Note1) The radial clearance, maximum LM rail length and accuracy class are equal to that of model HSR.
Note2) With this model, a single-rail unit constitutes one set (i.e., the required number of sets when 2 rails are used in parallel
is 2).
Model SR-MS
SR15MSV 1 CS +340L P -
Model No.
LM rail length
(in mm)
Radial clearance
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
used on one rail
Note) With this model, a single-rail unit constitutes one set (i.e., the required number of sets when 2 rails are used in parallel
is 2).
B1-126
506E
Model No.
Notes on Ordering
[Order units]
Note that the number of items that constitute one set differs depending on the type of LM guide.
Check the sample model number configurations and the accompanying notes.
SHS25C2SSC1+640L 1 set
HR2555UU+600L 1 set
SCR25UU+1200/1000LP 1 set
LM Guide
SHS25C2SSC1+640L-2 sets
GSR25TUU+1060L 2 sets
B1-127
506E
B1-128
506E
Precautions on Use
LM Guide
[Precautions on Use]
(1) Prevent foreign material, such as cutting chips or coolant, from entering the product. Failure to
do so may cause damage.
(2) If the product is used in an environment where cutting chips, coolant, corrosive solvents, water,
etc., may enter the product, use bellows, covers, etc., to prevent them from entering the product.
(3) Do not use this product if the external temperature exceeds 80. Unless the unit is specially designed to be heat-resistant, exposure to such temperatures may deform or damage plastic and
rubber parts.
(4) If foreign material such as cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant after
cleaning the product.
(5) Micro-strokes tend to obstruct oil film to form on the raceway in contact with the rolling element,
and may lead to fretting corrosion. Take consideration using grease offering excellent fretting prevention. It is also recommended that a stroke movement corresponding to the length of the LM
block be made on a regular basis to make sure oil film is formed between the raceway and rolling
element.
(6) Do not use undue force when fitting parts (pin, key, etc.) to the product. This may generate permanent deformation on the raceway, leading to loss of functionality.
(7) If, for operational reasons, it becomes absolutely necessary to remove the LM block from the LM
rail and reattach it, a special mounting jig must be used for this purpose. (The mounting jig is not
included with standard versions of the product. To obtain one, please contact THK.)
(8) Position the mounting jig so that one end abuts the end of the LM rail. When the rail and the jig
are exactly aligned, the LM block can be loaded onto the rail.
(9) Take care to keep the LM block straight. Loading the block at an angle can introduce foreign
matter, damage internal components, or cause balls to fall out.
(10) The LM block must contain all its internal rolling elements (balls) when mounted on the LM rail.
Using a block with any balls removed may result in premature damage.
(11) Please contact THK if any balls fall out of the LM block; do not use the block if any balls are
missing.
B1-129
LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) This product consists mostly of heavy items (20 kg or more). When moving heavy items, use 2
or more people or moving equipment. Doing so may cause injury or damage.
(2) Do not disassemble the parts. This will result in loss of functionality.
(3) Tilting an LM block or LM rail may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(4) Take care not to drop or strike the LM Guide. Doing so may cause injury or damage. Giving an impact
to it could also cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
(5) Do not remove the LM block from the LM rail during setup.
(6) Do not insert hands or fingers into the mounting holes on the LM rail, as they could get caught
between the rail and the LM block, resulting in injury.
(7) To ensure personal safety, wear gloves and protective footwear when handling this product.
506E
(12) If the end plate is damaged due to an accident, etc., balls may fall out or the LM block may
become detached from the LM rail and drop. If the LM Guide will be used hanging upside
down, take preventive measures such as adding a safety mechanism to prevent falls.
(13) Insufficient rigidity or accuracy of mounting members causes the bearing load to concentrate on
one point and the bearing performance will drop significantly. Accordingly, give sufficient consideration to the rigidity/accuracy of the housing and base and strength of the fixing bolts.
(14) When removing the LM block from the LM rail and then replacing the block, an LM block mounting/removing jig that facilitates such installation is available. Contact THK for details.
[Lubrication]
(1) Thoroughly remove anti-rust oil and feed lubricant before using the product.
(2) Do not mix different lubricants. Mixing greases using the same type of thickening agent may still
cause adverse interaction between the two greases if they use different additives, etc.
(3) When using the product in locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environments such
as clean rooms, vacuum and low/high temperature, use the grease appropriate for the specification/
environment.
(4) When lubricating the product having no grease nipple or oil hole, apply grease directly on the raceway
and stroke the product several times to let the grease spread inside.
(5) The consistency of grease changes according to the temperature. Take note that the slide resistance
of the LM Guide also changes as the consistency of grease changes.
(6) After lubrication, the slide resistance of the LM Guide may increase due to the agitation resistance of
grease. Be sure to perform a break-in to let the grease spread fully, before operating the machine.
(7) Excess grease may scatter immediately after lubrication, so wipe off scattered grease as necessary.
(8) The properties of grease deteriorate and its lubrication performance drops over time, so grease must
be checked and added properly according to the use frequency of the machine.
(9) Although the lubrication interval may vary according to use conditions and the service environment,
lubrication should be performed approximately every 100 km in travel distance (three to six months).
Set the final lubrication interval/amount based on the actual machine.
(10)If the mounting orientation is other than horizontal use, the lubricant may not reach the raceway completely. For the mounting orientation and the lubrication, see B1-28 and
B24-2, respectively.
(11)When adopting oil lubrication, the lubricant may not be distributed throughout the LM block depending
on the mounting orientation of the block. Contact THK in advance for details.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Guide, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a room in a
horizontal orientation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
After the product has been in storage for an extended period of time, lubricant inside may have deteriorated, so add new lubricant before use.
[Disposal]
Dispose of the product properly as industrial waste.
B1-130
506E
Precautions on Use
Precautions on Handling the LM Guide for Special Environment
Oil-Free LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) The Oil-Free LM Guide is suitable for use at high temperatures, under atmospheric pressure or
in a high-vacuum environment of 10-6 Pa, and is designed for ultra-low dust emission. It is not
intended for use in locations requiring rigidity. Because a preload would affect the strength of its
Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film, it does not support preloads.
(2) The product can be used in temperatures ranging from 20 to 150.
(3) To ensure proper function of the Dry Lubrication S-Compound Film, use this product in an environment free from condensation, at a humidity level of 40% or less.
(4) This product is not intended for joint use.
(5) Great care must be taken in the installation of the Oil-Free LM Guide, which requires greater
precision compared to standard LM Guides.
(6) If the LM block is removed from the LM rail, balls may fall out, and the Dry Lubrication S-Com-
pound Film can be damaged when the block is remounted. If it becomes necessary to remove
the LM block from the LM rail, please contact THK.
(7) This product should be stored in a horizontal position, in its original wrapping and package, in
a controlled, stable environment free from abnormal high or low temperatures or high humidity.
THK recommends storing it at room temperature (255), with a humidity level of 40% RH or
lower and an air-purity level of 10,000 or lower.
(8) This product has been thoroughly cleaned and degreased and then sealed in moisture-proof
packaging. If possible, open the package immediately prior to using the product.
(9) Once the packaging has been opened, store the product inside a clean, dry receptacle accompanied by silica gel or another drying agent. Do not use anti-rust oil or corrosion- or tarnishpreventive paper or fluid with this product.
(10)Wear protective rubber or vinyl gloves while handling this product and make sure the surrounding environment is relatively clean.
B1-131
LM Guide
[Handling]
(1) This product has been thoroughly cleaned and degreased and then sealed in moisture-proof
packaging. If possible, open the package immediately prior to using the product.
(2) Once the packaging has been opened, store the product inside a clean, dry receptacle accompanied by silica gel or another drying agent. Do not use anti-rust oil or corrosion- or tarnishpreventive paper or fluid with this product.
(3) Wear protective rubber or vinyl gloves while handling this product and make sure the surrounding environment is relatively clean.
506E
B1-132
506E
Precautions on Use
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide
Cap GC
For details regarding the GC cap, see B1-112.
[Handling]
If GC caps are specified for the product, the edges of the LM rail mounting hole openings will be
sharp. Take great care not to injure your fingers or hands while working.
When fitting GC caps, use a flat aligning tool to gradually punch the cap into the hole until it is level
with the upper surface of the LM rail. Then run an oil stone over the rail until the upper surface of the
rail and the GC caps are completely flat.
B1-133
LM Guide
[Service environment]
Be sure the service temperature of this product is between -20 to +80, and do not clean the product by immersing it in an organic solvent or white kerosene, or leave it unpacked.
It contacts only with the LM rail raceway. Do not use it in harsh environments.
506E
B1-134